OIML TC9/SC1

**[Please note]{.underline}:**

**1. All changes against 1^st^ Committee Draft (December 2004) are
marked [red]{.underline}**

**2. Paragraphs / sentences / words that have been deleted are
[not]{.underline} marked**

**[3. Remaining points that need clarification by the BIML are marked
with yellow background ([see also list on page 4]{.underline})]{.mark}**

**INTERNATIONAL RECOMMENDATION**

**2^nd^ Committee Draft (CD)**

**Revision**

**International Recommendation**

**OIML R76**

**Non-automatic weighing instruments**

**Part 1: Metrological and technical requirements -Tests**

CONTENTS

Foreword

T Terminology\
T.1 General definitions\
T.2 Construction of an instrument\
T.3 Metrological characteristics of an instrument\
T.4 Metrological properties of an instrument\
T.5 Indications and errors\
T.6 Influences and reference conditions\
T.7 Performance test\
T.8 Index of terms defined

T.9 Abbreviations and symbols

1 Scope

2 Principles of the Recommendation\
2.1 Units of measurement\
2.2 Principles of the metrological requirements\
2.3 Principles of the technical requirements\
2.4 Application of requirements\
2.5 Terminology

3 Metrological requirements\
3.1 Principles of classification\
3.2 Classification of instruments\
3.3 Additional requirements for a multi-interval instrument\
3.4 Auxiliary indicating devices\
3.5 Maximum permissible errors\
3.6 Permissible differences between results\
3.7 Test standards\
3.8 Discrimination\
3.9 Variations due to influence quantities and time\
3.10 Type evaluation tests and examinations

4 Technical requirements for a self- or semi-self-indicating instrument\
4.1 General requirements of construction\
4.2 Indication of weighing results\
4.3 Analogue indicating devices\
4.4 Digital indicating devices\
4.5 Zero-setting and zero-tracking devices\
4.6 Tare devices\
4.7 Preset tare devices\
4.8 Locking positions\
4.9 Auxiliary verification devices (removable or fixed)\
4.10 Selection of weighing ranges on a multiple range instrument\
4.11 Devices for selection (or switching) between various load
receptors-load transmitting\
devices and various load measuring devices\
4.12 "Plus" and "minus" comparator instrument\
4.13 Instrument for direct sales to the public\
4.14 Additional requirements for a price-computing instrument for direct
sales to the public\
4.15 Instrument similar to one normally used for direct sales to the
public\
4.16 Price-labelling instrument\
4.17 Mechanical counting instrument with unit-weight receptor

4.18 Additional technical requirements for mobile instruments

4.19 Portable instruments for weighing road vehicles

5 Requirements for electronic instruments\
5.1 General requirements\
5.2 Acting upon significant faults\
5.3 Functional requirements\
5.4 Performance and span stability tests

5.5 Additional requirements for software-controlled electronic devices

6 Technical requirements for a non-self-indicating instrument\
6.1 Minimum sensitivity\
6.2 Acceptable solutions for indicating devices\
6.3 Conditions of construction\
6.4 Simple equal arm beam\
6.5 Simple 1/10 ratio beam\
6.6 Simple sliding poise instrument (steelyard)\
6.7 Roberval and Béranger instruments\
6.8 Instruments with ratio platforms\
6.9 Instrument with a load-measuring device\
with accessible sliding poises (of the steelyard type)

7 Marking of instruments and modules

7.1 Descriptive markings\
7.2 Verification marks

8 Metrological controls\
8.1 Liability to metrological controls\
8.2 Type approval\
8.3 Initial verification\
8.4 Subsequent metrological control

Annex A Testing procedures for non-automatic weighing instruments\
A.1 Administrative examination\
A.2 Compare construction with documentation\
A.3 Initial examination\
A.4 Performance tests\
A.5 Influence factors\
A.6 Endurance test

Annex B Additional tests for electronic instruments\
B.1 General requirements for electronic instruments under test (EUT)\
B.2 Damp heat, steady state

B.3 Performance tests for disturbances\
B.4 Span stability test

Annex C Testing and certification of indicators and analogue data
processing devices as modules of

non-automatic weighing instruments\
C.1 Applicable requirements\
C.2 General principles of testing\
C.3 Tests\
C.4 OIML Certificates

Annex D Testing and certification of digital devices (digital data
processing devices, terminals, digital displays) as modules of
non-automatic weighing instruments

D.1 Applicable requirements\
D.2 General principles of testing\
D.3 Tests\
D.4 OIML Certificates

Annex E Testing and certification of weighing modules as modules of
non-automatic weighing instruments\
E.1 Applicable requirements\
E.2 General principles of testing\
E.3 Tests\
E.4 OIML Certificates

Annex F Compatibility checking of modules of non-automatic weighing
instruments\
F.1 Weighing instrument\
F.2 Separately tested load cells\
F.3 Separately tested indicators and analogue data processing devices\
F.4 Compatibility checks for modules with analogue output\
F.5 Compatibility checks for modules with digital output\
F.6 Examples of compatibility checks

Annex G Additional examinations and tests for software-controlled
digital devices and instruments\
G.1 Devices and instruments with embedded software\
G.2 Personal computers and other devices with programmable or loadable
software\
G.3 Data storage devices\
G.4 Evaluation report

Bibliography

**FOREWORD**

The Organisation Internationale de Métrologie Légale (OIML) is a
world-wide, intergovernmental organization whose main task is that of
harmonizing the regulations and metrological controls applied by the
national metrological services, or related organizations, of its Member
States.

The main categories of OIML publications are : \...

**[((to be revised / updated by BIML))]{.mark}**

**\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\--**

> **[[Points / proposals of a general / editorial nature that require
> action by the BIML]{.underline}]{.mark}**

[]{.mark}

> **[1. Revision / update of this [FOREWORD.]{.underline}]{.mark}**
>
> **[2. There is the suggestion to [add one or more formats (examples)
> of OIML Certificates of Conformity]{.underline} dedicated to
> non-automatic weighing instruments and modules (chapters C.4 and
> E.4.1) as a separate Annex to R76-1 rather than just referring to OIML
> P-1, Annex A. -\
> In a CIML-meeting, it has been suggested to complete relevant OIML
> Recommendations with a dedicated format of an OIML Certificate of
> Conformity.]{.mark}**
>
> **[3. There was a request that "[OIML certificates for modules must be
> clearly distinguishable from OIML certificates for complete
> instruments]{.underline}". The BIML is asked to indicate how this
> should be done (preferably with an example or definition of
> titles).]{.mark}**
>
> **[4. ["Evaluation report" or "test report"]{.underline}?\
> In this 2CD the secretariat has decided to uniformly use "Evaluation
> report" rather than "Test report"; however the final decision should
> be made by the BIML (refer e.g. to "Contents", 2.3, 4.18.1, 7.2,
> 8.2.1.2, A.3.1, A.3.3, A.4.1.6, A.4.1.7, A.4.7, A.4.13, C.2.5, C.3,
> C.4.2, E.2.2, E.3, E.4.2, G.4).]{.mark}**
>
> **[5. Adaptation of the [footnote under 8.2.2]{.underline} to align
> with the latest developments of the [OIML Certificate
> System]{.underline} and other recent developments (MAA,
> etc.)]{.mark}**
>
> **[6. Editorial and linguistic improvements, including the comments of
> TC9/SC1 members on the 2CD]{.mark}**

[]{.mark}

**EXPLANATORY NOTE**

This second Committee Draft (2CD) is based on:

\- a questionnaire circulated to TC9/SC1 members and liaisons in May
2002,

\- a respective vote concerning the further actions circulated in April
2003,

\- a Working Draft (WD) based on the vote, circulated in December 2003,

\- the comments on the WD received from 14 P members and CECIP in the
course of 2004.

\- the first Committee Draft (1CD) circulated in December 2004, and

\- the comments on the 1CD received from 18 P members and CECIP in the
course of 2005

**Based on the questionnaire (2002), on a majority vote of TC9/SC1
(2003) and on a number of comments on the WD (2004) and the 1CD (2005)
the following [major changes and improvements have been implemented in
comparison to R76 (1992)]{.underline}:**

1\. [Extension of the modular concept]{.underline} according to the new
rules of the OIML Certificate System and the technological progress,
including a new, clear definition of NAWI modules and the possibility
for issuing OIML Certificates of Conformity for the most important NAWI
modules (indicators, weighing modules, etc.), and including provisions
for appropriate compatibility checks for modules.

2\. Introduction of a [concept for testing and certifying "families" of
NAWI and NAWI modules]{.underline} in accordance with the new rules of
the OIML Certificate System

3\. Introduction of appropriate and flexible [requirements for
software-controlled NAWIs]{.underline}, including PC based NAWIs and
modules

4\. Introduction of new provisions for [mobile NAWIs]{.underline} and
[portable NAWIs]{.underline}

5\. [Update of load cell requirements]{.underline} according to OIML R60
(2000)

6\. [Update of EMC requirements]{.underline} for electronic measuring
instruments according to OIML D11 (2004) and new respective IEC
standards

7\. [Update of Terminology and important definitions]{.underline}
according to technological progress

In spite of serious efforts to shorten the main body of the
recommendation its size has considerably grown. This is, however, mainly
due to the introduction of the family concept and the extension of the
modular concept according to the new OIML Certificate System with the
consequence that a couple of new Annexes had to be added in order to
support the possibility to issue OIML Certificates of Conformity for
NAWIs modules other than load cells.

In addition, several examples have been added in order to support a
better understanding of requirements and a hopefully harmonised
application of requirements when performing type testing of NAWIs,
families of NAWIs and NAWI modules. This seems to be especially of
importance in view of the increasing worldwide acceptance of test
results under the new OIML MAA.

OIML TC9/SC1 "Non-automatic Weighing Instruments"

Secretariat: France & Germany

**Composition of TC9/SC1:**

  -----------------------------------------------------------------------
  Participating States:     Observer States:       Institutions in
                                                   liaison:
  ------------------------- ---------------------- ----------------------
  Australia                 Bulgaria               BIML

  Austria                   Cyprus                 CECIP

  Belgium                   Hungary                ISO

  Brazil                    Iran                   

  Canada                    Ireland                

  China                     Italy                  

  Czech Republic            New Zealand            

  Denmark                   Slovakia               

  Finland                                          

  France                                           

  Germany                                          

  Japan                                            

  Republic of Korea                                

  Netherlands                                      

  Norway                                           

  Poland                                           

  Romania                                          

  Russian Federation                               

  Serbia&Montenegro                                

  Slovenia                                         

  South Africa                                     

  Spain                                            

  Sweden                                           

  Switzerland                                      

  United Kingdom                                   

  United States                                    
  -----------------------------------------------------------------------

**TERMINOLOGY**

(terms, definitions and references)

The terminology used in this Recommendation conforms to the
"International Vocabulary of Basic and General Terms in Metrology\"
(VIM) /1/, the \"International Vocabulary of Terms in Legal Metrology\"
(VIML) /2/, the \"OIML Certificate System for Measuring Instruments\"
/3/ and other relevant OIML documents. In addition, for the purposes of
this Recommendation, the following definitions apply. An index of all
the terms, definitions and references defined below can be found under
T.8.

T.1 General definitions

T.1.1 Weighing instrument

> Measuring instrument that serves to determine the mass of a body by
> using the action of gravity on this body.
>
> Note : In this Recommendation "mass" (or "weight value") is preferably
> used in the sense of "conventional mass" or "conventional value of the
> result of weighing in air" according to R111 and D28, whereas "weight"
> is preferably used for an embodiment (= material measure) of mass that
> is regulated in regard to its physical and metrological
> characteristics.
>
> The instrument may also be used to determine other quantities,
> magnitudes, parameters or characteristics related to the determined
> mass.
>
> According to its method of operation, a weighing instrument is
> classified as an automatic weighing instrument (AWI) or a
> non-automatic weighing instrument (NAWI).

T.1.2 Non-automatic weighing instrument

> Instrument that requires the intervention of an operator during the
> weighing process to decide that the weighing result is acceptable.
>
> Note 1: Deciding that the weighing result is acceptable includes any
> intelligent action of the operator that affects the result, such as
> taking an action when an indication is stable or adjusting the mass of
> the weighed load, and to make a decision regarding the acceptance of
> each weighing result on observing the indication or releasing a print
> out. A non-automatic weighing process allows the operator to take an
> action (i.e. adjust the load, adjust the unit price, determine that
> the load is acceptable, etc.) which influences the weighing result in
> the case where the weighing result is not acceptable.
>
> Note 2: In case of doubt whether an instrument is a NAWI or an AWI the
> definitions for automatic weighing instruments as given in the OIML
> recommendations R50, R51, R61, R106, R107 and R134 have higher
> priority than the criteria of Note 1.
>
> A non-automatic weighing instrument may be:
>
> --- graduated or non-graduated,
>
> --- self-indicating, semi-self-indicating or non-self-indicating.
>
> Note: In this Recommendation a NAWI is called an \"instrument\".

T.1.2.1 Graduated instrument

> Instrument allowing the direct reading of the complete or partial
> weighing result.

T.1.2.2 Non-graduated instrument

> Instrument not fitted with a scale numbered in units of mass.

T.1.2.3 Self-indicating instrument

> Instrument in which the position of equilibrium is obtained without
> the intervention of an operator.

T.1.2.4 Semi-self-indicating instrument

> Instrument with a self-indication weighing range, in which the
> operator intervenes to alter the limits of this range.

T.1.2.5 Non-self-indicating instrument

> Instrument in which the position of equilibrium is obtained entirely
> by the operator.

T.1.2.6 Electronic instrument

> Instrument equipped with electronic devices.

T.1.2.7 Instrument with price scales

> Instrument that indicates the price to pay by means of price charts or
> scales related to a range of unit prices.

T.1.2.8 Price-computing instrument

> Instrument that calculates the price to pay on the basis of the
> indicated weight value and the unit price.

T.1.2.9 Price-labelling instrument

> Price-computing instrument that prints the weight value, unit price
> and price to pay for prepackages.

T.1.2.10 Self-service instrument

> Instrument that is intended to be operated by the customer.

T.1.2.11 Mobile instrument

> Non-automatic weighing instrument mounted on or incorporated into a
> vehicle.
>
> Note: Vehicle [mounted]{.underline} instrument is a complete weighing
> instrument that is firmly mounted on a vehicle, and that is designed
> for that special purpose. A vehicle [incorporated]{.underline}
> instrument uses parts of the vehicle for the weighing instrument.
>
> Example of a vehicle mounted instrument: postal scale mounted on a
> vehicle (mobile post office)
>
> Example of vehicle incorporated instruments: Garbage weighers, patient
> lifters, pallet lifters, fork lifters, wheel chair weighers.

T.1.2.12 Portable instrument for weighing road vehicles

> Non-automatic weighing instrument having a load receptor - in one or
> several parts - that determines the total mass of road vehicles, and
> that is designed to be moved to other locations.
>
> Examples: Portable weighbridge, group of associated non-automatic axle
> (or wheel) load weighers
>
> Note: This Recommendation covers only weighbridges and groups of
> associated non-automatic axle (or wheel) load weighers that determine
> simultaneously the total mass of a road vehicle with [all]{.underline}
> axles (or wheels) being [simultaneously]{.underline} supported by
> appropriate parts of a load receptor.

T.1.2.13 Grading instrument

> Instrument which assigns a weighing result to a predetermined range of
> mass to determine a tariff or toll.
>
> Examples: postal scales, garbage weighers

T.1.3 Indications of an instrument

> Value of a quantity provided by a measuring instrument.
>
> Note: "Indication", "indicate" or "indicating" includes both
> displaying and/or printing.

T.1.3.1 Primary indications

> Indications, signals and symbols that are subject to requirements of
> this Recommendation.

T.1.3.2 Secondary indications

> Indications, signals and symbols that are not primary indications.

T.2 Construction of an instrument

> In this Recommendation the term \"device\" is used for any means by
> which a specific function is performed, irrespective of the physical
> realization, e.g. by a mechanism or a key initiating an operation; the
> device may be a small part or a major portion of an instrument.

T.2.1 Main devices

T.2.1.1 Load receptor

> Part of the instrument intended to receive the load.

T.2.1.2 Load-transmitting device

> Part of the instrument for transmitting the force produced by the load
> acting on the load receptor, to the load-measuring device.

T.2.1.3 Load-measuring device

> Part of the instrument for measuring the mass of the load by means of
> an equilibrium device for balancing the force coming from the load
> transmitting device, and an indicating or printing device.

T.2.2 Module

> Identifiable part of an instrument that performs a specific function
> or functions, and that can be separately evaluated according to
> specific metrological and technical performance requirements in the
> relevant Recommendation. The modules of a weighing instrument are
> subject to specified partial error limits.
>
> Note: Typical modules of a weighing instrument are: load cell,
> indicator, analogue or digital data processing device, weighing
> module, terminal, primary display.
>
> For the present, independent OIML Certificates of Conformity according
> to R76 can be issued for the modules mentioned under T.2.2.2 through
> T.2.2.7.

Figure 1

Definition of typical modules according to Terminology T.2.2 and 3.10.2\
(other combinations are possible)

![](media/image1.jpeg){width="6.676388888888889in"
height="2.821527777777778in"}

  --------------------------- ----------- --- ---- --- ---- ------- ---- ---------- ---- ------- ---- ------- ---- ---
  analogue load cell          (T.2.2.1)            2                                                               

  digital load cell           (T.2.2.1)            2   \+   3       \+   (4)\*^)^                                  

  indicator                   (T.2.2.2)                     \(3\)   \+   4          \+   \(5\)   \+   \(6\)   \+   7

  analogue data processing    (T.2.2.3)                     3       \+   4          \+   \(5\)   \+   \(6\)        
  device                                                                                                           

  digital data processing     (T.2.2.4)                                  \(4\)      \+   5       \+   \(6\)        
  device                                                                                                           

  terminal                    (T.2.2.5)                                                  \(5\)   \+   6       \+   7

  primary display             (T.2.2.6)                                                                            7

  weighing module             (T.2.2.7)   1   \+   2   \+   3       \+   4          \+   \(5\)   \+   \(6\)        
  --------------------------- ----------- --- ---- --- ---- ------- ---- ---------- ---- ------- ---- ------- ---- ---

\*^)^ Numbers in brackets indicate options

T.2.2.1 Load cell

> Force transducer which, after taking into account the effects of the
> acceleration of gravity and air buoyancy at the location of its use,
> measures mass by converting the measured quantity (mass) into another
> measured quantity (output) \[taken from OIML R60 (2000)\].
>
> Note:\
> Load cells equipped with electronics including amplifier,
> analogue-to-digital converter (ADC), and data processing device
> (optionally) are called digital load cells (see figure 1).

T.2.2.2 Indicator

> Electronic device of an instrument that may perform the
> analogue-to-digital conversion of the output signal of the load cell,
> and further processes the data, and displays the weighing result in
> units of mass.

T.2.2.3 Analogue data processing device

Electronic device of an instrument that performs the analogue-to-digital
conversion of the output signal of the load cell, and further processes
the data, and supplies the weighing result in a digital format via a
digital interface without displaying it. It may optionally have one or
more keys (or mouse, touch-screen etc.) to operate the instrument.

T.2.2.4 Digital data processing device

> Electronic device of an instrument that further processes the data,
> and supplies the weighing result in a digital format via a digital
> interface without displaying it. It may optionally have one or more
> keys to operate the instrument.

T.2.2.5 Terminal

> Digital device that has one or more keys to operate the instrument,
> and a display to provide the weighing results transmitted via the
> digital interface of a weighing module or an analogue data processing
> device.

T.2.2.6 Digital display

> A digital display can be realised as a primary display or as a
> secondary display:
>
> a\) primary display: Either incorporated in the indicator housing or
> in the terminal housing or realised as a display in a separate housing
> (i.e. terminal without keys), e.g. for use in combination with a
> weighing module.
>
> b\) secondary display: additional peripheral device (optional) which
> repeats the weighing result and any other primary indication, or
> provides further, non-metrological information.
>
> Note: Primary and secondary display not to be mixed up with primary
> and secondary indication (T.1.3.1 and T.1.3.2)

T.2.2.7 Weighing module

That part of the weighing instrument that comprises all mechanical and
electronic devices (i.e. load receptor, load-transmitting device, load
cell, and analogue data processing device or digital data processing
device) but not having the means to display the weighing result. It may
optionally have devices for further processing (digital) data and
operating the instrument.

T.2.3 Electronic parts

T.2.3.1 Electronic device

> A device employing electronic sub-assemblies and performing a specific
> function. An electronic device is usually manufactured as a separate
> unit and can be independently tested.
>
> Note: An electronic device, as defined above, may be a complete
> instrument (e.g. an instrument for direct sales to the public), a
> module (e.g. indicator, analogue data processing device, weighing
> module) or a peripheral device (e.g. printer, secondary display).

T.2.3.2 Electronic sub-assembly

> A part of an electronic device, employing electronic components and
> having a recognizable function of its own.
>
> Examples: A/D converter, display

T.2.3.3 Electronic component

> The smallest physical entity that uses electron or hole conduction in
> semi-conductors, gases or in a vacuum.

T.2.3.4 Digital device

Electronic device that only performs digital functions and provides a
digitized output or display.

Examples: printer, primary or secondary display, keyboard, terminal,
data storage device, personal computer

T.2.3.5 Peripheral device

A peripheral device is an additional device which repeats or further
processes the weighing result and other primary indications.

> Examples: printer, secondary display, keyboard, terminal, data storage
> device, personal computer

T.2.3.6 Protective interface

Interface (hardware and/or software) which allows to introduce only such
data into the data processing device of an instrument, module or
electronic component, which cannot

> \- display data, that are not clearly defined and could be taken for a
> weighing result,
>
> \- falsify displayed, processed or stored weighing results or primary
> indications,
>
> \- adjust the instrument or change any adjustment factor, except
> releasing an adjustment procedure with incorporated devices or in case
> of class ![](media/image2.jpeg){width="0.35in" height="0.2in"}
> instruments with external adjustment weights as well

T.2.4 Displaying device (of a weighing instrument)

> Device providing the weighing result in visual form.

T.2.4.1 Displaying component

> Component that displays the equilibrium and/or the result.
>
> On an instrument with one position of equilibrium it displays only the
> equilibrium.
>
> On an instrument with several positions of equilibrium it displays
> both the equilibrium and the result.

T.2.4.2 Scale mark

> A line or other mark on a displaying component corresponding to a
> specified value of mass.

T.2.4.3 Scale base

> An imaginary line through the centres of all the shortest scale marks.

T.2.5 Auxiliary indicating devices

T.2.5.1 Rider

> Detachable poise of small mass that may be placed and moved either on
> a graduated bar integral with the beam or on the beam itself.

T.2.5.2 Device for interpolation of reading (vernier or nonius)

> Device connected to the displaying element and sub-dividing the scale
> of an instrument, without special adjustment.

T.2.5.3 Complementary displaying device

> Adjustable device by means of which it is possible to estimate, in
> units of mass, the value corresponding to the distance between a scale
> mark and the displaying component.

T.2.5.4 Indicating device with a differentiated scale division

> Digital indicating device of which the last figure after the decimal
> sign is clearly differentiated from other figures.

T.2.6 Extended displaying device

> A device temporarily changing the actual scale interval (d) to a value
> less than the verification scale interval (e) following a manual
> command.

T.2.7 Supplementary devices

T.2.7.1 Levelling device

> Device for setting an instrument to its reference position.

T.2.7.2 Zero-setting device

> Device for setting the indication to zero when there is no load on the
> load receptor.

T.2.7.2.1 Non-automatic zero-setting device

> Device for setting the indication to zero by an operator.

T.2.7.2.2 Semi-automatic zero-setting device

> Device for setting the indication to zero automatically following a
> manual command.

T.2.7.2.3 Automatic zero-setting device

> Device for setting the indication to zero automatically without the
> intervention of an operator.

T.2.7.2.4 Initial zero-setting device

> Device for setting the indication to zero automatically at the time
> the instrument is switched on and before it is ready for use.

T.2.7.3 Zero-tracking device

> Device for maintaining the zero indication within certain limits
> automatically.

T.2.7.4 Tare device

> Device for setting the indication to zero when a load is on the load
> receptor:
>
> --- without altering the weighing range for net loads (additive tare
> device), or

-   reducing the weighing range for net loads (subtractive tare device).

> It may function as:
>
> --- a non-automatic device (load balanced by an operator),
>
> --- a semi-automatic device (load balanced automatically following a
> single manual command),
>
> --- an automatic device (load balanced automatically without the
> intervention of an operator).

T.2.7.4.1 Tare-balancing device

> Tare device without indication of the tare value when the instrument
> is loaded.

T.2.7.4.2 Tare-weighing device

> Tare device that stores the tare value and is capable of displaying or
> printing it whether or not the instrument is loaded.

T.2.7.5 Preset tare device

> Device for subtracting a preset tare value from a gross or net weight
> value and indicating the result of the calculation. The weighing range
> for net loads is reduced accordingly.

T.2.7.6 Locking device

> Device for immobilizing all or part of the mechanism of an instrument.

T.2.7.7 Auxiliary verification device

> Device permitting separate verification of one or more main devices of
> an instrument.

T.2.7.8 Selection device for load receptors and load-measuring devices

> Device for attaching one or more load receptors to one or more load
> measuring devices, whatever intermediate load-transmitting devices are
> used.

T.2.7.9 Indication stabilizing device

> Device for maintaining a stable indication under given conditions.

T.2.8 Software

T.2.8.1 Legally relevant software

> Programs, data and type-specific parameters that belong to the
> measuring instrument or module, and define or fulfil functions which
> are subject to legal control.
>
> Examples of legally relevant data are: Final results of the
> measurement, i.e. gross, net and tare / preset tare value (including
> the decimal sign and the unit), identification of the weighing range
> and the load receptor (if several load receptors have been used),
> software identification.

T.2.8.2 Legally relevant parameter

> Parameter of a measuring instrument or a module subject to legal
> control. The following types of legally relevant parameters can be
> distinguished: type-specific parameters and device-specific
> parameters.

T.2.8.3 Type-specific parameter

> Legally relevant parameter with a value that depends on the type of
> instrument only. Type-specific parameters are part of the legally
> relevant software. They are fixed at type approval of the instrument.
>
> Examples of type-specific parameters are: parameters used for mass
> calculation, stability analysis or price calculation and rounding,
> software identification.

T.2.8.4 Device-specific parameter

> Legally relevant parameter with a value that depends on the individual
> instrument. Device-specific parameters comprise calibration parameters
> (e.g. span adjustment or other adjustments or corrections) and
> configuration parameters (e.g. maximum capacity, minimum capacity,
> units of measurement, etc). They are adjustable or selectable only in
> a special operational mode of the instrument. Device-specific
> parameters may be classified as those that should be secured
> (unalterable) and those that may be accessed (settable parameters) by
> an authorised person.

T.2.8.5 Long-term storage of measurement data

> Storage used for keeping measurement data ready after completion of
> the measurement for later legally relevant purposes (e.g. conclusion
> of a trading transaction at a later date, when the customer is not
> present for the determination of the amount, or for special
> applications identified and legislated by the state).

T.2.8.6 Software identification

> A sequence of readable characters of software that is inextricably
> linked to the software (e.g. version number, checksum).

T.2.8.7 Software separation

> The unambiguous separation of software into legally relevant software
> and non-legally relevant software. If no software separation exists,
> the whole software is to be considered as legally relevant.

T.2.9 Metrologically relevant

> Any device, module, part, component, function or software of a
> weighing instrument that influences the weighing result or any other
> primary indication is considered as metrologically relevant.

T.3 Metrological characteristics of an instrument

T.3.1 Weighing capacity

T.3.1.1 Maximum capacity (Max)

> Maximum weighing capacity, not taking into account the additive tare
> capacity

T.3.1.2 Minimum capacity (Min)

> Value of the load below which the weighing results may be subject to
> an excessive relative error.

T.3.1.3 Self-indication capacity

> Weighing capacity within which equilibrium is obtained without the
> intervention of an operator.

T.3.1.4 Weighing range

> Range between the minimum and maximum capacities.

T.3.1.5 Extension interval of self-indication

> Value by which it is possible to extend the range of self-indication
> within the weighing range.

T.3.1.6 Maximum tare effect (T = + ..., T = - ...)

> Maximum capacity of the additive tare device or the subtractive tare
> device.

T.3.1.7 Maximum safe load (Lim)

> Maximum static load that can be carried by the instrument without
> permanently altering its metrological qualities.

T.3.2 Scale divisions

T.3.2.1 Scale spacing (instrument with analogue indication)

> Distance between any two consecutive scale marks, measured along the
> scale base.

T.3.2.2 Actual scale interval (d)

> Value expressed in units of mass of:
>
> --- the difference between the values corresponding to two consecutive
> scale marks, for analogue indication, or
>
> --- the difference between two consecutive indicated values, for
> digital indication.

T.3.2.3 Verification scale interval (e)

> Value, expressed in units of mass, used for the classification and
> verification of an instrument.

T.3.2.4 Scale interval of numbering

> Value of the difference between two consecutive numbered scale marks.

T.3.2.5 Number of verification scale intervals

> Quotient of the maximum capacity and the verification scale interval:
>
> n = Max/e

T.3.2.6 Multi-interval instrument

> Instrument having one weighing range which is divided into partial
> weighing ranges each with different scale intervals, with the partial
> weighing range determined automatically according to the load applied,
> both on increasing and decreasing loads.

T.3.2.7 Multiple range instrument

> Instrument having two or more weighing ranges with different maximum
> capacities and different scale intervals for the same load receptor,
> each range extending from zero to its maximum capacity.

T.3.3 Reduction ratio R

> The reduction ratio of a load transmitting device is:
>
> R = FM/FL
>
> where:
>
> FM: force acting on the load measuring device,
>
> FL: force acting on the load receptor.

T.3.4 Type

> Definitive model of a weighing instrument or module (including a
> family of instruments or modules) of which all of the elements
> affecting its metrological properties are suitably defined.

T.3.5 Family

> Identifiable group of weighing instruments or modules belonging to the
> same manufactured type that have the same design features and
> metrological principles for measurement (for example the same type of
> indicator, the same type of design of load cell and load transmitting
> device) but which may differ in some metrological and technical
> performance characteristics (e.g. Max, Min, e, d, accuracy class,
> \...).
>
> **The concept of family primarily aims at reducing the test effort at
> type examination. It does not preclude the possibility of listing more
> than one family in one certificate.**

T.4 Metrological properties of an instrument

T.4.1 Sensitivity

> For a given value of the measured mass, the quotient of the change of
> the observed variable *l* and the corresponding change of the measured
> mass M:
>
> k = ∆*l*/∆M

T.4.2 Discrimination

> Ability of an instrument to react to small variations of load.
>
> The discrimination threshold, for a given load, is the value of the
> smallest additional load that, when gently deposited on or removed
> from the load receptor, causes a perceptible change in the indication.

T.4.3 Repeatability

> Ability of an instrument to provide results that agree one with the
> other when the same load is deposited several times and in a
> practically identical way on the load receptor under reasonably
> constant test conditions.

T.4.4 Durability

> Ability of an instrument to maintain its performance characteristics
> over a period of use.

T.4.5 Warm-up time

> The time between the moment power is applied to an instrument and the
> moment at which the instrument is capable of complying with the
> requirements.

T.4.6 Final weight value

> The weight value that is achieved when the instrument is completely at
> rest and balanced, with no disturbances affecting the indication

T.5 Indications and errors

T.5.1 Methods of indication

T.5.1.1 Balancing by weights

> Value of metrologically controlled weights that balance the load
> (taking into account the reduction ratio of the load).

T.5.1.2 Analogue indication

> Indication enabling the evaluation of the equilibrium position to a
> fraction of the scale interval.

T.5.1.3 Digital indication

> Indication in which the scale marks are composed of a sequence of
> aligned figures that do not permit interpolation to fractions of the
> scale interval.

T.5.2 Weighing results

> Note: The following definitions apply only when the indication has
> been zero before the load has been applied to the instrument.

T.5.2.1 Gross value (G or B)

> Indication of the weight value of a load on an instrument, with no
> tare or preset tare device in operation.

T.5.2.2 Net value (N)

> Indication of the weight value of a load placed on an instrument after
> operation of a tare device.

T.5.2.3 Tare value (T)

> The weight value of a load, determined by a tare weighing device.

T.5.3 Other weight values

T.5.3.1 Preset tare value (PT)

> Numerical value, representing a weight, that is introduced into the
> instrument. It is a predetermined tare value that is used for one or
> several weighings.
>
> \"Introduced\" includes procedures such as: keying in, recalling from
> a data storage, or inserting via an interface.
>
> "Predetermined" means that a tare value is determined once and is
> applied to other weighings without determining the individual tare
> values.

T.5.3.2 Calculated net value

> Value of the difference between a gross or net weight value and a
> preset tare value.

T.5.3.3 Calculated total weight value

> Calculated sum of more than one weight value and/or calculated net
> value.

T.5.4 Reading

T.5.4.1 Reading by simple juxtaposition

> Reading of the weighing result by simple juxtaposition of consecutive
> figures giving the weighing result, without the need of calculation.

T.5.4.2 Overall inaccuracy of reading

> The overall inaccuracy of reading of an instrument with analogue
> indication is equal to the standard deviation of the same indication,
> the reading of which is carried out under normal conditions of use by
> several observers.
>
> It is customary to make at least ten readings of the result.

T.5.4.3 Rounding error of digital indication

> Difference between the indication and the result the instrument would
> give with analogue indication.

T.5.4.4 Minimum reading distance

> The shortest distance that an observer is able freely to approach the
> displaying device to take a reading under normal conditions of use.
>
> This approach is considered to be free for the observer if there is a
> clear space of at least 0.8 m in front of the displaying device (see
> Figure 2).

Figure 2

![](media/image3.jpeg){width="4.597222222222222in"
height="4.115972222222222in"}

T.5.5 Errors

> See Figure 3 for illustration of certain terms used.

Figure 3

Illustration of certain terms used

![](media/image4.jpeg){width="5.64375in" height="4.138194444444444in"}

M = mass to be measured

E = error of indication (T.5.5.1)

mpe~1~ = maximum permissible error on initial verification

mpe~2~ = maximum permissible error in service

C = characteristic under reference conditions

C~1~ = characteristic due to influence factor or disturbance (\*)

E~SP~ = error of indication evaluated during span stability test

I = intrinsic error (T.5.5.2)

V = variation in the errors of indication during span stability test

Situation 1 - shows the error E~1~ of an instrument due to an influence
factor or a disturbance. I~1~ is the intrinsic error. The fault
(T.5.5.5) due to the influence factor or disturbance applied equals
E~1~ - I~1~.

Situation 2 - shows the average value E~SP1av~ of the errors at the
first measurement of the span stability test, some other errors E~SPi~
and E~SPk~, and the extreme values of the errors, E~SPm~ and E~SPn~, all
these errors being evaluated at different moments during the span
stability test. The variation V in the errors of indication during the
span stability test equals E~SPm~ - E~SPn~.

(\*) For the purposes of this illustration it is supposed that the
influence factor or the disturbance has an influence on the
characteristic which is not erratic.

T.5.5.1 Error (of indication)

> The indication of an instrument minus the (conventional) true value of
> the corresponding mass.

T.5.5.2 Intrinsic error

> The error of an instrument determined under reference conditions.

T.5.5.3 Initial intrinsic error

> The intrinsic error of an instrument as determined prior to the
> performance and span stability tests.

T.5.5.4 Maximum permissible error (mpe)

> Maximum difference, positive or negative, allowed by regulation
> between the indication of an instrument and the corresponding true
> value, as determined by reference standard masses or standard weights,
> with the instrument being at zero at no-load, in the reference
> position.

T.5.5.5 Fault

> The difference between the error of indication and the intrinsic error
> of an instrument.
>
> Note: Principally, a fault is the result of an undesired change of
> data contained in or flowing through an electronic instrument.

T.5.5.6 Significant fault

> A fault greater than e.
>
> Note: For a multi-interval instrument, the value of e is that
> appropriate to the partial weighing range.
>
> The following are not considered to be significant faults, even when
> they exceed e:
>
> --- faults arising from simultaneous and mutually independent causes
> in the instrument,
>
> --- faults implying the impossibility to perform any measurement,
>
> --- faults being so serious that they are bound to be noticed by all
> those interested in the result of measurement,
>
> --- transitory faults being momentary variations in the indication
> which cannot be interpreted, memorized or transmitted as a measuring
> result.

T 5.5.7 Durability error

> The difference between the intrinsic error over a period of use and
> the initial intrinsic error of an instrument.

T.5.5.8 Significant durability error

> A durability error greater than e.
>
> Note 1: A durability error can be due to mechanical wear and tear or
> due to drift and ageing of electronic parts. The concept of
> significant durability error applies only to electronic parts.
>
> Note 2: For a multi-interval instrument, the value of e is that
> appropriate to the partial weighing range.
>
> The following are not considered to be significant durability errors,
> even when they exceed e:
>
> errors occurring after a period of instrument use that are clearly the
> result of a failure of a device/component, or of a disturbance and for
> which the indication:
>
> --- cannot be interpreted, memorized, or transmitted as a measurement
> result, or
>
> --- implies the impossibility to perform any measurement, or
>
> --- is so obviously wrong that it is bound to be noticed by all those
> interested in the result of measurement.

T.5.5.9 Span stability

> The capability of an instrument to maintain the difference between the
> indication at maximum capacity and the indication at zero over a
> period of use within specified limits.

T.6 Influences and reference conditions

T.6.1 Influence quantity

> A quantity that is not the subject of the measurement but which
> influences the values of the measurand or the indication of the
> instrument.

T.6.1.1 Influence factor

> An influence quantity having a value within the specified rated
> operating conditions of the instrument.

T.6.1.2 Disturbance

> An influence quantity having a value within the limits specified in
> this Recommendation, but outside the specified rated operating
> conditions of the instrument.

T.6.2 Rated operating conditions

> Conditions of use, giving the range of values of influence quantities
> for which the metrological characteristics are intended to lie within
> the specified maximum permissible errors.

T.6.3 Reference conditions

> A set of specified values of influence factors fixed to ensure valid
> inter-comparison of the results of measurements.

T.6.4 Reference position

> Position of the instrument at which its operation is adjusted.

T.7 Performance test

> A test to verify whether the equipment under test (EUT) is capable of
> performing its intended functions.

T.8 Index of terms defined

The numbers in brackets refer to important chapters of this
Recommendation

Actual scale interval (3.4.3, 3.5.3.2, 3.8.2.2, A.4.8.2) T.3.2.2\
Analogue data processing device (3.10.2.2, 3.10.2.4, F.3) T.2.2.3

Analogue indication (3.8.2.1, 4.6.3, A.4.8.1) T.5.1.2

Automatic zero-setting device (4.5.6, A.4.1.5, A.4.2.1.3) T.2.7.2.3

Auxiliary indicating devices (3.1.2, 3.4, 4.13.7) T.2.5

Auxiliary verification device (3.7.2, 4.9) T.2.7.7

Balancing by weights T.5.1.1

Calculated net value (4.7.1) T.5.3.2

Calculated total weight value T.5.3.3

Complementary indicating device (3.4.1, 4.3.2) T.2.5.3

Device for interpolation of reading (3.4.1) T.2.5.2

Device-specific parameter (4.1.2.4, 7.1.4, G.2.2.3) T.2.8.4

Digital indication (3.5.3.2, 3.8.2.2, 4.2.2.2, 4.5.5, 4.13.6, A.4.1.6,
A.4.4.3, A.4.8.2) T.5.1.3

Digital device (3.10.2.1, 3.10.4.5, 4.13.6, F.5, G) T.2.3.4

Digital display ([3.10.2.4, C.1]{.mark}) T.2.2.6

Discrimination (3.8, 6.1, A.4.8) T.4.2

Displaying component (4.3, 6.2, 6.3, 6.6) T.2.4.1

Displaying device (2.4, 3.6.3, 4.2.1, 4.2.4, 4.3, 4.4, 4.17.1, 6.2,
A.4.5, E.2.2) T.2.4

Disturbance (3.10.2.2, 3.10.3, 5.1.1, 5.3, 5.4.3, B.3) T.6.1.2

Durability (3.9.4.3, A.6) T.4.4

Durability error (3.9.4.3, A.6) T.5.5.7

Electronic component (4.1.2.4) T.2.3.3

Electronic device (5.5) T.2.3.1

Electronic instrument (2.3, 5, B) T.1.2.6

Electronic sub-assembly T.2.3.2

Error (of indication) (2.2, 3.1.1, 3.5, 3.6, 5.1.1, 8.3.3) T.5.5.1

Extended displaying device (3.4.1, 4.4.3, 4.13.7) T.2.6

Extension interval of self-indication (4.2.5) T.3.1.5

Family (3.10.4, 8.2.1) T.3.5

Fault (5.1, 5.2) T.5.5.5

Final weight value (4.4.2) T.4.6

Grading instrument (3.2) T.1.2.13

Graduated instrument (3.1.2) T.1.2.1

Gross value (4.6.5, 4.13.3) T.5.2.1

Indications of an instrument (3.8.2, 4.2, 4.3.3, 4.4, 4.6.12) T.1.3

Indicating device with a differentiated scale division \...\....(3.4.1)
T.2.5.4

Indication stabilizing device T.2.7.9

Indicator (3.10.2, 5.3.1, 5.5.2, 7.1.5.3, C, F) T.2.2.2

Influence factor (3.5.3.1, 5.4.3, A.5) T.6.1.1

Influence quantity T.6.1

Initial intrinsic error (A.4.4.1) T.5.5.3

Initial zero-setting device (4.5.1, 4.5.4, A.4.4.2) T.2.7.2.4

Instrument with price scales (4.14.2) T.1.2.7

Intrinsic error (5.3.4, A.4.4.1, A.6) T.5.5.2

Legally relevant parameter (5.5.2.2, 5.5.3) T.2.8.2

Legally relevant software (5.5.2, 5.5.3, G.1, G.2) T.2.8.1

Levelling device (3.9.1, 4.18.2) T.2.7.1

Load cell (3.10.2.1, 3.10.2.4, 7.1.5.3, C, F) T.2.2.1

Load-measuring device (2.4, 6.9, 4.11, 7.1.5.1) T.2.1.3

Load receptor (3.6, 4.11, 7.1.5.1, A.4.7) T.2.1.1

Load-transmitting device (3.10.2.1, 4.11) T.2.1.2

Locking device (4.8.1) T.2.7.6

Long-term storage of measurement data (5.5.3) T.2.8.5

Maximum capacity (3.3, 4.13, 6.6, 6.8) T.3.1.1

Maximum permissible error (2.2, 3.1, 3.5, A.4.4.1) T.5.5.4

Maximum safe load (7.1.2) T.3.1.7

Maximum tare effect (A.4.6.1) T.3.1.6

Metrologically relevant (3.10.4) T.2.9

Minimum capacity (2.2, 3.2, 3.4.3) T.3.1.2

Minimum reading distance (4.3.1, 4.3.2) T.5.4.4

Mobile instrument (3.9.1.1, 4.18, A.4.7.5, A.4.12, A.5.1.3) T.1.2.11

Module (3.10.2, 5.5.2, 7.1.5.3, C, E, F) T.2.2

Multi-interval instrument (3.3, 3.4.1) T.3.2.6

Multiple range instrument (3.2, 4.5.3, 4.6.7, 4.10) T.3.2.7

Net value (3.5.3.3, 4.6.5, 4.6.11) T.5.2.2

Non-automatic weighing instrument T.1.2

Non-automatic zero-setting device (4.13.2) T.2.7.2.1

Non-graduated instrument T.1.2.2

Non-self-indicating instrument (3.8.1, 6) T.1.2.5

Number of verification scale intervals (2.2, 3.2, 3.3.1, 3.4.4, C.1.2,
E.1.2.3, F) T.3.2.5

Overall inaccuracy of reading (4.2.1) T.5.4.2

Performance test (5.4, A.4, B.3, B.4, C.2.2.1, C.2.4, C.3.1) T.7

Peripheral device (3.10.3, 5.3.6, 5.5.2, 7.1.5.4, B.3) T.2.3.5

Portable instrument (4.3.4, 4.19, A.4.13) T.1.2.12

Preset tare device (2.4, 4.7, 4.13.4) T.2.7.5

Preset tare value (3.5.3.3, 4.7, 4.13.4, 4.16) T.5.3.1

Price-computing instrument (4.13.11, 4.14) T.1.2.8

Price-labelling instrument (4.16) T.1.2.9

Primary indications (4.4.4, 4.4.6, 4.13, 4.14.1, 4.14.4, 5.3.6.1,
5.3.6.3, 5.5.2.1) T.1.3.1

Protective interface (3.10.3, 5.5.2.2) T.2.3.6

Rated operating conditions T.6.2

Reading by simple juxtaposition (4.2.1) T.5.4.1

Reduction ratio (6.2.3, F.1, F.2.7) T.3.3

Reference conditions T.6.3

Reference position (3.9.1.1, 6.2.1.3, 6.3.1, A.4.1.4, A.4.3, A.5.1)
T.6.4

Repeatability (3.6.1, 3.7.3, 8.3.3, A.4.1.7, A.4.4.5, A.4.10, C.2.7,
C.3.1.1) T.4.3

Rider (3.4.1) T.2.5.1

Rounding error or digital indication (3.5.3.2, B.3) T.5.4.3

Scale base T.2.4.3

Scale interval of numbering (4.3.1) T.3.2.4

Scale mark (4.3.1, 4.17.2, 6.2, 6.3, 6.6.1.1) T.2.4.2

Scale spacing (4.3, 6.2.2.2, 6.6.1.1, 6.9.3) T.3.2.1

Secondary indications (4.2.4) T.1.3.2

Selection device for load receptors and load-measuring
devices\...\....(4.11) T.2.7.8

Self-indicating instrument (3.8.2, 4, 5, 6) T.1.2.3

Self-indication capacity (3.6.4, 3.9.1.1, 4.2.5) T.3.1.3

Self-service instrument (4.13.11) T.1.2.10

Semi-automatic zero-setting device (4.5.4, 4.6.5, 4.6.9) T.2.7.2.2

Semi-self-indicating instrument (3.8.2, 4.2.5, 4.12, 4.17, 5) T.1.2.4

Sensitivity (4.1.2.4, 6.1, A.4.9) T.4.1

Significant durability error T.5.5.8

Significant fault (4.13.9, 5.1, 5.2, 5.3.4, B.1, B.3) T.5.5.6

Software (4.1.2.4, 5.5.1, 5.5.2.2, 5.5.3, 7.1.4, 8.2.1.2, C.1, E.1, G)
T.2.8

Software identification (5.5.1, 5.5.2.2, 7.1.2, 8.3.2, G.1, G.2.4)
T.2.8.6

Software separation (5.5.2.2, G.2.3) T.2.8.7

Span stability (3.10, 5.3.3, 5.4, B.4) T.5.5.9

Tare-balancing device (4.6) T.2.7.4.1

Tare device (3.3.4, 4.2.3, 4.6, 4.13.3, 6.3.5, A.4.6.2) T.2.7.4

Tare value (3.5.3.4, 4.6.5, 4.6.11, 4.13.3.2, 5.5.3.2, A.4.6.1, C.3.2,
G.3.3) T.5.2.3

Tare-weighing device (3.5.3.4, 3.6.3, 4.2.2.1, 4.5.4, 4.6.2, A.4.6.3)
T.2.7.4.2

Terminal (3.10.2.4, 5.5.2, C.1, E.2.2) T.2.2.5

Type T.3.4

Type specific parameter (5.5.2.2, G.2.2, G.2.4) T.2.8.3

Verification scale interval (2.2, 3.1.2, 3.2, 3.3.1, 3.4, 3.5.1) T.3.2.3

Warm-up time (5.3.5, A.5.2, B.1, B.3) T.4.5

Weighing instrument (1) T.1.1

Weighing module (3.10.2, 7.1.5.3, E.1, E.2, E.3, E.4) T.2.2.7

Weighing range (3.2, 3.3, 3.9.5, 4.2.3, 4.10) T.3.1.4

Weighing results (3.6, 4.2, 4.3.1, 4.4.4, 4.6.11, 4.6.12, 4.13.1) T.5.2

Zero-setting device (4.5, 4.6.5, 4.13.2, 6.4.2, 6.6, 6.7, 6.8,
A.4.2.1.3, A.4.2.3.1) T.2.7.2

Zero-tracking device (4.5, A.4.1.5) T.2.7.3

T.9 Abbreviations and symbols

This recommendation concerns metrological terms as well as technical and
physical terms. Therefore ambiguity of abbreviations and symbols is not
excluded. With the following explanations, however, any confusion should
be avoided.

  ---------- ----------------------------------------- ------------------
  α          temperature coefficient of cable material C.3.3.2.4

  ρ          specific resistance of cable material     C.3.3.2.4

  A          load cell classification                  F.2 Table 13, F.4

  A          cross section of a single wire            C.3.3.2.4, F.1,
                                                       F.4

  AC         alternating current                       

  A/D        analogue-to-digital                       T.2.2

  ADC        relevant analogue components, including   T.2.2 Figure 1,
             Analogue/Digital-Converter                5.5.2.1 Table 11

  AWI        automatic weighing instrument             T.1.2

  B          load cell classification                  F.2 Table 13, F.4

  B          gross weight value                        T.5.2.1, 4.6.11

  C          load cell classification                  F.2 Table 13, F.4

  C          mark for calculated weight value, when    4.6.11
             printed                                   

  C          rated output of a load cell               F.2, F.4

  CH         additional load cell classification:      3.10.4.1, F.2,
             cyclic temperature humidity tested        R60: 4.6.5.2

  CRC        cyclic redundancy check                   5.5.3.3

  d          (actual) scale interval                   T.3.2.2, T.2.6,
                                                       6.9.3

  D          load cell classification                  F.2 Table 13, F.4

  DC         direct current                            

  DL         dead load of load receptor                F.1, F.2.5, F.4

  DR         dead load return                          F.2, F.4

  DSD        data storage device                       5.5.3

  e          verification scale interval               T.2.6, 3.1.2, 3.2,
                                                       4.2.2.1

  e~1~,      verification scale interval, rules for    3.2, F.1, F.4
  e~i~, e~r~ indices                                   

  E          error of indication                       T.5.5.1, A.4.4.3

  E~max~     maximum capacity of the load cell         F.2, F.4

  E~min~     minimum dead load for the load cell       F.2, F.4

  EMC        electromagnetic compatibility             B.3.7

  EUT        equipment under test                      T.7, 3.10.4, B\...

  G          gross weight value                        T.5.2.1, 4.6.11

  i          variable indices                          

  i, i~x~    scale spacing                             T.3.2.1, 4.3.2,
                                                       6.2.2.2

  i~0~       minimum scale spacing                     4.3.2, 6.9.3

  I          intrinsic error                           T.5.5.2

  I          indicated weight value                    A.4.4.3
                                                       (Evaluation of
                                                       errors), A.4.8.2

  I/O        input output                              B.3.2

  IZSR       initial zero setting range                F.1, F.4

  k          variable exponent                         3.4.2, 4.2.2.1

  k          sensitivity                               T.4.1

  l, L       length of cable                           C.3.3.2.4, F.1,
                                                       F.4

  L          reading distance                          T.5.4.4, 4.3.2

  L          load                                      A.4.4.3
                                                       (Evaluation of
                                                       errors)

  LC         load cell                                 F\...

  Lim        maximum safe load                         7.1.2

  m          mass                                      

  M          mass to be measured                       Figure 2

  Max        maximum capacity of the weighing          T.3.1.1, F.1, F.4
             instrument                                

  Max~1~,    maximum capacity of the weighing          3.2, F.1, F.4
  Max~i~,    instrument, rules for indices             
  Max~r~                                               

  Min        minimum capacity of the weighing          T.3.1.2
             instrument                                

  mpe        maximum permissible error                 T.5.5, T.5.5.4,
                                                       3.5ff

  n, n~i~    number of verification scale intervals    T.3.2.5, F.4

  n~max~     maximum number of verification scale      
             intervals                                 

  n~WI~      maximum number of verification scale      F.1, F.4
             intervals of the weighing instrument      

  n~ind~     maximum number of verification scale      F.3, F.4
             intervals for an indicator                

  n~LC~      maximum number of load cell verification  F.2, F.4
             intervals                                 

  N, NET,    net value                                 T.5.2.2, 4.6.5,
  Net, net                                             4.6.11

  N          number of load cells                      F.1, F.4

  NAWI       non-automatic weighing instrument         T.1.2

  NH         additional load cell classification: not  3.10.2.4, F.2,
             humidity tested                           R60: 4.6.5.1

  NUD        correction for non uniform distributed    F.1, F.4
             load                                      

  p, p~i~    apportioning factor of mpe                3.10.2.1

  p~ind~,    fraction of mpe for indicator, load cell  3.10.2.1, F.4
  p~LC~,     and conducting elements                   
  p~con~                                               

  P          indicated weight value                    A.4.4.3
                                                       (Evaluation of
                                                       errors)

  P          price to pay                              4.14.2

  PLU        price look up (unit, storage)             4.13.4

  PT         preset tare                               T.2.7.5, 4.7

  Q          correction factor                         F.1, F.4

  R          reduction ratio of a load transmitting    T.3.3
             device                                    

  R~cable~   resistance of a single wire               C.3.3.2.4

  R~L~,      load resistance for an indicator          F.3, F.4
  R~Lmin~,                                             
  R~Lmax~                                              

  R~LC~      input resistance of a load cell           F.2, F.4

  SH         additional load cell classification:      3.10.2.4, F.2,
             static temperature humidity tested        R60: 4.6.5.3

  T          tare value                                T.5.2.3, 4.6.5,
                                                       4.6.11

  T+         additive tare                             F.1, F.4

  T-         subtractive tare                          

  T          temperature                               

  T~min~,    lower limit of temperature range, upper   
  T~max~     limit of temperature range                

  u~m~       unit of measurement                       2.1, 4.12.1

  Δu~min~    minimum input voltage per verification    C.2.1.1, F.3, F.4
             scale interval                            

  U          unit price                                4.12.2

  U          nominal voltage of power supply           3.9.3, A.5.4

  U~min~,    voltage range of power supply             3.9.3, A.5.4
  U~max~                                               

  U~exc~     load cell excitation voltage              F.1, F.4

  U~min~     minimum input voltage for indicator       F.3, F.4

  U~MRmin~   measuring range minimum voltage for       F.3
             indicator                                 

  U~MRmax~   measuring range maximum voltage for       F.3
             indicator                                 

  v~min~     minimum load cell verification interval   F.2, F.4

  V          variation in the error                    Figure 2

  W          weight                                    4.14.2

  W1, W2     weighing instrument 1, weighing           7.1.4
             instrument 2                              

  WI         weighing instrument                       F.1

  WR         weighing range                            F.

  Y          ratio to minimum load cell verification   F.2, F.4
             interval: Y = E~max~ / v~min~             

  Z          ratio to minimum load cell dead load      F.2, F.4
             output return: Z = E~max~ / (2 × DR)      
  ---------- ----------------------------------------- ------------------

**NON-AUTOMATIC**

**WEIGHING INSTRUMENTS**

**1 Scope**

> This Recommendation specifies the metrological and technical
> requirements for non-automatic weighing instruments that are subject
> to official metrological control.
>
> It is intended to provide standardized requirements and testing
> procedures to evaluate the metrological and technical characteristics
> in a uniform and traceable way.

**2 Principles of the Recommendation**

> 2.1 Units of measurement
>
> The units of mass to be used on an instrument are the kilogram (kg),
> the milligram (mg), the gram (g), and the tonne (t).
>
> For special applications, e.g. trade with precious stones, the metric
> carat (1 carat = 0.2 g) may be used as the unit of measurement. The
> symbol for the carat is ct.
>
> 2.2 Principles of the metrological requirements
>
> The requirements apply to all instruments irrespective of their
> principles of measurement.
>
> Instruments are classified according to:
>
> \- the verification scale interval, representing absolute accuracy,
> and
>
> \- the number of verification scale intervals, representing relative
> accuracy.
>
> The maximum permissible errors are in the order of magnitude of the
> verification scale interval. They apply to gross loads and when a tare
> device is in operation they apply to the net loads. The maximum
> permissible errors do not apply to calculated net values when a preset
> tare device is in operation.
>
> A minimum capacity (Min) is specified to indicate that use of the
> instrument below this value is likely to give rise to considerable
> relative errors.
>
> 2.3 Principles of the technical requirements
>
> General technical requirements apply to all types of instruments,
> whether mechanical or electronic, and are supplemented or modified
> with additional requirements for instruments used for specific
> applications or designed for a special technology. They are intended
> to specify the performance, not the design of an instrument, so that
> technical progress is not impeded.
>
> In particular, functions of electronic instruments not covered by this
> Recommendation should be allowed provided that they do not interfere
> with the metrological requirements, and if suitability for use and
> appropriate metrological control is ensured.
>
> Testing procedures are provided to establish conformity of instruments
> with the requirements of this Recommendation. They should be applied,
> and the Type Evaluation Report (R 76-2) should be used, to facilitate
> exchange and acceptance of test results by metrological authorities.
>
> 2.4 Application of requirements
>
> The requirements of this Recommendation apply to all devices
> performing the relevant functions, whether they are incorporated in an
> instrument or manufactured as separate units.
>
> Examples are: load-measuring device,
>
> displaying device,
>
> printing device,
>
> preset tare device,
>
> price-calculating device.
>
> However, devices that are not incorporated in the instrument may, by
> national legislation, be exempted from the requirements for special
> applications.
>
> 2.5 Terminology
>
> The terminology given in chapter T Terminology shall be considered as
> a binding part of this Recommendation.

**3 Metrological requirements**

> 3.1 Principles of classification
>
> 3.1.1 Accuracy classes
>
> The accuracy classes for instruments and their symbols (\*) are given
> in Table 1.

Table 1

  --------------------------------------------------- -----------------------------------------------------
  special accuracy                                    ![](media/image2.jpeg){width="0.35in" height="0.2in"}

  high accuracy                                       ![](media/image5.jpeg){width="0.3798611111111111in"
                                                      height="0.2298611111111111in"}

  medium accuracy                                     ![](media/image6.jpeg){width="0.3in"
                                                      height="0.2298611111111111in"}

  ordinary accuracy                                   ![](media/image7.jpeg){width="0.35in"
                                                      height="0.2298611111111111in"}
  --------------------------------------------------- -----------------------------------------------------

> (\*) Ovals of any shape, or two horizontal lines joined by two
> half-circles are permitted. A circle shall not be used because, in
> conformity with the International Recommendation OIML R 34 \"Accuracy
> classes of measuring instruments\", it is used for the designation of
> accuracy classes of measuring instruments of which the maximum
> permissible errors are expressed by a constant relative error in %.

3.1.2 Verification scale interval

> The verification scale interval for different types of instruments is
> given in Table 2.

Table 2

  ----------------------------------- -----------------------------------
  Type of instrument                  Verification scale interval

  Graduated, without auxiliary        e = d
  indicating device                   

  Graduated, with auxiliary           e is chosen by the manufacturer
  indicating device                   according to requirements in 3.2
                                      and 3.4.2

  Non-graduated                       e is chosen by the manufacturer
                                      according to requirements in 3.2
  ----------------------------------- -----------------------------------

3.2 Classification of instruments

> The verification scale interval, number of verification scale
> intervals and the minimum capacity, in relation to the accuracy class
> of an instrument, are given in Table 3.

Table 3

+--------+----------------+--------------+---------------+-----------+
| Ac     | Verification   | Number of    |               | Minimum   |
| curacy |                | verification |               |           |
|        | scale interval |              |               | capacity  |
| class  | e              | scale        |               |           |
|        |                | intervals    |               | Min       |
|        |                |              |               |           |
|        |                | n = Max/e    |               | (Lower    |
|        |                |              |               |           |
|        |                |              |               | limit)    |
+--------+----------------+--------------+---------------+-----------+
|        |                | minimum      | maximum       |           |
+--------+----------------+--------------+---------------+-----------+
| S      | 0.001 g ≤ e    | 50 000(\*\*) | \-            | 100 e     |
| pecial | (\*)           |              |               |           |
|        |                |              |               |           |
| !      |                |              |               |           |
| [](med |                |              |               |           |
| ia/ima |                |              |               |           |
| ge2.jp |                |              |               |           |
| eg){wi |                |              |               |           |
| dth="0 |                |              |               |           |
| .35in" |                |              |               |           |
| hei    |                |              |               |           |
| ght="0 |                |              |               |           |
| .2in"} |                |              |               |           |
+--------+----------------+--------------+---------------+-----------+
| High   | 0.001 g ≤ e ≤  | 100          | 100 000       | 20 e      |
|        | 0.05g          |              |               |           |
| ![]    |                | 5 000        | 100 000       | 50 e      |
| (media | 0.1 g ≤ e      |              |               |           |
| /image |                |              |               |           |
| 5.jpeg |                |              |               |           |
| ){widt |                |              |               |           |
| h="0.3 |                |              |               |           |
| 798611 |                |              |               |           |
| 111111 |                |              |               |           |
| 111in" |                |              |               |           |
| height |                |              |               |           |
| ="0.22 |                |              |               |           |
| 986111 |                |              |               |           |
| 111111 |                |              |               |           |
| 11in"} |                |              |               |           |
+--------+----------------+--------------+---------------+-----------+
| Medium | 0.l g ≤ e ≤ 2  | 100          | 10 000        | 20 e      |
|        | g              |              |               |           |
| ![](me |                | 500          | 10 000        | 20 e      |
| dia/im | 5 g ≤ e        |              |               |           |
| age6.j |                |              |               |           |
| peg){w |                |              |               |           |
| idth=" |                |              |               |           |
| 0.3in" |                |              |               |           |
| height |                |              |               |           |
| ="0.22 |                |              |               |           |
| 986111 |                |              |               |           |
| 111111 |                |              |               |           |
| 11in"} |                |              |               |           |
+--------+----------------+--------------+---------------+-----------+
| Or     | 5 g ≤ e        | 100          | 1 000         | 10e       |
| dinary |                |              |               |           |
|        |                |              |               |           |
| !      |                |              |               |           |
| [](med |                |              |               |           |
| ia/ima |                |              |               |           |
| ge7.jp |                |              |               |           |
| eg){wi |                |              |               |           |
| dth="0 |                |              |               |           |
| .35in" |                |              |               |           |
| height |                |              |               |           |
| ="0.22 |                |              |               |           |
| 986111 |                |              |               |           |
| 111111 |                |              |               |           |
| 11in"} |                |              |               |           |
+--------+----------------+--------------+---------------+-----------+

(\*) It is not normally feasible to test and verify an instrument to e
\< 1 mg, due to the uncertainty of the test loads.

> (\*\*) See exception in 3.4.4.
>
> The minimum capacity is reduced to 5e for grading instruments, i.e.
> instruments that determine a transport tariff or toll (e.g. postal
> scales and instruments weighing waste material).
>
> On multiple range instruments the verification scale intervals are
> e~1~, e~2~, ..., e~r~ with e~1~ \< e~2~ \< ... \< e~r~. Min, n and Max
> are indexed accordingly.
>
> On multiple range instruments, each range is treated basically as an
> instrument with one range.
>
> For special application that are clearly marked on the instrument, an
> instrument may have weighing ranges in classes
> ![](media/image2.jpeg){width="0.35in" height="0.2in"} and
> ![](media/image5.jpeg){width="0.3798611111111111in"
> height="0.2298611111111111in"} or in classes
> ![](media/image5.jpeg){width="0.3798611111111111in"
> height="0.2298611111111111in"} and
> ![](media/image6.jpeg){width="0.3in" height="0.2298611111111111in"}
> The instrument as a whole shall then comply with the more severe
> requirements of 3.9 applicable to either of the two classes.

3.3 Additional requirements for a multi-interval instrument

3.3.1 Partial weighing range

> Each partial range (index i = 1, 2 ...**)** is defined by:
>
> its verification scale interval e~i~, e~i\ +\ 1~ \> e~i~,
>
> its maximum capacity Max~i~,
>
> its minimum capacity Min~i~ = Max~i\ -\ 1~ (for i = 1 the minimum
> capacity is Min~1~ = Min).

The number of verification scale intervals n~i~ for each partial range
is equal to:

n~i~ = Max~i~/e~i~

> 3.3.2 Accuracy class
>
> e~i~ and n~i~ in each partial weighing range, and Min~1~ shall comply
> with the requirements given in Table 3 according to the accuracy class
> of the instrument.
>
> 3.3.3 Maximum capacity of partial weighing ranges
>
> With the exception of the last partial weighing range, the
> requirements in Table 4 shall be complied with, according to the
> accuracy class of the instrument.

Table 4

  --------------- --------------------------------------- ----------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------- ---------------------------------------
  Class           ![](media/image2.jpeg){width="0.35in"   ![](media/image5.jpeg){width="0.3798611111111111in"   ![](media/image6.jpeg){width="0.3in"   ![](media/image7.jpeg){width="0.35in"
                  height="0.2in"}                         height="0.2298611111111111in"}                        height="0.2298611111111111in"}         height="0.2298611111111111in"}

  Max~i~/e~i+1~   ≥ 50 000                                ≥ 5 000                                               ≥ 500                                  ≥ 50
  --------------- --------------------------------------- ----------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------- ---------------------------------------

Example for a multi-interval instrument:

Maximum capacity Max = 2 / 5 / 15 kg class
![](media/image6.jpeg){width="0.3in" height="0.2298611111111111in"}

Verification scale interval e = 1 / 2 / 10 g

This instrument has one Max and one weighing range from Min = 20 g to
Max = 15 kg. The partial weighing ranges are:

> Min = 20 g, Max~1~ = 2 kg, e~1~ = l g, n~1~ = 2000
>
> Min~2~ = 2 kg, Max~2~ = 5 kg, e~2~ = 2 g, n~2~ = 2500
>
> Min~3~ = 5 kg, Max~3~ = Max = l5 kg, e~3~ = 10 g, n~3~ = 1500

The maximum permissible errors on initial verification (mpe) (see 3.5.1)
are:

> for m = 0 g to 500 g mpe = ± 0.5 e~1~ = ± 0.5 g\
> for m \> 500 g to 2000 g mpe = ± 1 e~1~ = ± 1 g\
> for m \> 2000 g to 4000 g mpe = ± 1 e~2~ = ± 2 g\
> for m \> 4000 g to 5000 g mpe = ± 1.5 e~2~ = ± 3 g\
> for m \> 5000 g to 15000 g mpe = ± 1 e~3~ = ± 10 g

Whenever the variation of the indication due to certain influence
factors is limited to a fraction or multiple of e, this means, in a
multi-interval instrument, that e is to be taken according to the load
applied; in particular, at or near zero load e = e~1~.

> 3.3.4 Instrument with a tare device
>
> Requirements concerning the ranges of a multi-interval instrument
> apply to the net load, for every possible value of the tare.
>
> 3.4 Auxiliary indicating devices
>
> 3.4.1 Type and application
>
> Only instruments of classes ![](media/image2.jpeg){width="0.35in"
> height="0.2in"} and
> ![](media/image5.jpeg){width="0.3798611111111111in"
> height="0.2298611111111111in"} may be fitted with an auxiliary
> indicating device, which shall be:
>
> \- a device with a rider, or
>
> \- a device for interpolation of reading, or
>
> \- a complementary displaying device (see figure 4)**,** or
>
> \- an indicating device with a differentiated scale division (see
> figure 5).
>
> These devices are permitted only to the right of the decimal sign.
>
> A multi-interval instrument shall not be fitted with an auxiliary
> indicating device.
>
> Note: Extended displaying devices (see T.2.6 and 4.4.3) are not
> regarded as auxiliary indicating devices.
>
> Figure 4: example of a complementary displaying device

+--------------------------------+-------------------------------------+
| ![](media/image8.jpe           | indication: 174.273 g               |
| g){width="2.479861111111111in" |                                     |
| height="1.3298611111111112in"} | last figure: 3                      |
|                                |                                     |
|                                | d = 1 mg e = 10 mg                  |
+--------------------------------+-------------------------------------+

> Figure 5: examples of indicating devices each with a differentiated
> scale division

+--------------------------------+-------------------------------------+
| ![](media/image9.jpeg          | last differentiated figure: 5       |
| ){width="1.3798611111111112in" |                                     |
| height="1.25in"}               | d = 0.01 g or 0.05 g                |
|                                |                                     |
|                                | e = 0.1 g                           |
|                                |                                     |
|                                | last differentiated figure: 8       |
|                                |                                     |
|                                | d = 0.01 g or 0.02 g                |
|                                |                                     |
|                                | e = 0.1 g                           |
+--------------------------------+-------------------------------------+

> 3.4.2 Verification scale interval
>
> The verification scale interval e is determined by the expression:
>
> d \< e ≤ 10 d (see tables 5a and 5b)
>
> e = 10^k^ kg
>
> k being a positive or negative whole number, or zero (for a self- or
> semi-self-indicating instrument see 4.2.2.1)
>
> Table 5a: The values of e, calculated following this rule, are, for
> example:

  ----------------- ----------------- ----------------- -----------------
  d =               0.1 g             0.2 g             0.5 g

  e =               1 g               1 g               1 g

  e =               10 d              5 d               2 d
  ----------------- ----------------- ----------------- -----------------

> This requirement does not apply to an instrument of class
> ![](media/image10.jpeg){width="0.34791666666666665in"
> height="0.19444444444444445in"} with d \< 1 mg, where e = 1 mg, for
> example (Table 5b):
>
> Table 5b

  -------------- -------------- -------------- -------------- --------------
  d =            0.01 mg        0.02 mg        0.05 mg        \< 0.01 mg

  e =            1 mg           1 mg           1 mg           1 mg

  e =            100 d          50 d           20 d           \> 100 d
  -------------- -------------- -------------- -------------- --------------

> 3.4.3 Minimum capacity
>
> The minimum capacity of the instrument is determined in conformity
> with the requirements in Table 3. However, in the last column of this
> Table, the verification scale interval e is replaced by the actual
> scale interval d.
>
> 3.4.4 Minimum number of verification scale intervals
>
> For an instrument of class ![](media/image2.jpeg){width="0.35in"
> height="0.2in"} with d \< 0.1 mg, n may be less than 50 000.
>
> 3.5 Maximum permissible errors
>
> 3.5.1 Values of maximum permissible errors on initial verification
>
> The maximum permissible errors for increasing or decreasing loads are
> given in Table 6.

Table 6

  -------------- --------------------------------------- ----------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------- ---------------------------------------
  Maximum        for loads m expressed in verification                                                                                                
  permissible    scale intervals e                                                                                                                    
  errors on                                                                                                                                           
  initial                                                                                                                                             
  verification                                                                                                                                        

                 class                                   class                                                 class                                  class
                 ![](media/image2.jpeg){width="0.35in"   ![](media/image5.jpeg){width="0.3798611111111111in"   ![](media/image6.jpeg){width="0.3in"   ![](media/image7.jpeg){width="0.35in"
                 height="0.2in"}                         height="0.2298611111111111in"}                        height="0.2298611111111111in"}         height="0.2298611111111111in"}

  ± 0.5e         0 ≤ m ≤ 50 000                          0 ≤ m ≤ 5 000                                         0 ≤ m ≤ 500                            0 ≤ m ≤ 50

  ± 1.0e         50 000 \< m ≤ 200 000                   5 000 \< m ≤ 20 000                                   500 \< m ≤ 2 000                       50 \< m ≤ 200

  ± 1.5e         200 000 \< m                            20 000 \< m ≤ 100 000                                 2 000 \< m ≤ 10 000                    200 \< m ≤ 1 000
  -------------- --------------------------------------- ----------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------- ---------------------------------------

> Note: The absolute value of the maximum permissible error is 0.5 e,
> 1.0 e or 1.5 e, i.e. it is the value of the maximum permissible error
> without positive or negative sign.
>
> Note: For multi-interval instruments refer to chapter 3.3 including
> the example
>
> 3.5.2 Values of maximum permissible errors in service
>
> The maximum permissible errors in service shall be twice the maximum
> permissible errors on initial verification (see 8.4.2).
>
> 3.5.3 Basic rules concerning the determination of errors
>
> 3.5.3.1 Influence factors
>
> Errors shall be determined under normal test conditions. When the
> effect of one factor is being evaluated, all other factors are to be
> kept relatively constant, at a value close to normal.
>
> 3.5.3.2 Elimination of rounding error
>
> The rounding error included in any digital indication shall be
> eliminated if the actual scale interval is greater than 0.2 e.
>
> 3.5.3.3 Maximum permissible errors for net values
>
> The maximum permissible errors apply to the net value for every
> possible tare load, except preset tare values.
>
> 3.5.3.4 Tare weighing device
>
> The maximum permissible errors for a tare weighing device are the
> same, for any tare value, as those of the instrument, for the same
> value of load.
>
> 3.6 Permissible differences between results
>
> Regardless of what variation of results is permitted, the error of any
> single weighing result shall by itself not exceed the maximum
> permissible error for the given load.
>
> 3.6.1 Repeatability
>
> The difference between the results of several weighings of the same
> load shall not be greater than the absolute value of the maximum
> permissible error of the instrument for that load.
>
> 3.6.2 Eccentric loading
>
> The indications for different positions of a load shall meet the
> maximum permissible errors, when the instrument is tested according to
> 3.6.2.1 through 3.6.2.4.
>
> Note: If an instrument is designed in such a way that loads may be
> applied in different manners, it may be appropriate to apply more than
> one of the following tests.
>
> 3.6.2.1 Unless otherwise specified hereafter, a load corresponding to
> 1/3 of the sum of the maximum capacity and the corresponding maximum
> additive tare effect shall be applied.
>
> 3.6.2.2 On an instrument with a load receptor having n points of
> support, with n\> 4, the fraction 1/(n - 1) of the sum of the maximum
> capacity and the maximum additive tare effect shall be applied to each
> point of support.
>
> 3.6.2.3 On an instrument with a load receptor subject to minimal
> off-centre loading (e.g. tank, hopper, \...) a test load corresponding
> to 1/10 of the sum of the maximum capacity and the maximum additive
> tare effect shall be applied to each point of support.
>
> 3.6.2.4 On an instrument used for weighing rolling loads (e.g. vehicle
> scale, rail suspension instrument) a test load corresponding to the
> usual rolling load, the heaviest and the most concentrated one which
> may be weighed, but not exceeding 0.8 times the sum of the maximum
> capacity and the maximum additive tare effect, shall be applied at
> different points on the load receptor.
>
> 3.6.3 Multiple indicating devices
>
> For a given load the difference between the indications of multiple
> indicating devices including tare weighing devices, shall be not
> greater than the absolute value of the maximum permissible error, but
> shall be zero between digital displaying and printing devices.
>
> 3.6.4 Different positions of equilibrium
>
> The difference between two results obtained for the same load when the
> method of balancing the load is changed (in the case of an instrument
> fitted with a device for extending the self-indication capacity) in
> two consecutive tests, shall not exceed the absolute value of the
> maximum permissible error for the applied load.
>
> 3.7 Test standards
>
> 3.7.1 Weights
>
> The standard weights or standard masses used for the type examination
> or verification of an instrument shall principally meet the
> metrological requirements of OIML R111. They shall not have an error
> greater than 1/3 of the maximum permissible error of the instrument
> for the applied load. If they belong to class E2 or better it is
> allowed that their [uncertainty]{.underline} rather than their
> [error]{.underline} is not greater than 1/3 of the maximum permissible
> error of the instrument for the applied load, provided that the actual
> conventional mass and the estimated long-term stability is taken into
> account.
>
> 3.7.2 Auxiliary verification device
>
> When an instrument is fitted with an auxiliary verification device, or
> when it is verified with a separate auxiliary device, the maximum
> permissible errors of this device shall be 1/3 of the maximum
> permissible errors for the applied load. If weights are used, the
> effect of their errors shall not exceed 1/5 of the maximum permissible
> errors of the instrument to be verified for the same load.
>
> 3.7.3 Substitution of standard weights at verification
>
> When testing instruments at the place of use (application), instead of
> standard weights any other constant load may be used, provided that
> standard weights of at least 1/2 Max are used.
>
> If the repeatability error is not greater than 0.3 e the portion of
> standard weights may be reduced to 1/3 Max.
>
> If the repeatability error is not greater than 0.2 e this portion may
> be reduced to 1/5 Max.
>
> The repeatability error has to be determined with a load (weights or
> any other load) of about the value where the substitution is made, by
> placing it 3 times on the load receptor.
>
> 3.8 Discrimination
>
> 3.8.1 Non-self-indicating instrument
>
> An extra load equivalent to 0.4 times the absolute value of the
> maximum permissible error for the applied load, but not less than
> 1 mg, when gently placed on or withdrawn from the instrument at
> equilibrium shall produce a visible displacement of the indicating
> element.
>
> 3.8.2 Self- or semi-self-indicating instrument

3.8.2.1 Analogue indication

> An extra load equivalent to the absolute value of the maximum
> permissible error for the applied load, but not less than 1 mg, when
> gently placed on or withdrawn from the instrument at equilibrium shall
> cause a permanent displacement of the indicating element corresponding
> to not less than 0.7 times the extra load.
>
> 3.8.2.2 Digital indication
>
> An additional load equal to 1.4 times the actual scale interval, when
> gently placed on or withdrawn from the instrument at equilibrium shall
> change the indication unambiguously. This applies only to instruments
> with d ≥ 5 mg.
>
> 3.9 Variations due to influence quantities and time
>
> An instrument shall comply, unless otherwise specified and as far as
> applicable, with 3.5, 3.6 and 3.8 under the conditions of 3.9. If not
> otherwise specified, tests shall not be combined.
>
> 3.9.1 Tilting
>
> 3.9.1.1 Instruments liable to be tilted
>
> For an instrument of class
> ![](media/image5.jpeg){width="0.3798611111111111in"
> height="0.2298611111111111in"} **,**
> ![](media/image6.jpeg){width="0.3in" height="0.2298611111111111in"} or
> ![](media/image7.jpeg){width="0.35in" height="0.2298611111111111in"}
> liable to be tilted, the influence of tilting shall be determined
> under the effect of a lengthwise tilting and a transverse tilting
> equal to the limiting value of tilting as defined in sections a. to d.
>
> The absolute value of the difference between the indication of the
> instrument in its reference position (not tilted) and the indication
> in the tilted position (= limiting value of tilting in any direction)
> shall not exceed:
>
> \- at no load, two verification scale intervals (the instrument having
> first been adjusted to zero at no load in its reference position)
> except instruments of class
> ![](media/image5.jpeg){width="0.3798611111111111in"
> height="0.2298611111111111in"},
>
> \- at self indication capacity and at maximum capacity, the maximum
> permissible error (the instrument having been adjusted to zero at no
> load both in the reference and in the tilted position).
>
> a\. If the instrument is fitted with a levelling device and a level
> indicator the limiting value of tilting is defined by a marking (e.g.
> a ring) on the level indicator which shows that the maximum
> permissible tilt has been exceeded when the bubble is displaced from a
> central position and the edge touches the marking. The limiting value
> of the level indicator shall be obvious, so that tilting is easily
> noticed. The level indicator shall be fixed firmly on the instrument
> in a place clearly visible to the user and representative for the tilt
> sensitive part.
>
> Note: If technical reasons forbid the level indicator to be fixed in a
> visible place, it can be accepted to install it in a place
> representative for the tilt sensitive part (e.g. below the removable
> load receptor).
>
> b\. If the instrument is fitted with an automatic tilt sensor the
> limiting value of tilting is defined by the manufacturer. The tilt
> sensor shall release a display switch-off or other appropriate alarm
> signal (e.g. lamp, error signal) and shall inhibit the printout and
> data transmission if the limiting value of tilting has been exceeded
> (see also 4.18). The automatic tilt sensor may also compensate the
> effect of tilting.
>
> c\. If neither a. nor b. applies, the limiting value of tilting is
> 50/1000 in any direction.
>
> d\. Mobile instruments intended to be used outside in open locations
> (e.g. on roads) shall either be fitted with an automatic tilt sensor
> or a Cardanic (gimbal type) suspension of the tilt sensitive part(s).
> In case of an automatic tilt sensor b. applies, whereas in the case of
> a Cardanic suspension c. applies, but the manufacturer may define a
> limiting value of tilting larger than 50/1000 (see also 4.18).
>
> 3.9.1.2 Other instruments
>
> The following instruments are regarded as being not liable to be
> tilted so that the tilting requirements under 3.9.1.1 do not apply:
>
> \- Class ![](media/image2.jpeg){width="0.35in" height="0.2in"}
> instruments must be fitted with a levelling device and a level
> indicator but these need not be tested, because these instruments
> require special environmental and installation conditions and skilled
> operating staff.
>
> \- Instruments installed in a fixed position
>
> \- Freely suspended instruments, for example crane or hanging
> instruments
>
> 3.9.2 Temperature
>
> 3.9.2.1 Prescribed temperature limits
>
> If no particular working temperature is stated in the descriptive
> markings of an in­strument, this instrument shall maintain its
> metrological properties within the following temperature limits:
>
> \- 10 ^0^C / + 40 ^0^C
>
> 3.9.2.2 Special temperature limits
>
> An instrument for which particular limits of working temperature are
> stated in the descriptive markings shall comply with the metrological
> requirements within those limits.
>
> The limits may be chosen according to the application of the
> instrument.
>
> The ranges within those limits shall be at least equal to:
>
> 5 ^0^C for instruments of class ![](media/image2.jpeg){width="0.35in"
> height="0.2in"},

15 ^0^C for instruments of class
![](media/image5.jpeg){width="0.3798611111111111in"
height="0.2298611111111111in"},

> 30 ^0^C for instruments of classes
> ![](media/image6.jpeg){width="0.3in" height="0.2298611111111111in"}
> and ![](media/image7.jpeg){width="0.35in"
> height="0.2298611111111111in"}.
>
> 3.9.2.3 Temperature effect on no-load indication
>
> The indication at zero or near zero shall not vary by more than one
> verification scale interval for a difference in ambient temperature of
> 1 ^0^C for instruments of class ![](media/image2.jpeg){width="0.35in"
> height="0.2in"} and 5 ^0^C for other classes.
>
> For multi-interval instruments and for multiple range instruments this
> applies to the smallest verification scale interval of the instrument.

3.  Power supply

> An instrument shall comply with the metrological requirements, if the
> voltage of the power supply differs from the nominal voltage (U~nom~)
> or from the voltage range (U~min~, U~max~) of the instrument at
>
> \- mains power supply (AC):
>
> lower limit = 0.85 ∙ U~nom~ or 0.85 ∙ U~min~\
> upper limit = 1.10 ∙ U~nom~ or 1.10 ∙ U~max~
>
> \- external or plug-in power supply (AC or DC), including rechargeable
> battery power supply if (re)charge of batteries during the operation
> of the instrument is possible:
>
> lower limit = minimum operating voltage\
> upper limit = 1.20 ∙ U~nom~ or 1.20 ∙ U~max~
>
> \- non-rechargeable battery power supply (DC), including rechargeable
> battery power supply if (re)charge of batteries during the operation
> of the instrument is not possible:
>
> lower limit = minimum operating voltage\
> upper limit = U~nom~ or U~max~

-   12 V or 24 V road vehicle battery power supply:

> lower limit = minimum operating voltage\
> upper limit = 16 V (12 V battery) or 32 V (24 V battery)
>
> Note: The minimum operating voltage is defined as the lowest possible
> operating voltage before the instrument is automatically switched off.
>
> Battery-powered electronic instruments and instruments with external
> or plug-in power supply (AC or DC) shall either continue to function
> correctly or not indicate any weight values if the voltage is below
> the manufacturer's specified value, the latter being larger or equal
> to the minimum operating voltage.
>
> 3.9.4 Time
>
> Under reasonably constant environmental conditions, an instrument of
> class ![](media/image5.jpeg){width="0.3798611111111111in"
> height="0.2298611111111111in"}, ![](media/image6.jpeg){width="0.3in"
> height="0.2298611111111111in"}, or
> ![](media/image7.jpeg){width="0.35in" height="0.2298611111111111in"}
> shall meet the following requirements.

1.  Creep

> When any load is kept on an instrument, the difference between the
> indication obtained immediately after placing a load and the
> indication observed during the following 30 minutes, shall not exceed
> 0.5 e. However, the difference between the indication obtained at 15
> minutes and that at 30 minutes shall not exceed 0.2 e.
>
> If these conditions are not met, the difference between the indication
> obtained im­mediately after placing a load on the instrument and the
> indication observed during the following four hours shall not exceed
> the absolute value of the maximum permis­sible error at the load
> applied.

2.  Zero return

> The deviation on returning to zero as soon as the indication has
> stabilized, after the removal of any load which has remained on the
> instrument for one half hour, shall not exceed 0.5 e.
>
> For a multi-interval instrument, the deviation shall not exceed 0.5
> e~1.~
>
> On a multiple range instrument, the deviation on returning to zero
> from Max~i~ shall not exceed 0.5 e~i~ Furthermore, after returning to
> zero from any load greater than Max~1~ and immediately after switching
> to the lowest weighing range, the indication near zero shall not vary
> by more than e~1~ during the following 5 minutes.
>
> 3.9.4.3 Durability
>
> The durability error due to wear and tear shall not be greater than
> the absolute value of the maximum permissible error.
>
> Adherence to this requirement is assumed if the instrument has passed
> the endurance test specified in A.6, which shall be performed only for
> instruments with Max ≤ 100 kg.
>
> 3.9.5 Other influence quantities and restraints
>
> Where other influences and restraints, such as:
>
> \- vibrations,
>
> \- precipitations and draughts,
>
> \- mechanical constraints and restrictions,
>
> are a normal feature of the intended operating environment of the
> instrument, the in­strument shall comply with the requirements of
> chapters 3 and 4 under those influences and restraints, either by
> being designed to operate correctly in spite of these influences, or
> by being protected against their action.
>
> Note: Instruments installed outdoors without suitable protection
> against atmospheric conditions may normally not comply with the
> requirements of chapters 3 and 4 if the number of verification scale
> intervals n is relatively great. (In general, a value of n = 3 000 can
> only be exceeded with very special measures. Furthermore for road or
> rail weighbridges the verification scale interval should not be less
> than 10 kg). These limits should also apply to each weighing range of
> combinations of instruments or of multiple range instruments or to
> each partial weighing range of multi-interval instruments.
>
> 3.10 Type evaluation tests and examinations
>
> 3.10.1 Complete instruments
>
> For type evaluation, the tests given in Annexes A and B shall be
> performed, to verify adherence to the requirements in 3.5, 3.6, 3.8,
> 3.9, 4.5, 4.6, 5.3, 5.4 and 6.1. The endurance test (A.6) shall be
> performed after all other tests in Annexes A and B.
>
> For software-controlled instruments the additional requirements in 5.5
> and Annex G apply.
>
> 3.10.2 Modules
>
> Subject to agreement with the approving authority, the manufacturer
> may define and submit modules to be examined separately. This is
> particularly relevant in the following cases:
>
> \- where testing the instrument as a whole is difficult or impossible,
>
> \- where modules are manufactured and/or placed on the market as
> separate units to be incorporated in a complete instrument,
>
> \- where the applicant wants to have a variety of modules included in
> the approved type.
>
> Where modules are examined separately in the process of type approval,
> the following requirements apply.
>
> 3.10.2.1 Apportioning of errors
>
> The error limits applicable to a module M~i~ which is examined
> separately are equal to a fraction p~i~ of the maximum permissible
> errors or the allowed variations of the indication of the complete
> instrument as specified in 3.5. The fractions for any module have to
> be taken for at least the same accuracy class and at least the same
> number of verification scale intervals, as for the complete instrument
> incorporating the module.
>
> The fractions p~i~ shall satisfy the following equation:

p~1~^2^ + p~2~^2^ + p~3~^2^ + \... ≤ l

> The fraction p~i~ shall be chosen by the manufacturer of the module
> and shall be verified by an appropriate test, taking into account the
> following conditions:
>
> \- For purely digital devices p~i~ may be equal to 0.
>
> \- For weighing modules p~i~ may be equal to 1.
>
> \- For all other modules (including digital load cells) the fraction
> shall not exceed 0.8 and shall not be less than 0.3, when more than
> one module contributes to the effect in question.
>
> Acceptable solution: see explanation in the introductory note to
> Chapter 4:
>
> For mechanical structures such as weighbridges, load transmitting
> devices and mechanical or electrical connecting elements evidently
> designed and manufactured according to sound engineering practice, an
> overall fraction p~i~ = 0.5 may be applied without any test, e.g. when
> levers are made of the same material and when the chain of levers has
> two planes of symmetry (longitudinal and transversal), or when the
> stability characteristics of electrical connecting elements are
> appropriate for the signals transmitted, such as load cell output,
> impedance,\...
>
> For instruments incorporating the typical modules (see T.2.2) the
> fractions p~i~ may have the values given in Table 7. Table 7 takes
> into account that the modules are affected in a different manner
> depending on the different performance criteria.

Table 7

+-------------------------------+------------+-----------+------------+
| Performance criteria          | Load       | E         | Connecting |
|                               |            | lectronic |            |
|                               | cell       |           | elements,  |
|                               |            | indicator | etc.       |
+-------------------------------+------------+-----------+------------+
| Combined effect (\*)          | 0.7        | 0.5       | 0.5        |
|                               |            |           |            |
| Temperature effect on no load | 0.7        | 0.5       | 0.5        |
| indication                    |            |           |            |
|                               | \-         | 1         | \-         |
| Power supply variation        |            |           |            |
|                               | 1          | \-        | \-         |
| Effect of creep               |            |           |            |
|                               | 0          | 0.5       | 0.5        |
| Damp heat                     | .7^(\*\*)^ |           |            |
|                               |            | 1         | \-         |
| Span stability                | \-         |           |            |
+-------------------------------+------------+-----------+------------+
| > (\*) Combined effects:      |            |           |            |
| > non-linearity, hysteresis,  |            |           |            |
| > temperature effect on span, |            |           |            |
| > repeatability, etc. After   |            |           |            |
| > the warm-up time specified  |            |           |            |
| > by the manufacturer, the    |            |           |            |
| > combined effect error       |            |           |            |
| > fractions apply to modules. |            |           |            |
| >                             |            |           |            |
| > (\*\*) According to OIML    |            |           |            |
| > R60 valid for SH tested     |            |           |            |
| > load cells (p~LC~=0.7).     |            |           |            |
|                               |            |           |            |
| The sign \"-\" means \"not    |            |           |            |
| applicable\".                 |            |           |            |
+-------------------------------+------------+-----------+------------+

> 3.10.2.2 Tests
>
> As far as applicable the same tests shall be performed as for complete
> instruments. The applicable tests for indicators and analogue data
> processing devices are given in Annex C, the applicable tests for
> digital data processing devices, terminals and digital displays are
> given in Annex D, the applicable tests for weighing modules are given
> in Annex E.
>
> Purely digital modules need not be tested for static temperatures
> (B.2.1), humidity (B.2.2), and for span stability (B.4). They need not
> be tested for disturbances (B.3) if conformity to the relevant IEC
> Standards is otherwise established to at least the same level as
> required in this Recommendation.
>
> For software-controlled modules the additional requirements in 5.5 and
> Annex G apply.
>
> 3.10.2.3 Compatibility
>
> The compatibility of modules shall be established and declared by the
> manufacturer. For indicators and load cells this shall be done
> according to Annex F.
>
> For modules with digital output compatibility includes the correct
> communication and data transfer via the digital interface(s), see
> Annex F.5.
>
> 3.10.2.4 Use of OIML Certificates
>
> \- SH or CH tested load cells (but no NH marked load cells) that have
> been tested separately according to the International Recommendation
> OIML R 60, .
>
> \- indicators and analogue data processing devices that have been
> tested separately according to Annex C,
>
> \- digital data processing devices, terminals and digital displays
> that have been tested separately according to Annex D,
>
> \- weighing modules that have been tested separately according to
> Annex E,
>
> \- other modules (if relevant OIML recommendations exist)
>
> may be used without repeated testing if a respective OIML certificate
> exists and the requirements in 3.10.2.1, 3.10.2.2, and 3.10.2.3 are
> met. The OIML certificates must contain all relevant information
> required in Annex F. OIML certificates for modules must be clearly
> distinguishable from OIML certificates for complete instruments.
>
> A representative complete instrument shall be submitted for testing of
> correct functioning if this is considered necessary by the responsible
> authority, e.g. to conduct tests that have not been performed such as
> tilting.
>
> 3.10.3 Peripheral devices
>
> Peripheral recipient devices need to be examined and tested only once
> while being connected to a weighing instrument, and may be declared as
> suitable for connection to any verified weighing instrument having an
> appropriate and protective interface.
>
> Purely digital peripheral devices need not be tested for static
> temperatures (A.5.3), humidity (B.2), and span stability (B.4). They
> need not be tested for disturbances (B.3) if conformity to the
> relevant IEC Standards is otherwise established to at least the same
> level as required in this Recommendation.
>
> 3.10.4 Testing of a family of instruments or modules
>
> Where a family of instruments or modules of various capacities and
> characteristics is presented for type examination, the following
> provisions apply for selecting the Equipment under Test (EUT). For
> indicators refer also to Annex C.2.

# 3.10.4.1. Selection of EUT 

> The selection of EUTs to be tested shall be such that their number is
> minimized but nevertheless sufficiently representative (see example in
> acceptable solution of 3.10.4.5).
>
> Approval of the most sensitive EUTs implies approval of the variants
> with lower characteristics. Therefore, when a choice exists, the EUTs
> with the highest metrological characteristics shall be selected for
> test.
>
> 3.10.4.2 Relevant metrological characteristics
>
> \- For any family, at least the variant with the highest number of
> verification scale intervals (n) and the variant with the smallest
> verification scale interval (e) shall be selected as EUTs. Further
> EUTs may be required according to 3.10.4.5. If a variant has both
> characteristics, one EUT may be sufficient

-   Variants other than the EUTs are accepted without testing, if - for
    comparable metrological characteristics - their capacities (Max) are
    in between two tested capacities. The ratio between the tested
    capacities shall not exceed 10.

> \- Variants other than the EUTs are accepted without testing, if - for
> comparable metrological characteristics - their capacities (Max) are
> not more than 5 times above the largest capacity tested. If the number
> of verification scale intervals (n) of the non-tested variant is lower
> than that of the EUT this factor may be accordingly higher.
>
> 3.10.4.3 Accuracy class
>
> If an EUT of a family has been tested completely for one accuracy
> class, it is sufficient for an EUT of a lower class if only partial
> tests are carried out that are not yet covered.
>
> 3.10.4.4 Other features to be considered
>
> All metrologically relevant features and functions have to be tested
> at least once in an EUT as far as applicable and as many as possible
> in the same EUT.
>
> For example, it is not acceptable to test the temperature effect on
> no-load indication on one EUT and the combined effect (see table 7) on
> a different one. Variations in metrologically relevant features and
> functions like different
>
> \- housings,
>
> \- load receptors,
>
> \- temperature and humidity ranges,
>
> \- instrument functions,
>
> \- indications,
>
> \- etc.
>
> may require additional partial testing of those factors which are
> influenced by that feature. These additional tests should preferably
> be carried out on the same EUT, but if this is not possible, tests on
> one or more additional EUTs may be performed under the responsibility
> of the testing authority.
>
> 3.10.4.5 Summary of relevant metrological characteristics
>
> The EUTs must cover:\
> - highest number of verification scale intervals n~max~\
> - lowest verification scale interval e~min~
>
> \- lowest input signal μV/e (only for indicators when connecting
> strain gauge load cells)
>
> \- all accuracy classes\
> - all temperature ranges\
> - single range-, multiple range- or multi-interval instrument\
> - maximum size of load receptor if significant\
> - metrologically relevant features (see 3.10.4.4)\
> - maximum number of instrument functions\
> - maximum number of indications\
> - maximum number of peripheral devices connected\
> - maximum number of implemented digital devices\
> - maximum number of analogue and digital interfaces\
> - several load receptors, if connectable to the indicator.
>
> \- different types of power supply (mains and/or batteries)
>
> Acceptable solution for the selection of EUTs of a family:
>
> Table 8: Selection of EUTs for a type of a non-automatic weighing
> instrument with two families

+---------------+-------+--------+---------+-------+-------+---------+
| **Family 1**  | Va    | Max    | e       | d     | n     | EUT     |
|               | riant |        |         |       |       |         |
+---------------+-------+--------+---------+-------+-------+---------+
| Accuracy      | 1.1   | 200 g  | 0.01 g  | 0.001 | 20000 |         |
| class         |       |        |         | g     |       |         |
| ![](media/ima |       |        |         |       |       |         |
| ge5.jpeg){wid |       |        |         |       |       |         |
| th="0.3569444 |       |        |         |       |       |         |
| 4444444445in" |       |        |         |       |       |         |
| heig          |       |        |         |       |       |         |
| ht="0.2111111 |       |        |         |       |       |         |
| 111111111in"} |       |        |         |       |       |         |
|               |       |        |         |       |       |         |
| Temperature   |       |        |         |       |       |         |
| range:        |       |        |         |       |       |         |
|               |       |        |         |       |       |         |
| 10 °C / 30 °C |       |        |         |       |       |         |
+---------------+-------+--------+---------+-------+-------+---------+
|               | 1.2   | 400 g  | 0.01 g  | 0.001 | 40000 | X       |
|               |       |        |         | g     |       |         |
+---------------+-------+--------+---------+-------+-------+---------+
|               | 1.3   | 2000 g | 0.05 g  | 0.05  | 40000 |         |
|               |       |        |         | g     |       |         |
+---------------+-------+--------+---------+-------+-------+---------+

+---------------+-------+--------+---------+-------+-------+---------+
| **Family 2**  | 2.1   | 1.5 kg | 0.5 g   | 0.5 g | 3000  | X       |
+---------------+-------+--------+---------+-------+-------+---------+
| Accuracy      | 2.2   | 3 kg   | 1 g     | 1 g   | 3000  |         |
| class         |       |        |         |       |       |         |
| ![](media/    |       |        |         |       |       |         |
| image6.jpeg){ |       |        |         |       |       |         |
| width="0.3in" |       |        |         |       |       |         |
| heig          |       |        |         |       |       |         |
| ht="0.2298611 |       |        |         |       |       |         |
| 111111111in"} |       |        |         |       |       |         |
|               |       |        |         |       |       |         |
| Temperature   |       |        |         |       |       |         |
| range:        |       |        |         |       |       |         |
|               |       |        |         |       |       |         |
| -10 °C / 40   |       |        |         |       |       |         |
| °C            |       |        |         |       |       |         |
+---------------+-------+--------+---------+-------+-------+---------+
|               | 2.3   | 5 kg   | 2 g     | 2 g   | 2500  |         |
+---------------+-------+--------+---------+-------+-------+---------+
|               | 2.4   | 15 kg  | 5 g     | 5 g   | 3000  | X       |
+---------------+-------+--------+---------+-------+-------+---------+
|               | 2.5   | 60 kg  | 20 g    | 20 g  | 3000  |         |
+---------------+-------+--------+---------+-------+-------+---------+

> Note: This example covers only the various capacities and metrological
> characteristics of the EUTs according to 3.10.4.2 and 3.10.4.3. The
> other metrologically relevant features according to 3.10.4.4 must in
> practice be taken into account, too, and may result in one or more
> additional EUTs.
>
> [Remarks to the selection:]{.underline}
>
> \- The variants 1.2, 2.1 and 2.4 are selected as EUTs ( marked in last
> column of table 8)
>
> \- Variant 1.1 need not be tested, because it has the same e and d as
> variant 1.2. Only the maximum capacity (Max) is reduced to 200 g (see
> 3.10.4.2).
>
> \- Variant 1.2 has the best metrological characteristics of family 1
> and shall be tested completely according to 3.10.4.2.
>
> \- Variant 1.3 need not be tested, because Max is not more than 5
> times above variant 1.2 (see 3.10.4.2).
>
> \- Variant 2.1 has the best metrological characteristics of family 2,
> the smallest e and the greatest n. Therefore variant 2.1 shall be
> tested (see 3.10.4.3). It is sufficient to perform additionally only
> the applicable tests for class  ![](media/image6.jpeg){width="0.3in"
> height="0.2298611111111111in"}. It is not necessary to repeat those
> tests which are the same for
> class ![](media/image5.jpeg){width="0.3798611111111111in"
> height="0.2298611111111111in"} and
> class ![](media/image6.jpeg){width="0.3in"
> height="0.2298611111111111in"} and which are already performed at
> variant 1.2.
>
> \- Variants 2.2 and  2.3 need not be tested, because their Max are in
> between the tested variants 2.1 and  2.4 (see 3.10.4.2) and their
> metrological characteristics are less or the same as for variants 2.1
> and  2.4.
>
> \- Variant 2.4 shall be tested, because the ratio between variant 2.5
> and 2.1 is greater than 10 (see 3.10.4.2). For variant 2.4 it is
> sufficient to perform additionally some important tests such as
> weighing test, temperature, eccentricity, discrimination,
> repeatability, etc.. It is normally not necessary to repeat other
> tests (e.g. tilting, power supply, humidity, span stability,
> endurance, disturbance tests) which are already performed on
> variants 1.2 and 2.1.
>
> \- Variant 2.5 need not be tested, because Max is not more than 5
> times above variant 2.4 (see 3.10.4.2).
>
> Table 9: Summary of the metrological characteristics presented in the
> OIML certificate

  ----------------------- ----------------------------------------------------- --------------------------------------
                          Family 1                                              Family 2

  Accuracy class          ![](media/image5.jpeg){width="0.3798611111111111in"   ![](media/image6.jpeg){width="0.3in"
                          height="0.2298611111111111in"}                        height="0.2298611111111111in"}

  Max                     1 g \... 2000 g                                       50 g \... 60 kg

  e =                     0.01 g \... 0.2 g                                     0.5 g \... 100 g

  d =                     0.001 g \... 0.2 g                                    0.5 g \... 100 g

  n                       ≤ 40000                                               ≤ 3000

  Tare balancing range    100 % of Max                                          100 % of Max

  Preset tare range       100 % of Max                                          100 % of Max

  Temperature range       10 °C / 30 °C                                         -10 °C / 40 °C
  ----------------------- ----------------------------------------------------- --------------------------------------

> Note: The respective OIML certificate shall include either the
> complete family according to Table 8 with eight instruments in two
> families or may alternatively include the metrological characteristics
> of the families according to Table 9. In the latter case the Max
> values may be reduced (in comparison with the smallest EUT, table 8)
> if it is an identical instrument with the same verification scale
> interval (e), and if the conditions of table 3 are still met. The
> certificate covers all variants that meet the metrological
> characteristics in Table 9.

**4 Technical requirements for a self- or semi-self-indicating
instrument**

> The following requirements relate to the design and the construction
> of instruments, and are intended to ensure that instruments give
> correct and unambiguous weighing results and other primary
> indications, under normal conditions of use and proper handling by
> unskilled users. They are not intended to prescribe solutions, but to
> define appropriate functioning of the instrument.
>
> Certain solutions that have been tried over a long period have become
> accepted; these solutions are marked \"acceptable solution\"; while it
> is not necessary to adopt them, they are considered to comply with the
> requirements of the applicable provision.
>
> 4.1 General requirements of construction
>
> 4.1.1 Suitability
>
> 4.1.1.1 Suitability for application
>
> An instrument shall be designed to suit its intended purpose of use.
>
> Note: 'Intended purpose' includes aspects such as the nature and needs
> of the application and environment. Where the intended purpose needs
> to be restricted, a marking stating such restriction may be required
> according to national regulation.
>
> 4.1.1.2 Suitability for use
>
> An instrument shall be solidly and carefully constructed in order to
> ensure that it maintains its metrological qualities during a period of
> use.
>
> 4.1.1.3 Suitability for verification
>
> An instrument shall permit the tests set out in this Recommendation to
> be performed.
>
> In particular, load receptors shall be such that the standard weight
> can be deposited on them easily and in total safety. If weights cannot
> be placed, an additional support may be required.
>
> It must be possible to identify devices that have been subject to a
> separate type examination procedure (e.g. load cells, printers,\...).
>
> 4.1.2 Security
>
> 4.1.2.1 Fraudulent use
>
> An instrument shall have no characteristics likely to facilitate its
> fraudulent use.
>
> 4.1.2.2 Accidental breakdown and maladjustment
>
> An instrument shall be so constructed that an accidental breakdown or
> a maladjustment of control elements likely to disturb its correct
> functioning cannot take place without its effect being evident.
>
> 4.1.2.3 Controls
>
> Controls shall be so designed that they cannot normally come to rest
> in positions other than those intended by design, unless during the
> manoeuvre all indication is made impossible. Keys shall be marked
> unambiguously
>
> 4.1.2.4 Securing of components and pre-set controls
>
> Means shall be provided for securing components and pre-set controls
> to which access or adjustment is prohibited. National legislation may
> specify the securing that is required.
>
> On a class ![](media/image2.jpeg){width="0.35in" height="0.2in"}
> instrument, devices to adjust sensitivity (or span) may remain
> unsecured.
>
> Acceptable solution
>
> For application of the control marks, the securing area should have a
> diameter of at least 5 mm.
>
> Components and pre-set controls may be secured by software means
> provided that any access to the secured controls or functions becomes
> automatically evident. In addition the following requirements apply to
> software securing means.

a.  By analogy with conventional securing methods the legal status of
    the instrument must be recognizable to the user or any other person
    responsible at the instrument itself.\
    Securing measures shall provide the evidence of any intervention
    until the next verification or comparable official inspection.

> Acceptable technical solution:
>
> An event counter, i.e. a non-resettable^1)^ counter that increments
> each time a protected operational mode of the instrument is entered
> and one or more changes are made to device-specific parameters. The
> reference number of the counter at the time of (initial or subsequent)
> verification is fixed and secured by appropriate hard- or software
> means at the modified instrument. The actual counter number can be
> indicated for comparison with the reference number by a procedure
> described in the manual and in the OIML certificate with evaluation
> report.
>
> ^1)^ The term \"non-resettable\" implies that if the counter has
> reached its maximum number it will not continue with zero without the
> intervention of an authorized person.
>
> b\. The device-specific parameter and the reference number shall be
> protected against unintentional and accidental changes. For these
> data, the software requirements of 5.5.2.2 shall be met as far as
> applicable.
>
> Acceptable technical solution:
>
> The device-specific parameter should only be changed by an authorized
> person via a special PIN-code. The serial number (or other
> identification) of the instrument as affixed to the instrument's main
> plate (or other suitable parts) should additionally be stored, if the
> electronic component with the memory device is not secured against
> exchange. These data should be secured by a signature (at least 2
> bytes CRC-16 checksum with hidden polynomial), this is considered as a
> sufficient securing method. The reference number and serial number
> (respective other identification) should be displayed after manual
> command and should be compared with the same data affixed and secured
> on the main plate (or other suitable parts of the instrument).
>
> c\. An instrument making use of a software securing method shall have
> adequate facilities for affixing the reference number on or near the
> main plate by an authorized person or body.
>
> Note: A difference between the indicated reference number (according
> to a.) and the fixed and secured reference number on the instrument
> indicates an intervention. The consequences are under national
> legislation (e.g. that the instrument shall no longer be used for
> legally controlled purposes).
>
> Acceptable technical solution:
>
> Adjustable (hardware) counter that is firmly mounted to the instrument
> and that can be secured after it has been adjusted to the actual
> counter number at the time of (initial or subsequent) verification.
>
> 4.1.2.5 Adjustment
>
> An instrument may be fitted with an automatic or a semi-automatic span
> adjustment device. This device shall be incorporated inside the
> instrument. External influence upon this device shall be practically
> impossible after securing.
>
> 4.1.2.6 Gravity compensation
>
> A gravity sensitive instrument may be equipped with a device for
> compensating the effects of gravity variations. After securing,
> external influence on or access to this device shall be practically
> impossible.
>
> 4.2 Indication of weighing results
>
> 4.2.1 Quality of reading
>
> Reading of the primary indications (see T.1.3.1) shall be reliable,
> easy and unambiguous under conditions of normal use:
>
> \- the overall inaccuracy of reading of an analogue indicating device
> shall not exceed 0.2 e,
>
> \- the figures, units and designations forming the primary indications
> shall be of a size, shape and clarity for reading to be easy.
>
> The scales, numbering and printing shall permit the figures which form
> the results to be read by simple juxtaposition.
>
> 4.2.2 Form of the indication
>
> 4.2.2.1 Weighing results and, if applicable, unit price and price to
> pay shall contain the names or symbols of the units in which they are
> expressed.
>
> For any one indication of weight, only one unit of mass may be used.
>
> The scale interval for weighing results shall be in the form 1 x
> 10^k^, 2 x 10^k^ or 5 x 10^k^ units in which the result is expressed,
> the index k being a positive or negative whole number or equal to
> zero.
>
> All displaying, printing and tare weighing devices of an instrument
> shall, within any one weighing range, have the same scale interval for
> any given load.
>
> 4.2.2.2 A digital indication shall show at least one figure beginning
> at the extreme right.
>
> Where the scale interval is changed automatically the decimal sign
> shall maintain its position in the display.
>
> A decimal fraction shall be separated from its integer by a decimal
> sign (comma or dot), with the indication showing at least one figure
> to the left of the sign and all figures to the right.
>
> The decimal sign shall be on one line with the bottom of the figures
> (example: 0.305 kg).
>
> Zero may be indicated by one zero to the extreme right, without a
> decimal sign.
>
> The unit of mass shall be chosen so that weight values have not more
> than one non-significant zero to the right. For values with decimal
> sign, the non-significant zero is allowed only in the third position
> after the decimal sign. For multi-interval instruments and multiple
> range instruments with automatic change over these requirements apply
> only to the smallest (partial) weighing range.
>
> Examples for multi-interval instrument or multiple range instrument
> with automatic change-over:
>
> Example 1)

  --------------- ------------ --------------- ------------- -------------
  Max~i~          e~i~         Allowed                       
                               indications                   

  Max~1~ = 150 kg e~1~ = 50 g  xxx.050 kg      xxx.05 kg     xxx.05 kg

  Max~2~ = 300 kg e~2~ = 100 g xxx.100 kg      xxx.10 kg     xxx.1 kg
  --------------- ------------ --------------- ------------- -------------

> Example 2)

  ----------------------- ------------------ ----------------------------
  Max~i~                  e~i~               Allowed indications

  Max~1~ = 1500 kg        e~1~ = 500 g       xxx.5 kg

  Max~2~ = 3000 kg        e~2~ = 1000 g      xx1.0 kg
  ----------------------- ------------------ ----------------------------

> 4.2.3 Limits of indication
>
> There shall be no indication above Max + 9 e.
>
> For multiple range instruments this applies to each weighing range.
> For multiple range instruments with automatic change over, however,
> Max is equal to Max~r~ of the highest weighing range r and there shall
> be no indication above Max~i~ = n × e~i~ for the smaller weighing
> range(s) i.
>
> For multi-interval instruments there shall be no indication using e~i~
> above Max~i~ = n~i~ × e~i~ for the lower partial weighing range(s) i.
>
> Indications below zero are not permitted unless a tare device is in
> operation.
>
> Note:
>
> Nevertheless, a temporary indication of negative numbers down to --20d
> is accepted.
>
> 4.2.4 Approximate displaying device
>
> The scale interval of an approximate displaying device shall be
> greater than Max/100 without being smaller than 20 e. This approximate
> device is considered as giving secondary indications.
>
> 4.2.5 Extending the range of self-indication on a semi-self-indicating
> instrument
>
> The extension interval of the range of self-indication shall not be
> greater than the value of the self-indication capacity.
>
> Acceptable solutions
>
> a\) The scale interval of extension of the range of self-indication
> should be equal to the capacity of self-indication (comparator
> instruments are excluded from this pro­vision).
>
> b\) An extension device with accessible sliding poises is subject to
> the requirements of 6.2.2.
>
> c\) On an extension device with enclosed sliding poises or weight
> switching mechanisms, each extension should involve an adequate change
> in the numbering. It should be possible to seal the housing and the
> adjusting cavities of the weights or masses.
>
> 4.3 Analogue indicating device
>
> The following requirements apply in addition to those in 4.2.1 through
> 4.2.4.
>
> 4.3.1 Scale marks; length and width
>
> Scales shall be designed and numbered so that reading the weighing
> result is easy and unambiguous.

Acceptable solutions

> a\) Form of scale marks
>
> Scale marks should consist of lines of equal thickness; this thickness
> should be constant and be between 1/10 and 1/4 of the scale spacing,
> without being less than 0.2 mm. The length of the shortest scale mark
> should be at least equal to the scale spacing.
>
> b\) Arrangement of scale marks
>
> Scale marks should be arranged in accordance with one of the sketches
> in Figure 6 (the line joining the end of the scale marks is optional).

Figure 6

Examples of application to rectilinear scales

![](media/image11.jpeg){width="4.35in" height="1.729861111111111in"}

> c\) Numbering

On one scale, the scale interval of numbering should be:

> \- constant,
>
> \- in the form 1 x 10^k^, 2 x 10^k^, 5 x l0^k^ units (k being a
> positive or negative whole number or equal to zero),
>
> \- not greater than 25 times the scale interval of the instrument.
>
> If the scale is projected on a screen, at least two numbered scale
> marks should appear wholly in the projected zone.
>
> The height of the numbers (real or apparent) expressed in millimetres
> should be not less than 3 times the minimum reading distance expressed
> in metres, without being less than 2 mm.

This height should be proportional to the length of the scale mark to
which it relates.

> The width of a number, measured parallel to the base of the scale,
> should be less than the distance between two consecutive numbered
> scale marks.
>
> d\) Indicating component
>
> The width of the pointer of the displaying component should be
> approximately equal to that of the scale marks and of a length such
> that the tip is at least level with the middle of the shortest mark.
>
> The distance between the scale and the pointer should be at most equal
> to the scale spacing, without being greater than 2 mm.
>
> 4.3.2 Scale spacing
>
> The minimum value i~0~ of the scale spacing is equal to:
>
> \- on an instrument of class ![](media/image2.jpeg){width="0.35in"
> height="0.2in"} or ![](media/image5.jpeg){width="0.3798611111111111in"
> height="0.2298611111111111in"}:
>
> 1 mm for indicating devices,
>
> 0.25 mm for complementary indicating devices; in this case i~0~ is the
> relative displacement between the displaying component and the
> projected scale corresponding to the verification scale interval of
> the instrument,
>
> \- on an instrument of class ![](media/image6.jpeg){width="0.3in"
> height="0.2298611111111111in"} or
> ![](media/image7.jpeg){width="0.35in" height="0.2298611111111111in"}:
>
> 1.25 mm for dial indicating devices,
>
> 1.75 mm for optical projection indicating devices.
>
> Acceptable solution
>
> The scale spacing (real or apparent) i, in millimetres, should be at
> least equal to (L + 0.5) i~0~, where:

i~0~ is the minimum scale spacing, in millimetres

L is the minimum reading distance, in metres; at least, L = 0.5 m.

> The greatest scale spacing should not exceed 1.2 times the smallest
> scale spacing of the same scale.
>
> 4.3.3 Limits of indication
>
> Stops shall limit the movement of the displaying component whilst
> allowing it to travel below zero and above the capacity of
> self-indication. This requirement does not apply to multi-revolution
> dial instruments.
>
> Acceptable solution
>
> The stops limiting the movement of the displaying component should
> permit it to travel across zones of at least 4 scale spacings below
> zero and above the capacity of self-indication (these zones are not
> provided with a scale on fan charts and on dials with a single
> revolution pointer; they are called "blank zones").
>
> 4.3.4 Damping
>
> The damping of the oscillations of the displaying component or of the
> movable scale shall be adjusted to a value slightly below \"critical
> damping\", whatever the influence factors.
>
> Acceptable solution
>
> Damping should achieve a stable indication after three, four or five
> half periods of oscillation.
>
> Hydraulic damping elements sensitive to variations in temperature
> should be provided with a automatic regulating device or an easily
> accessible manual regulating device.
>
> It should be impossible for the fluid of hydraulic damping elements on
> portable instruments to spill when the instrument is inclined at 45°.
>
> 4.4 Digital indicating devices
>
> The following requirements apply in addition to those in 4.2.1 through
> 4.2.5
>
> 4.4.1 Change of indication
>
> After a change in load, the previous indication shall not persist for
> longer than 1 second.
>
> 4.4.2 Stable equilibrium
>
> An indication is defined as being in stable equilibrium if it is
> sufficiently close to the final weight value. Stable equilibrium is
> considered to be achieved if:
>
> \- in the case of printing and/or data storage, the printed or stored
> weight values do not deviate more than 1 e from the final weight value
> (i.e. two adjacent values are allowed).
>
> \- in the case of zero or tare operations a correct operation of the
> device according to 4.5.4, 4.5.6, 4.5.7 and 4.6.8 within relevant
> accuracy requirements is achieved.
>
> During continuous or temporary disturbance of the equilibrium, the
> instrument shall not print, store data, or set zero, or tare.
>
> 4.4.3 Extended indicating device
>
> An extended indicating device shall not be used on an instrument with
> a differentiated scale division.
>
> When an instrument is fitted with an extended indicating device,
> displaying the indication with a scale interval smaller than e shall
> be possible only:
>
> \- during pressing a key, or
>
> \- for a period not exceeding 5 seconds after a manual command.
>
> In any case printing shall not be possible while the extended
> indicating device is in operation.
>
> 4.4.4 Multiple use of indicating devices
>
> Indications other than primary indications may be displayed in the
> same indicating device, provided that:
>
> \- any additional indications do not lead to any ambiguity in regard
> to the primary indications
>
> \- quantities other than weight values are identified by the
> appropriate unit of measurement, or symbol thereof, or a special sign
> or designation,
>
> \- weight values that are not weighing results (T.5.2.1 through
> T.5.2.3) shall be clearly identified, or they may be displayed only
> temporarily on manual command and shall not be printed.
>
> No restrictions apply if the weighing mode is made inoperative and
> this is clear and unambiguous (also for the customers in case of
> direct sales).
>
> 4.4.5 Printing device
>
> Printing shall be clear and permanent for the intended use. Printed
> figures shall be at least 2 mm high.
>
> If printing takes place, the name or the symbol of the unit of
> measurement shall be either to the right of the value or above a
> column of values.
>
> Printing shall be inhibited when the equilibrium is not stable.
>
> 4.4.6 Memory storage device
>
> The storage of primary indications for subsequent indication, data
> transfer, totalizing, etc. shall be inhibited when the equilibrium is
> not stable.
>
> 4.5 Zero-setting and zero-tracking devices
>
> An instrument may have one or more zero-setting devices and shall have
> not more than one zero-tracking device.
>
> 4.5.1 Maximum effect
>
> The effect of any zero-setting device shall not alter the maximum
> weighing capacity of the instrument.
>
> The overall effect of zero-setting and zero-tracking devices shall be
> not more than 4 %, and of the initial zero-setting device not more
> than 20 %, of the maximum capacity. This does not affect an instrument
> of class ![](media/image7.jpeg){width="0.35in"
> height="0.2298611111111111in"}, except if it is used for commercial
> transactions.
>
> A wider range is possible for the initial zero-setting device if the
> instrument complies with 3.5, 3.6, 3.8 and 3.9 for any load
> compensated by this device within the specified range.
>
> 4.5.2 Accuracy
>
> After zero setting the effect of zero deviation on the result of the
> weighing shall be not more than 0.25 e.
>
> 4.5.3 Multiple range instrument
>
> Zero setting in any weighing range shall be effective also in the
> greater weighing ranges, if switching to a greater weighing range is
> possible while the instrument is loaded.
>
> 4.5.4 Control of the zero-setting device
>
> An instrument - except an instrument according to 4.13 and 4.14 -
> whether or not equipped with an initial zero-setting device, may have
> a combined semi-automatic zero-setting and semi-automatic
> tare-balancing device operated by the same key.
>
> If an instrument has a zero-setting device and a tare-weighing device
> the control of the zero-setting device shall be separate from that of
> the tare-weighing device.
>
> A semi-automatic zero-setting device shall function only:
>
> when the instrument is in stable equilibrium,
>
> if it cancels any previous tare operation.
>
> 4.5.5 Zero indicating device on an instrument with digital indication
>
> An instrument with digital indication shall have a device that
> displays a special signal when the deviation from zero is not more
> than 0.25 e. This device may also work when zero is indicated after a
> tare operation.
>
> This device is not mandatory on an instrument that has an auxiliary
> indicating or a zero-tracking device provided that the rate of zero
> tracking is not less than 0.25 d/second.
>
> 4.5.6 Automatic zero-setting device
>
> An automatic zero-setting device shall operate only when:
>
> \- the equilibrium is stable, and
>
> \- the indication has remained stable below zero for at least 5
> seconds.
>
> 4.5.7 Zero-tracking device
>
> A zero-tracking device shall operate only when:
>
> \- the indication is at zero, or at a negative net value equivalent to
> gross zero, and
>
> \- the equilibrium is stable, and
>
> \- the corrections are not more than 0.5 d/second.
>
> When zero is indicated after a tare operation, the zero-tracking
> device may operate within a range of 4 % of Max around the actual zero
> value.
>
> 4.6 Tare device
>
> 4.6.1 General requirements
>
> A tare device shall comply with the relevant provisions of 4.1 through
> 4.4.
>
> 4.6.2 Scale interval
>
> The scale interval of a tare-weighing device shall be equal to the
> scale interval of the instrument for any given load.
>
> 4.6.3 Accuracy
>
> A tare device shall permit setting the indication to zero with an
> accuracy better than:

± 0.25 e for electronic instruments and any instrument with analogue
indication,

> ± 0.5 d for mechanical instruments with digital indication.
>
> On a multi-interval instrument e shall be replaced by e~1~.
>
> 4.6.4 Operating range
>
> The tare device shall be such that it cannot be used at or below its
> zero effect or above its maximum indicated effect.
>
> 4.6.5 Visibility of operation
>
> Operation of the tare device shall be visibly indicated on the
> instrument. In the case of instruments with digital indication this
> shall be done by marking the indicated net value with the sign
> \"NET\".
>
> Note: NET may be displayed as \"NET\", \"Net\" or \"net\".
>
> Note: If an instrument is equipped with a device that allows the gross
> value to be displayed temporarily while a tare device is in operation,
> the \"NET\" symbol shall disappear while the gross value is displayed.
>
> This is not required for an instrument with a combined semi-automatic
> zero-setting device and a semi-automatic tare-balancing device
> operated by the same key
>
> It is permitted to replace the symbols NET by complete words in an
> official language of the country where the instrument is used.
>
> Acceptable solution
>
> The use of a mechanical tare adding device should be shown by the
> indication of the tare value, or by the display on the instrument of a
> sign, e.g. letter \"T\".
>
> 4.6.6 Subtractive tare device
>
> When the use of a subtractive tare device does not allow the value of
> the residual weighing range to be known, a device shall prevent the
> use of the instrument above its maximum capacity or indicate that this
> capacity has been reached.
>
> 4.6.7 Multiple range instrument
>
> On a multiple range instrument the tare operation shall be effective
> also in the greater weighing ranges, if switching to a greater
> weighing range is possible while the instrument is loaded.
>
> 4.6.8 Semi-automatic or automatic tare devices
>
> These devices shall operate only when the instrument is in stable
> equilibrium.
>
> 4.6.9 Combined zero-setting and tare-balancing devices
>
> If the semi-automatic zero-setting device and the semi-automatic
> tare-balancing device are operated by the same key, 4.5.2, 4.5.5 and
> if appropriate 4.5.7 apply at any load.
>
> 4.6.10 Consecutive tare operations
>
> Repeated operation of a tare device is permitted.
>
> If more than one tare device is operative at the same time, tare
> values shall be clearly designated when indicated or printed.
>
> 4.6.11 Printing of weighing results
>
> Gross weight values may be printed without any designation. For a
> designation by a symbol, only \"G\" or \"B\" are permitted.
>
> If only net weight values are printed without corresponding gross or
> tare values, they may be printed without any designation. A symbol for
> designation shall be \"N\". This applies also where semi-automatic
> zero setting and semi-automatic tare balancing are initiated by the
> same key.
>
> Gross, net, or tare values determined by a multiple range instrument
> or by a multi-interval instrument need not be marked by a special
> designation referring to the (partial) weighing range.
>
> If net weight values are printed together with the corresponding gross
> and/or tare values, the net and tare values shall at least be
> identified by the corresponding symbols \"N\" and \"T\".
>
> However, it is permitted to replace the symbols G, B, N and T by
> complete words in an official language of the country where the
> instrument is used.
>
> If net weight values and tare values determined by different tare
> devices are printed separately, they shall be suitably identified.
>
> When gross, net and tare values are printed together, one of these
> values may be calculated from two actual determinations of mass. In
> the case of a multi-interval instrument the calculated weight value
> may be printed with a smaller scale interval.
>
> The printout of a calculated weight value shall be clearly identified.
> This should preferably be done by the symbol \"C\" in addition to the
> symbol mentioned above if applicable or by complete words in an
> official language of the country where the instrument is used.
>
> 4.6.12 Examples of indications of weighing results

1.  Instrument with a tare-balancing device

> Specifications of the instrument: Class
> ![](media/image6.jpeg){width="0.3in" height="0.2298611111111111in"},
> Max = 15 kg, e = 5 g
>
> Unloaded instrument indicated value = 0.000 kg
>
> Loading with tare load, internal value = 2.728 kg, rounded and
> indicated value = 2.730 kg ^1^)
>
> After releasing tare-balancing indicated net value = 0.000 kg Net
>
> Loading with net load, internal value = 11.833 kg,\
> rounded and indicated net value = 11.835 kg Net ^1^)
>
> Total loading, internal value = 14.561 kg,\
> rounded and indicated (if possible) gross value = 14.560 kg ^1^)
>
> Possible printouts according to 4.6.11:\
> a) 14.560 kg B (or G) 11.835 kg N\
> b) 14.560 kg 11.835 kg N\
> c) 11.835 kg N\
> d) 11.835 kg
>
> 4.6.12.2 Instrument with a tare-weighing device
>
> Specifications of the instrument: Class
> ![](media/image6.jpeg){width="0.3in" height="0.2298611111111111in"},
> Max = 15 kg, e = 5 g
>
> Unloaded instrument indicated value = 0.000 kg
>
> Loading with tare load, internal value = 2.728 kg, rounded and
> indicated value = 2.730 kg ^1^)
>
> After releasing tare-balancing, indicated net value = 0.000 kg Net
>
> Loading with net load, internal value = 11.833 kg, rounded and
> indicated net value = 11.835 kg Net ^1^)
>
> Total loading, internal value = 14.561 kg,\
> rounded and indicated (if possible) gross value = 14.560 kg ^1^)
>
> Possible printouts according. to 4.6.11:\
> a) 14.560 kg B (or G) 11.835 kg N 2.730 kg T ^4^)\
> b) 14.560 kg 11.835 kg N 2.730 kg T ^4^)\
> c) 11.835 kg N 2.730 kg T\
> d) 11.835 kg N\
> e) 11.835 kg

4.6.12.3 Multiple range instrument with a tare-weighing device

> Specifications of the instrument: Class
> ![](media/image6.jpeg){width="0.3in" height="0.2298611111111111in"},
> Max~1~ = 60 kg, e~1~ = 10 g\
> Max~2~ = 300 kg e~2~ = 100 g
>
> Unloaded instrument, indicated value in weighing range (WR) 1 = WR1
> 0.000 kg
>
> Loading with tare load, internal value = 53.466 kg,\
> rounded and indicated value = WR1 53.470 kg ^1^)
>
> After releasing tare-balancing, indicated net value = WR1 0.000 kg Net
>
> Loading with net load, internal value = 212.753 kg,\
> rounded and indicated net value = WR2 212.800 kg Net ^1^)^2^)
>
> *with automatic change over to weighing range 2,\
> the tare-weighing value shall be rounded\
> to the actual e of weighing range 2,* rounded tare-weighing value =
> WR2 53.500 kg ^2^)^3^)
>
> Total loading, internal value = 266.219 kg\
> rounded and indicated (if possible) gross value = WR2 266.200 kg
> ^1^)^2^)
>
> Possible printouts according to 4.6.11:\
> a) 266.200 kg B (or G) 212.800 kg N 53.500 kg T ^2^)^4^)\
> b) 266.200 kg 212.800 kg N 53.500 kg T ^2^)^4^)\
> c) 212.800 kg N 53.500 kg T ^2^)\
> d) 212.800 kg N ^2^)\
> e) 212.800 kg ^2^)

4.6.12.4 Multi-interval instrument with a tare-weighing device

> Specifications of the instrument: Class
> ![](media/image6.jpeg){width="0.3in" height="0.2298611111111111in"},
> Max = 3/6/15 t, e = 0.5/2/10 kg
>
> Unloaded instrument indicated value = 0.0 kg
>
> Loading with tare load, internal value = 6674 kg, rounded and
> indicated value = 6670.0 kg ^1^)
>
> After releasing tare-balancing indicated net value = 0.0 kg Net
>
> Loading with net load, internal value = 2673.7 kg, rounded and
> indicated net value = 2673.5 kg Net ^1^)
>
> Total loading, internal value = 9347.7 kg,\
> rounded and indicated (if possible) gross value = 9350.0 kg ^1^)^2^)
>
> Possible printouts according to 4.6.11:\
> a) 9350.0 kg B (or G) 2673.5 kg N 6670.0 kg T ^2^)^4^)\
> b) 9350.0 kg 2673.5 kg N 6670.0 kg T ^2^)^4^)\
> c) 2673.5 kg N 6670.0 kg T ^2^)\
> d) 2673.5 kg N ^2^)\
> e) 2673.5 kg ^2^)

4.6.12.5 Multi-interval instrument with a preset tare device (4.7)

> Specifications of the instrument: Class
> ![](media/image6.jpeg){width="0.3in" height="0.2298611111111111in"},
> Max = 4/10/20 kg, e = 2/5/10 g
>
> Unloaded instrument indicated value = 0.000 kg
>
> Loading with gross load, internal value = 13.376 kg,\
> rounded and indicated gross value = 13.380 kg ^1^)
>
> Input of the preset tare value = 3.813 kg, indicated value during
> input = 3.813 kg
>
> rounded and temporarily indicated preset tare value = 3.814 kg PT
>
> *the tare value may be rounded up or down, because e = 2 g* (or 3.812
> kg PT)
>
> *internal calculation: 13.380 kg -- 3.814 kg = 9.566 kg,\
> * rounded and indicated net value = 9.565 kg Net ^5^)
>
> *(or 13.380 kg -- 3.812 kg = 9.568 kg)* (or 9.570 kg Net) ^5^)
>
> Possible printouts according to 4.6.11 and 4.7.3:\
> a) 13.380 kg B (or G) 9.565 kg N 3.814 kg PT ^4^)\
> b) 13.380 kg 9.565 kg N 3.814 kg PT ^4^)\
> c) 9.565 kg N 3.814 kg PT\
> **or**\
> a) 13.380 kg B (or G) 9.570 kg N 3.812 kg PT ^4^)\
> b) 13.380 kg 9.570 kg N 3.812 kg PT ^4^)\
> c) 9.570 kg N 3.812 kg PT

4.6.12.6 Multi-interval instrument with a calculated weight value

> Specifications of the instrument: Class
> ![](media/image6.jpeg){width="0.3in" height="0.2298611111111111in"},
> Max = 20/50/150 kg, e = 10/20/100 g
>
> Unloaded indicated value = 0.000 kg
>
> First weighing (empty container, tare value) = 17.726 kg indicated
> value = 17.730 kg
>
> Unloaded indicated value = 0.000 kg
>
> Second weighing (net load, net value) = 126.15 kg, rounded and
> indicated value = 126.200 kg
>
> Possible printouts according to 4.6.11: Gross 143.930 kg C Tare 17.730
> kg Net 126.200 kg

Footnotes:

> ^1^) The maximum permissible errors are applicable to weighing results
> of gross (3.5.1), tare (3.5.3.4) and net (3.5.3.3) with the exception
> of calculated net weights because of a preset tare (3.5.3.3).
>
> ^2^) On multi-interval and on multiple range instruments with
> automatic change over in the higher (partial) weighing ranges more
> than one non-significant zeros may appear, depending on the smallest
> (partial) weighing range (4.2.2.2).
>
> ^3^) On multiple range instruments the tare weight values shall be
> rounded to the scale interval of the actual weighing range which is in
> operation (4.7.1).
>
> ^4^) The displayed and printed weighing results (gross, tare weighing,
> net) shall be rounded each to the actual e and the e can be different
> depending on the actual weighing range or the actual partial weighing
> range. Therefore a deviation of one e may be possible between the
> gross weighing result and the calculation of net and tare values.
>
> Consistent results are only possible according to paragraph 7 and 8 of
> 4.6.11 (see 4.6.12.6).
>
> ^5^) The calculated net value is calculated from the displayed gross
> weight value and from the displayed and already rounded preset tare
> value (T.5.3.2), not from the internal values.
>
> 4.7 Preset tare device
>
> 4.7.1 Scale interval
>
> Regardless of how a preset tare value is introduced into the device,
> its scale interval shall be equal or automatically rounded to the
> scale interval of the instrument. On a multiple range instrument a
> preset tare value may only be transferred from one weighing range to
> another one with a larger verification scale interval but shall then
> be rounded to the latter. For a multi-interval instrument, the preset
> tare value shall be entered with the smallest verification scale
> interval (e~1~) of the instrument, and the maximum preset tare value
> shall not be greater than Max~1~. The indicated or printed calculated
> net value shall be rounded to the scale interval of the instrument for
> the same net weight value.
>
> 4.7.2 Modes of operation
>
> A preset tare device may be operated together with one or more tare
> devices provided that:
>
> \- 4.6.10 is respected, and
>
> \- a preset tare operation cannot be modified or cancelled as long as
> any tare device operated after the preset tare operation is still in
> use.
>
> Preset tare devices may operate automatically only if the preset tare
> value is clearly identified with the load to be measured (e.g. by bar
> code identification on the container).
>
> 4.7.3 Indication of operation
>
> For the indicating device 4.6.5 applies with the exception of
> instruments with a combined semi-automatic zero-setting device and a
> semi-automatic tare-balancing device operated by the same key. It
> shall be possible to indicate the preset tare value at least
> temporarily.
>
> 4.6.11 applies accordingly provided that:
>
> \- if the calculated net value is printed at least the preset tare
> value is printed as well, with the exception of an instrument covered
> by 4.13, 4.14 or 4.16;
>
> \- preset tare values are designated by the symbol \"PT\"; however, it
> is permitted to replace the symbol \"PT\" by complete words in an
> official language of the country where the instrument is used.
>
> 4.8 Locking positions
>
> 4.8.1 Prevention of weighing outside the \"weigh\" position
>
> If an instrument has one or more locking devices, these devices shall
> only have two stable positions corresponding to \"locked\" and
> \"weigh\" and weighing shall only be possible in the \"weigh\"
> position.
>
> A \"preweigh\" position may exist on an instrument of class
> ![](media/image2.jpeg){width="0.35in" height="0.2in"} or
> ![](media/image5.jpeg){width="0.3798611111111111in"
> height="0.2298611111111111in"} except those under 4.13, 4.14 and 4.16.
>
> 4.8.2 Indication of position
>
> The \"locked\" and \"weigh\" positions shall be clearly shown.

4.9 Auxiliary verification devices (removable or fixed)

> 4.9.1 Devices with one or more platforms
>
> The nominal value of the ratio between the weights to be placed on the
> platform to balance a certain load and this load shall not be less
> than 1/5000 (it shall be visibly indicated just above the platform).
>
> The value of the weights needed to balance a load equal to the
> verification scale interval shall be an integer multiple of 0.1 gram.
>
> 4.9.2 Numbered scale devices
>
> The scale interval of the auxiliary verification device shall be equal
> to or smaller than 1/5 of the verification scale interval for which it
> is intended.
>
> 4.10 Selection of weighing ranges on a multiple range instrument
>
> The range which is actually in operation shall be clearly indicated.
> Manual selection of the weighing range is allowed:
>
> \- from a smaller to a greater weighing range, at any load,
>
> \- from a greater to a smaller weighing range, when there is no load
> on the load receptor, and the indication is zero or at a negative net
> value equivalent to gross zero; the tare operation shall be cancelled,
> and zero shall be set to ± 0.25 e~1~, both automatically.
>
> Automatic change over is allowed:
>
> \- from a smaller to the following greater weighing range when the
> load exceeds the maximum gross weight Max~i~ of the range i of the
> range being operative,
>
> \- only from a greater to the smallest weighing range when there is no
> load on the load receptor, and the indication is zero or at a negative
> net value equivalent to gross zero; the tare operation shall be
> cancelled and zero shall be set to ± 0.25 e~1~, both automatically.
>
> 4.11 Devices for selection (or switching) between various load
> receptors-load transmitting devices and various load measuring devices
>
> 4.11.1 Compensation of no-load effect
>
> The selection device shall ensure compensation for the unequal no-load
> effect of the various load receptors - load transmitting devices in
> use.
>
> 4.11.2 Zero-setting
>
> Zero-setting of an instrument with any multiple combination of various
> load measuring devices and various load receptors shall be possible
> without ambiguity and in accordance with the provisions of 4.5.
>
> 4.11.3 Impossibility of weighing
>
> Weighing shall not be possible while selection devices are being used.
>
> 4.11.4 Identification of the combinations used
>
> Combinations of load receptors and load measuring devices used shall
> be readily identifiable.
>
> It shall be clearly visible, which indication(s) correspond to which
> load receptor(s).
>
> 4.11.5 Modes of operation
>
> An instrument may have different modes of operation, which can be
> selected on manual command. Examples for
>
> \- weighing modes are: weighing ranges, combinations of platforms,
> multi-interval or single interval instrument, operator or self-service
> mode, preset-tare setting, display or instrument switching-off, etc.,
>
> \- weighing mode inoperative are: calculated values, sums, counting,
> percentage, statistics, calibration, configuration, etc..
>
> The mode which is actually in operation shall be clearly identified by
> a special sign, symbol or words in the language of the country, where
> the instrument is used. In any case the requirements in 4.4.4 apply in
> addition.
>
> In any mode and at any time it shall be possible to switch back to the
> normal weighing mode.
>
> Automatic selection of the mode is only permitted within a weighing
> sequence (e.g. a fixed sequence of weighings to produce a mixture). At
> the end of the weighing sequence the instrument shall switch back to
> the weighing mode automatically.
>
> When returning from the weighing mode inoperative to the normal
> weighing mode, the actual weight value may be displayed.
>
> When returning from the switch-off condition (display or instrument
> switch-off) to the weighing mode, zero shall be displayed (automatic
> zero- or tare-setting). Alternatively the actual weight value may be
> displayed, but only if the correct zero position has been
> automatically checked before.
>
> 4.12 \"Plus\" and \"minus\" comparator instrument
>
> For the purposes of verification, a \"plus\" and \"minus\" comparator
> instrument is considered to be a semi-self-indicating instrument.
>
> 4.12.1 Distinction between \"plus\" and \"minus\" zones
>
> On an analogue indicating device the zones situated on either side of
> zero shall be distinguished by \"+\" and \"-\" signs.
>
> On a digital indicating device an inscription near the indicating
> device shall be given:
>
> \- range ± ... u~m~, or
>
> \- range - ... u~m~**/+** ... u~m~,

where u~m~ represents the unit of measurement as per 2.1.

> 4.12.2 Form of scale
>
> The scale of a comparator instrument shall have at least one scale
> division d = e on either side of zero. The corresponding value shall
> be shown at either end of the scale.
>
> 4.13 Instrument for direct sales to the public (\*)
>
> (\*) Note: Interpretation of what is included in \"direct sales to the
> public\" is left up to national legislation.
>
> The following requirements apply to an instrument of class
> ![](media/image5.jpeg){width="0.3798611111111111in"
> height="0.2298611111111111in"} , ![](media/image6.jpeg){width="0.3in"
> height="0.2298611111111111in"} or
> ![](media/image7.jpeg){width="0.35in" height="0.2298611111111111in"}
> with a maximum capacity not greater than 100 kg designed to be used
> for direct sales to the public.
>
> 4.13.1 Primary indications
>
> On an instrument for direct sales to the public the primary
> indications are the weighing result and information about correct zero
> position, tare and preset tare operations.
>
> 4.13.2 Zero-setting device
>
> An instrument for direct sales to the public shall not be fitted with
> a non-automatic zero-setting device unless operated only with a tool.
>
> 4.13.3 Tare device
>
> A mechanical instrument with a weight receptor shall not be fitted
> with a tare device.
>
> An instrument with one platform may be fitted with tare devices if
> they allow the public to see:
>
> \- whether they are in use, and
>
> \- whether their setting is altered.
>
> Only one tare device shall be in operation at any given time.
>
> Note: The restrictions in use are included under 4.13.3.2, 2nd indent.
>
> An instrument shall not be fitted with a device which can recall the
> gross value while a tare or preset tare device is in operation.
>
> 4.13.3.1 Non-automatic tare device
>
> A displacement of 5 mm of a point of the control shall be at most
> equal to one verification scale interval.
>
> 4.13.3.2 Semi-automatic tare device
>
> An instrument may be fitted with semi-automatic tare devices if:
>
> \- the action of the tare devices does not permit a reduction of the
> value of the tare, and
>
> \- their effect can only be cancelled when there is no load on the
> load receptor.
>
> In addition, the instrument shall comply with at least one of the
> following requirements:
>
> 1\. the tare value is indicated permanently in a separate display,
>
> 2\. the tare value is indicated with a sign \"-\" (minus), when there
> is no load on the load receptor, or
>
> 3\. the effect of the device is cancelled automatically and the
> indication returns to zero when unloading the load receptor after a
> stable net weighing result greater than zero has been indicated.

4.13.3.3 Automatic tare device

> An instrument shall not be fitted with an automatic tare device.
>
> 4.13.4 Preset tare device
>
> A preset tare device may be provided if the preset tare value is
> indicated as a primary indication on a separate display which is
> clearly differentiated from the weight display. 4.13.3.2, first
> paragraph, applies.
>
> It shall not be possible to operate a preset tare device if a tare
> device is in use.
>
> Where a preset tare is associated with a price look up (PLU) the
> preset tare value should be cancelled at the same time as the PLU is
> cancelled.
>
> 4.13.5 Impossibility of weighing
>
> It shall be impossible to weigh or to guide the indicating element
> during the normal locking operation or during the normal operation of
> adding on subtracting weights.
>
> 4.13.6 Visibility
>
> All primary indications (4.13.1, and 4.14.1 if applicable) shall be
> indicated clearly and simultaneously to both the vendor and the
> customer. If this is not possible with one display device two sets are
> necessary, one set each for the vendor and the customer.
>
> On digital devices that display primary indications, the numerical
> figures displayed to the customer shall be at least 9.5 mm high.
>
> On an instrument to be used with weights it shall be possible to
> distinguish the value of the weights.
>
> 4.13.7 Auxiliary and extended indicating devices
>
> An instrument shall not be fitted with an auxiliary indicating device
> nor an extended indicating device.
>
> 4.13.8 Instruments of class
> ![](media/image5.jpeg){width="0.3798611111111111in"
> height="0.2298611111111111in"}
>
> An instrument of class
> ![](media/image5.jpeg){width="0.3798611111111111in"
> height="0.2298611111111111in"} shall comply with the requirements
> given in 3.9 for an instrument of class
> ![](media/image6.jpeg){width="0.3in" height="0.2298611111111111in"}.
>
> 4.13.9 Significant fault
>
> When a significant fault has been detected, a visible or audible alarm
> shall be provided for the customer, and data transmission to any
> peripheral equipment shall be prevented. This alarm shall continue
> until such time as the user takes action or the cause disappears.
>
> 4.13.10 Counting ratio
>
> The counting ratio on a mechanical counting instrument shall be 1/10
> or 1/100.
>
> 4.13.11 Self-service instrument
>
> A self-service instrument need not have two sets of scales or
> displays.
>
> If a ticket or a label is printed, the primary indications shall
> include a designation of the product when the instrument is used to
> sell different products.
>
> If a price-computing instrument is used as a self-service instrument
> then the requirements in 4.14 must be met.
>
> 4.14 Additional requirements for a price-computing instrument for
> direct sales to the public
>
> The following requirements are to be applied in addition to 4.13.
>
> 4.14.1 Primary indications
>
> On a price-indicating instrument the supplementary primary indications
> are unit price and price to pay and, if applicable, number, unit price
> and price to pay for non-weighed articles, prices for non-weighed
> articles and price totals. Price charts, such as fan charts, are not
> subject to the requirements of this Recommendation.
>
> 4.14.2 Instrument with price scales
>
> For unit price and price-to-pay scales, 4.2 and 4.3.1 through 4.3.3
> apply accordingly; however, decimal fractions shall be indicated
> according to national regulations.
>
> Reading from price scales shall be so possible that the absolute value
> of the difference between the product of the indicated weight value W
> and unit price U and the indicated price to pay P is not greater than
> the product of e and the unit price for that scale:
>
> W · U - P ≤ e · U
>
> 4.14.3 Price computing instrument
>
> The price to pay shall be calculated and rounded to the nearest
> interval of price to pay, by multiplication of weight value and unit
> price, both as indicated by the instrument. The device or devices
> which perform the calculation and indication of the price to pay are
> in any case considered part of the instrument.
>
> The interval of price to pay shall comply with the national
> regulations applicable to trade.
>
> The unit price is restricted to Price/100 g or Price/kg.
>
> Notwithstanding the provision in 4.4.1, the indications of weight
> value, unit price and price to pay shall remain visible after the
> weight indication is stable, and after any introduction of the unit
> price, for at least one second and while the load is on the load
> receptor.
>
> Notwithstanding the provision in 4.4.1, these indications may remain
> visible for no more than 3 seconds after removing the load, provided
> that the weight indication has been stable before and the indication
> would otherwise be zero. As long as there is a weight indication after
> removing the load, it shall not be possible to introduce or change a
> unit price.
>
> If transactions performed by the instrument are printed, weight value,
> unit price and price to pay shall all be printed.
>
> The data may be stored in a memory of the instrument before printing.
> The same data shall not be printed twice on the ticket for the
> customer.
>
> Instruments that can be used for price labelling purposes must comply
> with 4.16 as well.
>
> 4.14.4 Special applications of a price computing instrument
>
> Only if all transactions performed by the instrument or by connected
> peripherals are printed on a ticket or label intended for the
> customer, a price computing instrument may perform additional
> functions which facilitate trade and management. These functions shall
> not lead to confusion about the results of weighing and price
> computing.
>
> Other operations or indications not covered by the following
> provisions may be performed, provided that no indication which could
> possibly be misunderstood as a primary indication is presented to the
> customer.
>
> 4.14.4.1 Non-weighed articles
>
> An instrument may accept and record positive or negative prices to pay
> of one or several non-weighed articles, provided that the weight
> indication is zero or the weighing mode is made inoperative. The price
> to pay for one or more of such articles shall be shown in the
> price-to-pay display.
>
> If the price to pay is calculated for more than one equal articles,
> the number of articles shall be shown on the weight display, without
> being possibly taken for a weight value, and the price for one article
> on the unit price display, unless supplementary displays are used to
> show the number of articles and the article price.
>
> Acceptable solution:
>
> A number of articles shown on the weight display is distinguished from
> a weight value by including an appropriate designation such as "X" or
> other clear designation in accordance with national regulations (if
> any).
>
> 4.14.4.2 Totalization
>
> An instrument may totalize transactions on one or several tickets; the
> price total shall be indicated on the price-to-pay display, and
> printed accompanied by a special word or symbol, either at the end of
> the price-to-pay column, or on a separate label or ticket with
> appropriate reference to the commodities whose prices to pay have been
> totalized; all prices to pay that are totalized shall be printed, and
> the price total shall be the algebraic sum of all these prices as
> printed.
>
> An instrument may totalize transactions performed on other instruments
> linked to it, directly or over metrologically controlled peripherals,
> under the provisions of 4.14.4 and if the price-to-pay scale intervals
> of all connected instruments are identical.
>
> 4.14.4.3 Multi-vendor operation
>
> An instrument may be designed to be used by more than one vendor or to
> serve more than one customer at the same time, provided that the
> connection between the transactions and the relevant vendor or
> customer is appropriately identified (refer to 4.14.4).
>
> 4.14.4.4 Cancellation
>
> An instrument may cancel previous transactions. Where the transaction
> has already been printed, the relevant price to pay cancelled shall be
> printed with an appropriate comment. If the transaction to be
> cancelled is displayed to the customer it shall be clearly
> differentiated from normal transactions.
>
> 4.14.4.5 Additional information
>
> An instrument may print additional information if this is clearly
> correlated to the transaction and does not interfere with the
> assignment of the weight value to the unit symbol.
>
> 4.15 Instrument similar to one normally used for direct sales to the
> public
>
> An instrument similar to one normally used for direct sales to the
> public which does not comply with the provisions of 4.13 and 4.14
> shall carry, near the display, the indelible marking:

\"Not to be used for direct sales to the public\".

> 4.16 Price-labelling instrument
>
> 4.13.8, 4.14.3 (paragraphs 1 and 5), 4.14.4.1 (paragraph 1) and
> 4.14.4.5 apply.
>
> A price-labelling instrument shall have at least one display for the
> weight value. It may be used temporarily for set-up purposes such as
> supervision of setting weight limits, unit prices, preset tare values,
> commodity names.
>
> It shall be possible to verify, during use of the instrument, the
> actual values of unit price and preset tare value.
>
> Printing below minimum capacity shall not be possible.
>
> Printing of labels with fixed values of weight, unit price and price
> to pay is allowed provided that the weighing mode is obviously made
> inoperative.
>
> 4.17 Mechanical counting instrument with unit-weight receptor
>
> For the purpose of verification a counting instrument is considered to
> be a semi-self-indicating instrument.
>
> 4.17.1 Indicating device
>
> To permit verification, a counting instrument shall have a scale with
> at least one scale division d = e on either side of zero; the
> corresponding value shall be shown on the scale.
>
> 4.17.2 Counting ratio
>
> The counting ratio shall be shown clearly just above each counting
> platform or each counting scale mark.
>
> 4.18 Additional technical requirements for mobile instruments (see
> also 3.9.1.1)
>
> Depending on the type of mobile instrument the following
> characteristics shall be defined by the applicant:

-   warm-up procedure / period (in addition to 5.3.5) of the hydraulic
    lifting system when a hydraulic system is involved in the weighing
    process ,

-   the limiting value of tilting (upper limit of tilting) (see
    3.9.1.1),

-   special conditions if the instrument is designed to be used for
    weighing liquid products,

-   description of special positions (e.g weighing window) for the load
    receptor to get acceptable conditions during the weighing operation

-   description of detectors or sensors that may be used to ensure that
    the weighing conditions are met (applicable e.g. for mobile
    instruments used outside in open locations)

> 4.18.1 Mobile instruments used outside in open locations (see also
> 3.9.1.1, d.) \*)
>
> The instrument shall have appropriate means to indicate that the
> limiting value of tilting has been exceeded (e.g. display switch-off,
> lamp, error signal), and to inhibit the printout and data transmission
> in that case.
>
> After each moving of the vehicle a zero-setting or tare balancing
> operation shall occur automatically at least after switching-on of the
> weighing instrument.
>
> On instruments with a weighing window (special positions or conditions
> of the load receptor) it shall be indicated, when the instrument is
> not within the weighing window (e.g. display switch-off, lamp, error
> signal) and the printout and data transmission shall be inhibited.
> Sensors, switches or other means may be used to recognize the weighing
> window.
>
> If the load measuring device of the instrument is sensitive to
> influences depending on the moving or driving, it shall be equipped
> with an appropriate protection system.
>
> 5.3.5 applies during a warm-up time or procedure, e.g. if a hydraulic
> system is involved in the weighing process.
>
> Where an automatic tilt sensor is also used to compensate the effect
> of tilting by adding a correction to the weighing result, this sensor
> is regarded as an essential part of the weighing instrument that shall
> be submitted to influence factors and disturbance tests during the
> type approval procedure.
>
> Where a Cardanic (gimbal type) suspension is used appropriate
> provisions shall be taken to prevent the indication, printing or data
> transmission of wrong weighing results if the suspended system or the
> load receptor comes into contact with the surrounding frame
> construction, especially for tiltings larger than the limiting value.
>
> The OIML Evaluation report shall include a description of the tilting
> tests to be performed at verification.
>
> \*) 4.18.1 also applies to special indoor applications with uneven
> grounds or floors (e.g. fork lift vehicles in halls with uneven
> floors).
>
> 4.18.2 Other mobile instruments
>
> Mobile instruments not intended to be used outside in open locations
> (e.g. wheel chair weighers, patient lifters) shall have a device to
> prevent the influence of tilting according to 3.9.1.1 a, b or d. If
> they are equipped with a levelling device and a level indicator
> according to 3.9.1.1, a., the levelling device shall be operated
> easily without tools. They shall bear an appropriate inscription
> pointing the user to the necessity of levelling after each movement.
>
> 4.19 Portable instruments for weighing road vehicles
>
> Portable weighbridges shall be identified as such in the application
> for type approval and in the issued corresponding OIML certificate.
>
> The applicant shall provide a documentation describing conditions for
> an appropriate mounting surface.
>
> Note 1: Groups of associated axle or wheel load weighers may be used
> for determining the total mass of the vehicle only if all wheels are
> supported simultaneously. Depending on national regulations
> sequentially determining the axle or wheel loads using an axle/ wheel
> weigher could be allowed to determine the total mass of a road
> vehicle, but this is not in the scope of this recommendation. The
> total mass may be calculated from axle loads but this is not
> considered as being subject to legal control, for the reasons given in
> Note 2.
>
> Note 2: When using single axle or wheel weighers the vehicle itself is
> the load and thus forms a link between the portable instrument and the
> fixed environment. This may lead to considerable errors if additional
> effects on the weighing result are not properly taken into account.
> These effects may be caused by:

-   Lateral forces due to interactions of the weighbridge with the
    vehicle,

-   Forces on part of the vehicle by different transient behaviour and
    friction within the axle suspensions,

-   Forces on part of the ramps if there are different levels between
    the weighbridge and ramp that could lead to varying distribution of
    the axle load.

> **5 Technical requirements for electronic instruments**
>
> In addition to chapters 3 "Metrological requirements" and 4 "Technical
> requirements for a self- or semi-self-indicating instrument", an
> electronic instrument shall comply with the following requirements.
>
> 5.1 General requirements
>
> 5.1.1 An electronic instrument shall be designed and manufactured such
> that, when it is exposed to disturbances:
>
> either, (a) significant faults do not occur, or
>
> \(b\) significant faults are detected and acted upon. The indication
> of significant faults in the display should not be confusing with
> other messages that appear in the display
>
> Note: A fault equal to or smaller than e is allowed irrespective of
> the value of the error of indication.
>
> 5.1.2 The requirements in 3.5, 3.6, 3.8, 3.9 and 5.1.1 shall be met
> durably, in accordance with the intended use of the instrument.
>
> 5.1.3 A type of an electronic instrument is presumed to comply with
> the requirements in 5.1.1, 5.1.2 and 5.3.2 if it passes the
> examinations and tests specified in 5.4.
>
> 5.1.4 The requirements in 5.1.1 may be applied separately to:
>
> a\) each individual cause of significant fault, and/or
>
> b\) each part of the electronic instrument.
>
> The choice, whether 5.1.1 (a) or 5.1.1 (b) is applied, is left to the
> manufacturer.
>
> 5.2 Acting upon significant faults
>
> When a significant fault has been detected, the instrument shall
> either be made inoperative automatically or a visual or audible
> indication shall be provided automatically and shall continue until
> such time as the user takes action or the fault disappears.
>
> 5.3 Functional requirements
>
> 5.3.1 Upon switch-on (switch-on of indication), a special procedure
> shall be performed that shows all relevant signs of the indicator in
> their active and non-active state sufficiently long to be checked by
> the operator. This is not applicable for non-segmented displays, on
> which failures become evident, for example screen-displays,
> matrix-displays, etc..
>
> 5.3.2 In addition to 3.9, an electronic instrument shall comply with
> the requirements under a relative humidity of 85 % at the upper limit
> of the temperature range. This is not applicable to an electronic
> instrument of class ![](media/image2.jpeg){width="0.35in"
> height="0.2in"}, and of class
> ![](media/image5.jpeg){width="0.3798611111111111in"
> height="0.2298611111111111in"} if e is less than 1 g.
>
> 5.3.3 Electronic instruments, class
> ![](media/image2.jpeg){width="0.35in" height="0.2in"} instruments
> excepted, shall be subjected to the span stability test specified in
> 5.4.4. The error near maximum capacity shall not exceed the maximum
> permissible error and the absolute value of the difference between the
> errors obtained for any two measurements shall not exceed half the
> verification scale interval or half the absolute value of the maximum
> permissible error, whichever is greater.
>
> 5.3.4 When an electronic instrument is subjected to the disturbances
> specified in 5.4.3, the difference between the weight indication due
> to the disturbance and the indication without the disturbance
> (intrinsic error), shall not exceed e or the instrument shall detect
> and react to a significant fault.
>
> 5.3.5 During the warm-up time of an electronic instrument there shall
> be no indication or transmission of the weighing result.
>
> 5.3.6 An electronic instrument may be equipped with interfaces
> permitting the coupling of the instrument to any peripheral devices or
> other instruments.
>
> An interface shall not allow the metrological functions of the
> instrument and its measurement data to be inadmissibly influenced by
> the peripheral devices (for example computers), by other
> interconnected instruments, or by disturbances acting on the
> interface.
>
> Functions that are performed or initiated via an interface shall meet
> the relevant requirements and conditions of chapter 4.
>
> Note: An "interface" comprises all mechanical, electrical and logic
> properties at the data interchange point between an instrument and
> peripheral devices or other instruments.
>
> 5.3.6.1 It shall not be possible to introduce into an instrument,
> through an interface, instructions or data intended or suitable to:
>
> \- display data that are not clearly defined and could be mistaken for
> a weighing result,
>
> \- falsify displayed, processed or stored weighing results,
>
> \- adjust the instrument or change any adjustment factor; however
> instructions may be given through the interface to carry out an
> adjustment procedure using a span adjustment device incorporated
> inside the instrument or, for instruments in class
> ![](media/image2.jpeg){width="0.35in" height="0.2in"}, using an
> external standard-weight or standard mass,
>
> \- falsify primary indications displayed in case of direct sales to
> the public.
>
> 5.3.6.2 An interface through which the functions mentioned in 5.3.6.1
> cannot be performed or initiated, need not be secured. Other
> interfaces shall be secured as per 4.1.2.4.
>
> 5.3.6.3 An interface intended to be connected to a peripheral device
> to which the requirements of this Recommendation apply, shall transmit
> data relating to primary indications in such a manner that the
> peripheral device can meet the requirements.
>
> 5.4 Performance and span stability tests
>
> 5.4.1 Test considerations
>
> All electronic instruments of the same category, whether or not
> equipped with checking facilities, shall be subjected to the same
> performance test programme.
>
> 5.4.2 State of instrument under test
>
> Performance tests shall be carried out on fully operational equipment
> in its normal operational state or in a status as similar as possible
> thereto. When connected in other than a normal configuration, the
> procedure shall be mutually agreed by the approval authority and the
> applicant and shall be described in the test document.
>
> If an electronic instrument is equipped with an interface permitting
> the coupling of the instrument to external equipment, the instrument
> shall, during the tests B.3.2, B.3.3 and B.3.4, be coupled to external
> equipment, as specified by the test procedure.
>
> 5.4.3 Performance tests
>
> Performance tests shall be performed according to B.2 and B.3.

Table 10

+------------------------------------+---------------------------------+
| Test                               | Characteristic under test       |
+------------------------------------+---------------------------------+
| Static temperatures                | Influence factor                |
|                                    |                                 |
| Damp heat, steady state            | Influence factor                |
|                                    |                                 |
| Voltage variations                 | Influence factor                |
|                                    |                                 |
| AC mains voltage dips and short    | Disturbance                     |
| interruptions                      |                                 |
|                                    | Disturbance                     |
| Bursts (transients)                |                                 |
|                                    | Disturbance                     |
| Electrostatic discharge            |                                 |
|                                    | Disturbance                     |
| Surge (if applicable)              |                                 |
|                                    | Disturbance                     |
| Immunity to radiated               |                                 |
| electromagnetic fields             | Disturbance                     |
|                                    |                                 |
| Immunity to conducted              | Disturbance                     |
| radio-frequency fields Special EMC |                                 |
| requirements for instruments       |                                 |
| powered from road vehicle power    |                                 |
| supply                             |                                 |
+------------------------------------+---------------------------------+

> 5.4.4 Span stability test
>
> Span stability test shall be performed according to B.4.
>
> 5.5 Additional requirements for software-controlled electronic devices
>
> [Preliminary note]{.underline}:
>
> These requirements apply with the proviso that general requirements
> for software-controlled devices and measuring instruments will be
> developed by OIML TC5/SC2.
>
> 5.5.1 Devices with embedded software
>
> For instruments and modules with embedded software, the manufacturer
> shall describe or declare that the software of the instrument or
> module is embedded, i.e. it is used in a fixed hardware and software
> environment and cannot be modified or uploaded via any interface or by
> other means after securing and/or verification*.* In addition to the
> documentation required in 8.2.1.2 the manufacturer shall submit the
> following documentation:
>
> \- Description of the legally relevant functions
>
> \- Software identification that is clearly assigned to the legally
> relevant functions
>
> \- Securing measures foreseen to provide for evidence of an
> intervention
>
> The software identification shall be provided by the instrument and
> listed in the OIML Certificate.
>
> Acceptable solution:
>
> The software identification is provided by either:
>
> \- in the normal operation mode a clearly identified operation of a
> physical or soft key, button, or switch,
>
> or
>
> \- in the normal operation mode a continuously displayed version
> number or checksum, etc.,
>
> accompanied in both cases by clear instructions how to check the
> actual software identification against the reference number (as listed
> in the OIML certificate) marked on or displayed by the instrument.
>
> 5.5.2 Personal computers, instruments with PC components, and other
> instruments, devices, modules, and elements with programmable or
> loadable legally relevant software
>
> Personal computers and other instruments / devices with programmable
> or loadable software may be used as indicators, terminals, data
> storage devices, peripheral devices, etc if the following additional
> requirements are met.
>
> Note: Although these devices may be complete weighing instruments with
> loadable software or PC-based modules and components, etc. they will
> in the following simply be called \"PC\". A "PC" is always assumed if
> the conditions for embedded software according to 5.5.1 are not
> fulfilled.
>
> 5.5.2.1 Hardware requirements
>
> PCs as modules incorporating the metrologically relevant analogue
> component(s) shall be treated according to Annex C (Indicator), see
> Table 11, categories 1 and 2.
>
> PCs acting as a purely digital module without incorporating
> metrologically relevant analogue components (e.g. used as terminals or
> price-computing point-of-sale devices) shall be treated according to
> Table 11, categories 3 and 4.
>
> PCs used as purely digital peripheral devices shall be treated
> according to Table 11, category 5.
>
> Table 11 also specifies how detailed the documentation to be submitted
> for both analogue and digital components of the PC shall be depending
> on the respective category (description of power supply, type of
> interfaces, mother board, housing, etc.).

Table 11: Tests and required documentation for PCs used as modules or
peripheral devices

+-----+-------------+---------------+-----------------+--------------+
| **C |             | **Necessary   | **              | **Remarks**  |
| ate |             | tests**       | Documentation** |              |
| gor |             |               |                 |              |
| y** |             |               |                 |              |
+-----+-------------+---------------+-----------------+--------------+
| *   | **De        |               | **Hardware      |              |
| *No | scription** |               | components**    |              |
| .** |             |               |                 |              |
+-----+-------------+---------------+-----------------+--------------+
| **  | PC as a     | ADC and PC    | ADC: detailed   | Influences   |
| 1** | module,\    | tested as     | as for          | on the ADC   |
|     | primary     | unit:\        | instruments and | from the PC  |
|     | indications | tests as for  | modules         | possible     |
|     | on the      | indicators    | (circuit        | (            |
|     | monitor,\   | according to  | diagrams,       | temperature, |
|     | PC          | Annex C;\     | layouts,        | ele          |
|     | i           | the pattern   | descriptions    | ctromagnetic |
|     | ncorporates | shall be      | etc.)           | interference |
|     | the         | equipped with |                 | (EMC))       |
|     | met         | the maximum   | PC: detailed as |              |
|     | rologically | possible      | for instruments |              |
|     | relevant    | configuration | and modules     |              |
|     | analogue    | (maximum      | (manufacturer,  |              |
|     | components  | power         | type of the PC, |              |
|     | (ADC) on a  | consumption)  | type of         |              |
|     | slot        |               | housing, types  |              |
|     | mounted     |               | of all modules, |              |
|     | circuit     |               | electronic      |              |
|     | print board |               | devices and     |              |
|     | that is not |               | components      |              |
|     | shielded    |               | including power |              |
|     | (\"open     |               | supply, data    |              |
|     | device\"),\ |               | sheets,         |              |
|     | power       |               | manuals, etc.)  |              |
|     | supply for  |               |                 |              |
|     | the ADC     |               |                 |              |
|     | from the PC |               |                 |              |
|     | or PC-bus   |               |                 |              |
|     | system      |               |                 |              |
+-----+-------------+---------------+-----------------+--------------+
| **  | PC as a     | ADC and PC as | ADC: detailed   | Influences   |
| 2** | module,\    | unit:\        | as for          | on the ADC   |
|     | primary     | tests as for  | instruments and | from the     |
|     | indications | indicators    | modules         | power supply |
|     | on the      | according to  | (circuit        | of the PC    |
|     | monitor,\   | Annex C;\     | diagrams,       | possible     |
|     | PC          | the pattern   | layouts,        | (            |
|     | i           | shall be      | descriptions    | temperature, |
|     | ncorporates | equipped with | etc.)           | EMC)         |
|     | the ADC,    | the maximum   |                 |              |
|     | but the     | possible      | PC: [Power      | Other        |
|     | built-in    | configuration | suppl           | influences   |
|     | ADC has a   | (maximum      | y]{.underline}: | from the PC  |
|     | shielded    | power         | detailed as for | not critical |
|     | housing     | consumption)  | instruments and |              |
|     | (\"closed   |               | modules         | New EMC      |
|     | device\"),\ |               | (manufacturer,  | tests (PC)   |
|     | power       |               | type, data      | necessary if |
|     | supply for  |               | sheet)          | the power    |
|     | the ADC     |               |                 | supply is    |
|     | from the    |               | [Other          | changed      |
|     | PC, but not |               | part            |              |
|     | via the     |               | s]{.underline}: |              |
|     | PC-bus      |               | Only [general   |              |
|     | system      |               | description or  |              |
|     |             |               | informati       |              |
|     |             |               | on]{.underline} |              |
|     |             |               | necessary       |              |
|     |             |               | concerning the  |              |
|     |             |               | form of         |              |
|     |             |               | housing,        |              |
|     |             |               | mother-\        |              |
|     |             |               | board,          |              |
|     |             |               | processor type, |              |
|     |             |               | RAM, floppy and |              |
|     |             |               | hard disk       |              |
|     |             |               | drives,         |              |
|     |             |               | controller      |              |
|     |             |               | boards, video   |              |
|     |             |               | controller,     |              |
|     |             |               | interfaces,     |              |
|     |             |               | monitor,        |              |
|     |             |               | keyboard, etc.  |              |
+-----+-------------+---------------+-----------------+--------------+
| **  | PC as       | ADC: tests as | ADC: as for     | Influence    |
| 3** | purely      | for           | category 2      | (only EMC)   |
|     | digital     | indicators    |                 | on the ADC   |
|     | module,\    | according to  | PC: Power       | from the     |
|     | primary     | Annex C using | supply as for   | power supply |
|     | indications | the monitor   | category 2,\    | of the PC    |
|     | on the      | of the PC for | other parts as  | possible     |
|     | monitor,\   | the primary   | for category 4  |              |
|     | ADC outside | indications   |                 | Other        |
|     | the PC in a |               |                 | influences   |
|     | separate    | PC: according |                 | from the PC  |
|     | housing,\   | to 3.10.2     |                 | not possible |
|     | power       |               |                 | or not       |
|     | supply for  |               |                 | critical     |
|     | the ADC     |               |                 |              |
|     | from the PC |               |                 | New EMC      |
|     |             |               |                 | tests (PC)   |
|     |             |               |                 | necessary if |
|     |             |               |                 | the power    |
|     |             |               |                 | supply is    |
|     |             |               |                 | changed      |
+-----+-------------+---------------+-----------------+--------------+
| **  | PC as       | ADC: as for   | ADC: as for     | Influences   |
| 4** | purely      | category 3    | category 2      | (            |
|     | digital     |               |                 | temperature, |
|     | module,\    | PC: as for    | PC: Only        | EMC) on the  |
|     | primary     | category 3    | [general        | ADC from the |
|     | indication  |               | description or  | PC not       |
|     | on the      |               | informati       | possible     |
|     | monitor,    |               | on]{.underline} |              |
|     | ADC outside |               | necessary, e.g. |              |
|     | the PC in a |               | concerning type |              |
|     | separate    |               | of motherboard, |              |
|     | housing     |               | processor type, |              |
|     | having its  |               | RAM, floppy and |              |
|     | own power   |               | hard disk       |              |
|     | supply      |               | drives,         |              |
|     |             |               | controller      |              |
|     |             |               | boards, video   |              |
|     |             |               | controller,     |              |
|     |             |               | interfaces,     |              |
|     |             |               | monitor,        |              |
|     |             |               | keyboard        |              |
+-----+-------------+---------------+-----------------+--------------+
| **  | PC as       | PC: according | PC: as for      |              |
| 5** | purely      | to 3.10.3     | category 4      |              |
|     | digital     |               |                 |              |
|     | peripheral  |               |                 |              |
|     | device      |               |                 |              |
+-----+-------------+---------------+-----------------+--------------+

> Meaning of the abbreviations used: PC Personal Computer, ADC Relevant
> analogue component(s), including Analogue/Digital-Converter (see
> Figure 1), EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility
>
> 5.5.2.2 Software requirements
>
> The legally relevant software of a PC, i.e. the software that is
> critical for measurement characteristics, measurement data and
> metrologically important parameters stored or transmitted, is
> considered as an essential part of a weighing instrument and shall be
> examined according to Annex G.2. The legally relevant software shall
> meet the following requirements.
>
> a\. The legally relevant software shall be adequately protected
> against accidental or intentional changes. Evidence of an intervention
> such as changing, uploading or circumventing the legally relevant
> software shall be available until the next verification or comparable
> official inspection.
>
> This requirement implies that:
>
> The protection against intentional changes with special software tools
> is not the object of these requirements, because this is considered as
> criminal action. It can normally be assumed that it is not possible to
> influence legally relevant parameters and data -- especially processed
> variable values -- as long as they are processed by a program which
> fulfils these requirements. However, if legally relevant parameters
> and data -- especially final variable values -- will be transmitted
> out of the protected software part for applications or functions
> subject to legal control, they shall be secured to meet the
> requirements of 5.3.6.3. The legally relevant software with all data,
> parameters, variable values, etc. will be regarded as sufficiently
> protected, if they cannot be changed with common software tools. At
> the moment, for example, all kinds of text editors are regarded as
> common software tools.
>
> Acceptable solution:
>
> After program start automatic calculation of a checksum over the
> machine code of the complete legally relevant software (at least a
> CRC-16 checksum - depending on the length of the machine code - with
> hidden polynomial) and comparison of the result with a stored fixed
> value. No start if the machine code is falsified.
>
> b\. When there is associated software which provides other functions
> besides the measuring function(s), the legally relevant software shall
> be identifiable and shall not be inadmissibly influenced by the
> associated software.
>
> This requirement implies that:
>
> Associated software is separated from the legally relevant software in
> a sense, that they communicate via a software interface. A software
> interface is regarded as being protective if:
>
> \- in accordance with 5.3.6.1 only a defined and allowed set of
> parameters, functions and data can be exchanged via this interface,
> and
>
> \- If both parts cannot exchange information via any other link.
>
> Software interfaces are part of the legally relevant software.
> Circumventing the protective interface by the user is considered as a
> criminal action.
>
> Acceptable solution:
>
> Definition of all functions, commands, data, etc. which are exchanged
> via the protective interface from the legally relevant software to all
> other connected software or hardware parts. Checking whether all
> functions, commands and data are allowed.
>
> c\. Legally relevant software shall be identified as such and shall be
> secured. Its identification shall be easily provided by the device for
> metrological controls or inspections.
>
> This requirement implies that:
>
> The operating system or similar auxiliary standard software, such as
> video drivers, printer drivers or hard disk drivers, need not be
> included in the software identification.
>
> Acceptable solution:
>
> Calculation of a checksum over the machine code of the legally
> relevant software at runtime and indication on manual command. This
> checksum represents the legally relevant software and can be compared
> to the checksum defined at type approval.
>
> d\. In addition to the documentation outlined in 8.2.1.2 the special
> software documentation shall include:

-   A description of the system hardware, e.g. block diagram, type of
    computer(s), type of network, if not described in the operating
    manual (see also Table 11)

-   A description of the software environment for the legally relevant
    software, e.g. the operating system, required drivers, etc.

-   A description of all legally relevant software functions, legally
    relevant parameters, switches and keys that determine the
    functionality of the instrument, including a declaration of the
    completeness of this description

-   A description of the relevant measuring algorithms (e.g. stable
    equilibrium, price calculation, rounding algorithms)

-   A description of the relevant menus and dialogues

-   The securing measures foreseen (e.g. checksum, signature, audit
    trail)

-   The complete set of commands and parameters - including a short
    description of each command and parameter - that can be exchanged
    between the legally relevant software and the associated software
    via the protective software interface, including a declaration of
    the completeness of the list

-   The software identification foreseen for the legally relevant
    software

-   If downloading of software via modem or internet is foreseen: a
    detailed description of the loading procedure and the securing
    measures against accidental or intentional changes.

-   If downloading of software via modem or internet is not foreseen: a
    description of the measures taken to prevent inadmissible uploading
    of legally relevant software

-   In case of long-term storage or transmission of data via networks: a
    description of the data sets and protection measures (see 5.5.3)

> 5.5.3 Data storage devices (DSD)
>
> If there is a device, whether incorporated in the instrument or being
> part of the instrument as software solution or connected to it
> externally, that is intended to be used for long-term storage of
> weighing data (in the sense of T.2.8.5), the following additional
> requirements apply.
>
> 5.5.3.1. The DSD must have a storage capacity which is sufficient for
> the intended purpose
>
> Note:
>
> The regulation concerning the minimum duration for keeping information
> is outside the requirements concerning instruments and probably left
> to national rules concerning trade. It is the responsibility of the
> owner of the instrument to have an instrument that has sufficient
> capacity of storage to fulfil the requirements applicable to his
> activity. At type examination it will only be checked that the data
> are stored and given back correctly, and that there are adequate means
> foreseen to prevent the loss of data if the storage capacity is
> exhausted before the duration foreseen.
>
> 5.5.3.2. The legally relevant data stored must include all relevant
> information necessary to reconstruct an earlier weighing
>
> Note:
>
> Legally relevant data are (see also T.2.8.1): gross or net values and
> tare values (if applicable, together with a distinction of tare and
> preset tare), the decimal sign(s), the unit(s) (may be encoded), the
> identification of the data stored, the identification number of the
> instrument or load receptor if several instruments or load receptors
> are connected to the data storage device, and a checksum or other
> signature of the data stored.
>
> 5.5.3.3. The legally relevant data stored shall be adequately
> protected against accidental or intentional changes.
>
> Examples of acceptable solutions:
>
> a\. A simple parity check is considered sufficient in order to protect
> the data against accidental changes during transmission.
>
> b\. The data storage device may be realised as an external
> software-controlled device using, for instance, the hard disk of a PC
> as the storage medium. In this case the respective software shall meet
> the software requirements in 5.5.2.2. If the stored data are either
> encrypted or secured by a signature (at least 2 bytes, eg a CRC-16
> checksum with hidden polynomial) this will be considered sufficient in
> order to protect the data against intentional changes.
>
> 5.5.3.4. The legally relevant data stored shall be capable of being
> identified and displayed, where the identification number(s) shall be
> stored for later use and recorded on the official transaction medium.
> In case of a printout the identification number(s) shall be printed.
>
> Example of an acceptable solution:
>
> The identification may be realised as consecutive numbers or as the
> respective date and time (mm:dd:hh:mm:ss) of the transaction.
>
> 5.5.3.5. The legally relevant data shall be stored automatically.
>
> Note:
>
> This requirement means that the storing function must not depend on
> the decision of the operating person. It is accepted, however, if
> intermediate weighings that are not used for the transaction are not
> stored.
>
> 5.5.3.6. Stored legally relevant data sets which are to be verified by
> means of the identification must be displayed or printed on a device
> subject to legal control.
>
> 5.5.3.7 DSDs are identified as a feature, option, or parameter on OIML
> Certificates if they are incorporated in the instrument or form part
> of the instrument as software solution.

**6 Technical requirements for a non-self-indicating instrument**

> A non-self-indicating instrument shall comply with chapters 3 and 4,
> as far as applicable. This chapter gives complementary provisions
> corresponding to some of the requirements of chapter 4.
>
> While the provisions of 6.1 are mandatory those of 6.2 contain
> \"acceptable solutions\" as introduced in chapter 4.
>
> Provisions for certain simple instruments that may be submitted
> directly for initial verification are given in 6.3 through 6.9. These
> simple instruments are:
>
> \- simple equal arm and 1/10 ratio beams,
>
> \- simple steelyards with sliding poises,
>
> \- Roberval and Béranger instruments,
>
> \- instruments with ratio platforms,
>
> \- instruments of the steelyard type with accessible sliding poises.
>
> 6.1 Minimum sensitivity
>
> An extra load equivalent to the absolute value of the maximum
> permissible error for the applied load, but not less than 1 mg, shall
> be placed on the instrument at equilibrium and shall cause a permanent
> displacement of the indicating element of at least:
>
> 1 mm for an instrument of class ![](media/image2.jpeg){width="0.35in"
> height="0.2in"} or
> ,![](media/image5.jpeg){width="0.3798611111111111in"
> height="0.2298611111111111in"}
>
> 2 mm for an instrument of class ![](media/image6.jpeg){width="0.3in"
> height="0.2298611111111111in"} or
> ![](media/image7.jpeg){width="0.35in" height="0.2298611111111111in"}
> with Max ≤ 30 kg,
>
> 5 mm for an instrument of class ![](media/image6.jpeg){width="0.3in"
> height="0.2298611111111111in"} or
> ![](media/image7.jpeg){width="0.35in" height="0.2298611111111111in"}
> with Max \> 30 kg.
>
> The sensitivity tests shall be carried out by placing extra loads with
> a slight impact, in order to eliminate the effects of discrimination
> threshold.
>
> 6.2 Acceptable solutions for indicating devices
>
> 6.2.1 General provisions
>
> 6.2.1.1 Equilibrium indicating component
>
> Indicating component of relative displacement in relation to another
> indicating component: the two indices should be of the same thickness
> and the distance between them shall not exceed this thickness.
>
> However, this distance may be equal to 1 mm, if the thickness of the
> indices is less than this value.
>
> 6.2.1.2 Securing
>
> It should be possible to secure the sliding poises, the removable
> masses and the adjusting cavities or the housings of such devices.
>
> 6.2.1.3 Printing
>
> If the device permits printing, this should be possible only if
> sliding bars or poises or a weight switching mechanism are each in a
> position corresponding to a whole number of scale divisions. Except
> for accessible sliding poises or bars, printing should be possible
> only if the equilibrium indicating component is in the reference
> position to within the nearest half scale interval.
>
> 6.2.2 Sliding poise device
>
> 6.2.2.1 Form of scale marks
>
> On bars on which the scale interval is the verification scale interval
> of the instrument, the scale marks should consist of lines of constant
> thickness. On other major (or minor) bars the scale marks should
> consist of notches.
>
> 6.2.2.2 Scale spacing
>
> The distance between scale marks should not be less than 2 mm and be
> of sufficient length so that the normal machining tolerances for
> notches or scale marks do not cause an error in the weighing result
> exceeding 0.2 of the verification scale interval.
>
> 6.2.2.3 Stops
>
> The displacement of sliding poises and minor bars should be limited to
> the graduated part of major and minor bars.
>
> 6.2.2.4 Displaying component
>
> Each sliding poise should be provided with an displaying component.
>
> 6.2.2.5 Accessible sliding poise device
>
> There should be no moving parts in sliding poises, except sliding
> minor bars.
>
> There should be no cavity on sliding poises that could accidentally
> hold foreign bodies.
>
> It should be possible to secure parts that are detachable.
>
> The displacement of sliding poises and minor bars should require a
> certain effort.
>
> 6.2.3 Indication by use of metrologically controlled weights
>
> The reduction ratios should be in the form 10^k^, k being an integer
> or zero.
>
> On an instrument intended for direct sales to the public, the height
> of the raised edge of the weights receptor platform should not exceed
> one tenth of the greatest dimension of the platform, without being
> more than 25 mm.
>
> 6.3 Conditions of construction
>
> 6.3.1 Equilibrium indicating component
>
> An instrument shall be provided with two moving indices or one moving
> indicating component and a fixed datum mark, the respective position
> of which indicates the reference position of equilibrium.
>
> On an instrument of class ![](media/image6.jpeg){width="0.3in"
> height="0.2298611111111111in"} or
> ![](media/image7.jpeg){width="0.35in" height="0.2298611111111111in"}
> designed to be used for direct sales to the public, the indices and
> scale marks shall allow equilibrium to be seen from the opposite sides
> of the instrument.
>
> 6.3.2 Knives, bearings and friction plates
>
> 6.3.2.1 Types of connection
>
> Levers shall be fitted with knives only; these shall be pivoted on
> bearings.
>
> The line of contact between knives and bearings shall be a straight
> line.
>
> Counter-beams shall be pivoted on knife-edges.
>
> 6.3.2.2 Knives
>
> The knives shall be fitted to the levers in such a way that the
> invariability of the ratios of the lever arms is assured. They shall
> not be welded or soldered.
>
> The edges of the knives of one and the same lever shall be practically
> parallel and shall be situated in one plane.
>
> 6.3.2.3 Bearings
>
> The bearings shall not be welded or soldered to their supports or in
> their mountings.
>
> It shall be possible for bearings of an instrument with ratio
> platforms and steelyards to oscillate in all directions on their
> supports or in their mountings. On such instruments anti-disconnection
> devices shall prevent the disconnection of articulated parts.
>
> 6.3.2.4 Friction plates
>
> The longitudinal play of the knives shall be limited by friction
> plates. There shall be point contact between knife and friction plates
> and it shall be situated on the extension of the line(s) of contact
> between knife and bearing(s).
>
> The friction plate shall form a plane through the point of contact
> with the knife and its plane shall be perpendicular to the line of
> contact between knife and bearing. It shall not be welded or soldered
> to the bearings or their support.
>
> 6.3.3 Hardness
>
> Contact parts of knives, bearings, friction plates, sliding poise
> devices interlevers, interlever supports and links shall have a
> hardness of at least 58 Rockwell C.
>
> 6.3.4 Protective coating
>
> A protective coating may be applied to the parts in contact of jointed
> components, provided that this does not lead to changes of
> metrological properties.
>
> 6.3.5 Tare devices
>
> No instrument shall be fitted with a tare device.
>
> 6.4 Simple equal arm beam
>
> 6.4.1 Symmetry of the beams
>
> The beam shall have two planes of symmetry longitudinal and
> transversal. It shall be in equilibrium with or without the pans.
> Detachable parts which may be used equally well on either end of the
> beam shall be interchangeable and of equal mass.
>
> 6.4.2 Zero setting
>
> If an instrument of class ![](media/image6.jpeg){width="0.3in"
> height="0.2298611111111111in"} or
> ![](media/image7.jpeg){width="0.35in" height="0.2298611111111111in"}
> is provided with a zero-setting device, this shall be a cavity below
> one of the pans.
>
> This cavity may be secured.
>
> 6.5 Simple 1/10 ratio beam
>
> 6.5.1 Indication of the ratio
>
> The ratio shall be indicated legibly and permanently on the beam in
> the form 1:10 or 1/10.
>
> 6.5.2 Symmetry of the beam
>
> The beam shall have a longitudinal plane of symmetry.
>
> 6.5.3 Zero setting
>
> The provisions of 6.4.2 apply.
>
> 6.6 Simple sliding poise instrument (steelyard)
>
> 6.6.1 General
>
> 6.6.1.1 Scale marks
>
> The scale marks shall be lines or notches, either on the edge, or on
> the flat of the graduated shank.
>
> The minimum scale spacing is 2 mm between notches and 4 mm between
> lines.

6.6.1.2 Pivots

> The load per unit length on the knives shall be not more than 10
> kg/mm.
>
> The bores of bearings in the form of an annulus shall have a diameter
> at least equal to 1.5 times the largest dimension of the cross section
> of the knife.
>
> 6.6.1.3 Equilibrium indicating component
>
> The length of the equilibrium indicating component, taken from the
> edge of the fulcrum knife-edge of the instrument, shall be not less
> than 1/15 of the length of the graduated part of the major sliding
> poise bar.
>
> 6.6.1.4 Distinctive mark
>
> The head and the sliding poise of an instrument with detachable
> sliding poises shall bear the same distinctive mark.
>
> 6.6.2 Instrument with single capacity
>
> 6.6.2.1 Minimum distance between knife-edges
>
> The minimum distance between knife-edges is:
>
> 25 mm for maximum capacities less than or equal to 30 kg,
>
> 20 mm for maximum capacities exceeding 30 kg.
>
> 6.6.2.2 Graduation
>
> The graduation shall extend from zero to the maximum capacity.
>
> 6.6.2.3 Zero-setting
>
> If an instrument of class ![](media/image6.jpeg){width="0.3in"
> height="0.2298611111111111in"} or
> ![](media/image7.jpeg){width="0.35in" height="0.2298611111111111in"}
> is provided with a zero-setting device, this shall be a captive screw
> or nut arrangement with a maximum effect of 4 verification scale
> intervals per revolution.
>
> 6.6.3 Instrument with dual capacity
>
> 6.6.3.1 Minimum distance between knife-edges
>
> The minimum distance between the knife-edges is:
>
> 45 mm for the lower capacity,
>
> 20 mm for the higher capacity
>
> 6.6.3.2 Differentiation of suspension mechanisms
>
> The suspension mechanism of an instrument shall be differentiated from
> the load suspension mechanism.
>
> 6.6.3.3 Numbered scales
>
> The scales corresponding to each of the capacities of the instrument
> shall permit weighing from zero to maximum capacity, without a break
> in continuity:
>
> \- either without the two scales having a common part,
>
> \- or with a common part of not more than 1/5 of the highest value of
> the lower scale.
>
> 6.6.3.4 Scale intervals
>
> The scale intervals of each of the scales shall have a constant value.
>
> 6.6.3.5 Zero-setting devices
>
> Zero-setting devices are not permitted.
>
> 6.7 Roberval and Béranger instruments
>
> 6.7.1 Symmetry
>
> Detachable symmetrical parts occurring in pairs shall be
> interchangeable and of equal mass.
>
> 6.7.2 Zero-setting
>
> If an instrument is provided with a zero-setting device, this shall be
> a cavity below the support of one of the pans. This cavity may be
> secured.
>
> 6.7.3 Length of the knife-edges
>
> On an instrument having a simple beam:
>
> \- the distance between the outward ends of the load knife-edges shall
> be at least equal to the diameter of the bottom of the pan,
>
> \- the distance between the outward ends of the centre knife-edge
> shall be at least equal to 0.7 times the length of the load
> knife-edges.
>
> A double beam instrument shall have a stability of the mechanism equal
> to that obtained with a simple beam instrument.

Figure 7

![](media/image12.jpeg){width="5.829861111111111in" height="1.45in"}

> 6.8 Instruments with ratio platforms
>
> 6.8.1 Maximum capacity
>
> The maximum capacity of the instrument shall be greater than 30 kg.
>
> 6.8.2 Indication of the ratio
>
> The ratio between the weighed load and the equilibrium load shall be
> indicated legibly and permanently on the beam in the form 1:10 or
> 1/10.

6.8.3 Zero-setting

> An instrument shall have a zero-setting device consisting:
>
> \- either of a cup with greatly convex cover,
>
> \- or of a captive screw or nut arrangement, with a maximum effect of
> 4 verification scale intervals per revolution.
>
> 6.8.4 Complementary balancing device
>
> If an instrument is provided with a complementary device that avoids
> the use of weights which are of low value in relation to the maximum
> capacity, this device shall be a graduated steelyard with a sliding
> poise, the effect being additive and not more than 10 kg.
>
> 6.8.5 Locking of the beam
>
> An instrument shall have a manual device for locking the beam, the
> action of which prevents the equilibrium indices coinciding when at
> rest.
>
> 6.8.6 Provisions relating to wooden parts
>
> If certain parts of an instrument, such as the frame, the platform or
> the board are of wood, this shall be dry and free from defects. It
> shall be covered with a paint or an effective protective varnish.
>
> No nails shall be used for the final assembly of wooden parts.
>
> 6.9 Instrument with a load-measuring device with accessible sliding
> poises (of the steel-yard type)
>
> 6.9.1 General
>
> The provisions of 6.2 relating to load measuring devices with
> accessible sliding poises shall be observed.
>
> 6.9.2 Range of numbered scale
>
> The numbered scale of the instrument shall permit continuous weighing
> from zero to the maximum capacity
>
> 6.9.3 Minimum scale spacing
>
> The scale spacing i~x~ of the different bars (x = 1, 2, 3\...)
> corresponding to the scale interval d~x~ of these bars, shall be:
>
> ![](media/image13.jpeg){width="2.829861111111111in" height="0.55in"}
>
> 6.9.4 Ratio platform
>
> If an instrument is provided with a ratio platform for extending the
> indicating range of the numbered scale, the ratio between the value of
> the weights placed on the platform to balance a load and the load
> itself shall be 1/10 or 1/100.
>
> This ratio shall be indicated legibly and permanently on the beam in a
> position close to the ratio platform, in the form: 1:10, 1:100, or
> 1/10, 1/100.
>
> 6.9.5 Zero-setting
>
> The provisions of 6.8.3 apply.
>
> 6.9.6 Locking of the beam
>
> The provisions of 6.8.5 apply.
>
> 6.9.7 Wooden parts
>
> The provisions of 6.8.6 apply.

**7 Marking of instruments and modules**

> 7.1 Descriptive markings (\*)
>
> (\*) Markings given by way of example but variable according to
> national regulations.
>
> An instrument shall carry the following markings.
>
> 7.1.1 Compulsory in all cases:
>
> \- A) manufacturer's mark, or name written in full
>
> \- B) metrological markings:
>
> \- indication of accuracy class in the form of a Roman number in an
> oval (See footnote to 3.1.1):
>
> for special accuracy ![](media/image2.jpeg){width="0.35in"
> height="0.2in"}
>
> for high accuracy ![](media/image5.jpeg){width="0.3798611111111111in"
> height="0.2298611111111111in"}
>
> for medium accuracy ![](media/image6.jpeg){width="0.3in"
> height="0.2298611111111111in"}
>
> for ordinary accuracy ![](media/image7.jpeg){width="0.35in"
> height="0.2298611111111111in"}
>
> \- maximum capacity in the form Max ...
>
> \- minimum capacity in the form Min ...
>
> \- verification scale interval in the form e =
>
> 7.1.2 Compulsory if applicable:
>
> \- C) name or mark of manufacturer's agent for an imported instrument
>
> \- D) serial number
>
> \- E) identification mark on each unit of an instrument consisting of
> separate but associated units
>
> \- F) type approval mark

-   G\) supplementary metrological characteristics:

> \- software identification (compulsory for software-controlled
> instruments)
>
> \- scale interval, if d \< e, in the form d =
>
> \- maximum additive tare effect in the form T = + ...
>
> \- maximum subtractive tare effect if different from Max in the form T
> = - \...
>
> \- counting ratio on a counting instrument according to 4.17 in the
> form 1:... or 1/...
>
> \- ratio between weight platform and load platform as specified in
> 6.5.1, 6.8.2 and 6.9.4,
>
> \- range of plus/minus indication of a digital comparator instrument,
> in the form ± ... u~m~ or - ... u~m~/+... u~m~, u~m~ standing for the
> unit of mass as per 2.1.

\- H) special limits

> \- maximum safe load in the form Lim = ...
>
> (if the manufacturer has provided for a maximum safe load of more than
> Max + T)
>
> \- the special temperature limits according to 3.9.2.2\
> within which the instrument complies with the prescribed conditions of
> correct operation in the form: \... °C/\... °C
>
> 7.1.3 Additional markings (I)
>
> Additional markings may, if necessary be required on an instrument
> according to its particular use or to certain special characteristics,
> such as e.g.:
>
> \- not to be used for direct sales to the public/commercial
> transactions
>
> \- to be used exclusively for: .................................
>
> \- the stamp does not guarantee/guarantees only ...........
>
> \- to be used only as follows: .................................
>
> These additional markings may be either in the national language or in
> form of adequate, internationally agreed and published pictograms or
> signs.
>
> 7.1.4 Presentation of descriptive markings
>
> The descriptive markings shall be indelible and of a size, shape and
> clarity allowing easy reading.
>
> They shall be grouped in one or two clearly visible places either on a
> plate or sticker fixed permanently to the instrument, or on a non
> removable part of the instrument itself. In case of a plate or sticker
> which is not destroyed when removed, a means of securing shall be
> provided, e.g. a control mark that can be applied.
>
> As an alternative all applicable markings in B and G may be
> simultaneously displayed by a software solution either permanently or
> on manual command. In this case the markings are considered as
> device-specific parameters (see T.2.8.4, 4.1.2.4 and 5.5).
>
> The markings: Max ...

Min ...

e =

and d if d ≠ e

> shall be shown at least in one place and permanently either on the
> display or near to the display in a clearly visible position. All
> additional information as mentioned in B and G may be shown
> alternatively on a plate or simultaneously displayed by a software
> solution either permanently or accessed by a simple manual command. In
> this case the markings are considered as device-specific parameters
> (see T.2.8.4, 4.1.2.4 and 5.5).
>
> It shall be possible to seal the plate bearing the descriptive
> markings unless its removal will result in its destruction. If the
> data plate is sealed, it shall be possible to apply a control mark to
> it.
>
> Acceptable solutions
>
> a\) Marking of Max, Min, e \... and d if d ≠ e
>
> These values are permanently and simultaneously shown on the display
> of the weighing result as long as the instrument is switched on.
>
> They may be automatically scrolled (displayed alternating one after
> each other) in one display. Automatically scrolling (but not on manual
> command) is considered as "permanently".
>
> b\) Marking for multi-interval and multi range instruments
>
> In special cases, some of the markings should be in the form of a
> table; see examples in Figure 8.

Figure 8

+----------------+----+---------+-----------+-----+--------+---------+
| For a          | F  |         |           | For |        |         |
| multi-interval | or |         |           | an  |        |         |
|                | an |         |           | i   |        |         |
| instrument     | in |         |           | nst |        |         |
|                | st |         |           | rum |        |         |
|                | ru |         |           | ent |        |         |
|                | me |         |           | w   |        |         |
|                | nt |         |           | ith |        |         |
|                | wi |         |           |     |        |         |
|                | th |         |           | we  |        |         |
|                |    |         |           | igh |        |         |
|                | mo |         |           | ing |        |         |
|                | re |         |           | ran |        |         |
|                | th |         |           | ges |        |         |
|                | an |         |           | in  |        |         |
|                | o  |         |           |     |        |         |
|                | ne |         |           | dif |        |         |
|                | we |         |           | fer |        |         |
|                | ig |         |           | ent |        |         |
|                | hi |         |           | c   |        |         |
|                | ng |         |           | las |        |         |
|                |    |         |           | ses |        |         |
|                | r  |         |           |     |        |         |
|                | an |         |           |     |        |         |
|                | ge |         |           |     |        |         |
|                | (W |         |           |     |        |         |
|                | ~1 |         |           |     |        |         |
|                | ~, |         |           |     |        |         |
|                | W  |         |           |     |        |         |
|                | ~2 |         |           |     |        |         |
|                | ~) |         |           |     |        |         |
+----------------+----+---------+-----------+-----+--------+---------+
|                |    | W1      | W2        |     | W1     | W2      |
+----------------+----+---------+-----------+-----+--------+---------+
|                |    |         |           |     | ![]    | !       |
|                |    |         |           |     | (media | [](medi |
|                |    |         |           |     | /image | a/image |
|                |    |         |           |     | 5.jpeg | 6.jpeg) |
|                |    |         |           |     | ){widt | {width= |
|                |    |         |           |     | h="0.3 | "0.3in" |
|                |    |         |           |     | 798611 | he      |
|                |    |         |           |     | 111111 | ight="0 |
|                |    |         |           |     | 111in" | .229861 |
|                |    |         |           |     | height | 1111111 |
|                |    |         |           |     | ="0.22 | 111in"} |
|                |    |         |           |     | 986111 |         |
|                |    |         |           |     | 111111 |         |
|                |    |         |           |     | 11in"} |         |
+----------------+----+---------+-----------+-----+--------+---------+
| Max 2/5/15 kg  | M  | 20 kg   | 100 kg    | Max | 1 000  | 5 000 g |
|                | ax |         |           |     | g      |         |
| Min 20 g       | M  | 200 g   | 1 kg      | Min |        | 40 g    |
|                | in |         |           |     | 1 g    |         |
| e = 1/2/5 g    |    | 10 g    | 50 g      | e = |        | 2 g     |
|                | e  |         |           |     | 0.1 g  |         |
|                | =  |         |           | d = |        | 2 g     |
|                |    |         |           |     | 0.02 g |         |
+----------------+----+---------+-----------+-----+--------+---------+

> c\) Fixing
>
> If a plate is used it shall be secured e.g. by rivets or screws with
> one of the rivets of red copper or material having qualities
> recognised as similar or by using non removable control marks.
>
> It should be possible to secure the head of one of the screws by
> appropriate means (e.g. by means of a cap of suitable material
> inserted in a device that cannot be dismantled or other appropriate
> technical solution).
>
> The plate may be glued or consist of a transfer provided its removal
> results in its destruction.
>
> d\) Dimensions of the letters
>
> The height of capital letters should be at least 2 mm.
>
> 7.1.5 Specific cases
>
> 7.1.1 through 7.1.4 apply in their entirety to a simple instrument
> made by one manufacturer.
>
> When a manufacturer builds a complex instrument or when several
> manufacturers are involved in making a simple or complex instrument,
> the following additional provisions shall be applied.
>
> 7.1.5.1 Instrument having several load receptors and load measuring
> devices
>
> Each load measuring device which is connected or can be connected to
> one or more load receptors, shall bear the descriptive markings
> relating to these, with:
>
> \- identification mark,
>
> \- maximum capacity,
>
> \- minimum capacity,
>
> \- verification scale interval,
>
> and, if appropriate, maximum safe load and maximum additive tare
> effect.
>
> 7.1.5.2 Instrument consisting of separately-built main parts
>
> If main parts cannot be exchanged without altering the metrological
> characteristics of the instrument, each unit shall have an
> identification mark which shall be repeated in the descriptive
> markings.
>
> 7.1.5.3 Separately tested modules
>
> For OIML R60 certified load cells the markings according to OIML R60
> apply.
>
> For other modules (indicators and weighing modules) the markings
> according to Annex C or D apply, each module shall, however, bear at
> least the following descriptive markings for identification:
>
> \- type designation
>
> \- serial number
>
> \- manufacturer (mark or name)
>
> Other relevant information and characteristics shall be specified in
> the respective OIML certificate (kind of module, fraction p~i~ of the
> maximum permissible error, number of OIML certificate, accuracy class,
> capacity (Max), verification scale interval (e), etc.) and should be
> written in a document accompanying the respective module..
>
> 7.1.5.4 Peripheral devices
>
> Peripheral devices that are mentioned in an OIML certificate shall
> bear the following descriptive markings:
>
> \- type designation
>
> \- serial number
>
> \- manufacturer
>
> \- other information as far as applicable.
>
> 7.2 Verification marks
>
> An instrument shall have a place for the application of verification
> marks.
>
> This place shall:
>
> \- be such that the part on which it is located cannot be removed from
> the instrument without damaging the marks,
>
> \- allow easy application of the marks without changing the
> metrological qualities of the instrument,
>
> \- normally be visible without the instrument having to be moved when
> it is in service.
>
> Note: If technical reasons restrict or limit the verification mark(s)
> to be fixed only in a "hidden" place (e.g. when an instrument -- in
> combination with another device -- is integrated in other equipment)
> this can be accepted if these marks are easily accessible, and if
> there is a legible notice provided on the instrument in a clearly
> visible place that points to these marks or if its location is defined
> in the operation manual, the OIML certificate and OIML evaluation
> report.
>
> Acceptable solution:
>
> An instrument required to bear verification marks shall have a
> verification mark support, at the place provided for above, which
> ensures the conservation of the marks:
>
> a\) when the mark is made with a stamp, this support may consist of a
> strip of suitable metal or any other material with qualities similar
> to lead (for example plastic, brass etc. depending on national
> legislation), inserted into a plate fixed to the instrument, or a
> cavity bored in the instrument.
>
> b\) when the mark is of the self-adhesive type, a space should be
> provided on the instrument for the application of this mark.
>
> For application of the verification marks a stamping area of at least
> 150 mm^2^ is required.
>
> If self-adhesive stickers are used as verification marks the space for
> these stickers should have a diameter of at least 15 mm. These marks
> should be adequately durable for the intended use of the instrument,
> e.g. by means of a suitable protection.

**8 Metrological controls**

> 8.1 Liability to metrological controls
>
> States may, through legislation, impose controls to assure that
> instruments used in specific applications comply with the requirements
> of this Recommendation.
>
> If controls are imposed for conformity they may consist of type
> approval and initial verification (or equivalent conformity assessment
> procedures) and subsequent -- e.g. periodic - verifications or service
> inspections or other equivalent metrological control procedures.
>
> However, instruments according to 6.4 through 6.9 of this
> Recommendation shall not be subject to type approval, and national
> legislation may provide for initial verification without type approval
> for particular instrument applications.

8.2 Type approval

> 8.2.1 Application for type approval
>
> The application for type approval shall include the submission to the
> approving authority of normally one instrument representative of the
> submitted type. The modular approach as per chapter 3.10.2 and testing
> of a family of instruments or modules as per chapter 3.10.4 may be
> more appropriate and efficient.
>
> The applicant shall provide the following information and documents,
> as far as applicable.
>
> 8.2.1.1 Metrological characteristics:
>
> \- characteristics of the instrument, as per 7.1
>
> \- specifications of the modules or components of the measuring system
> as per chapter 3.10.2 about modular approach

2.  Descriptive documents:

> All numbers in brackets refer to a chapter of this Recommendation.
>
> 1 General description of instrument, description of the function,
> intended purpose of use, kind of instrument (e.g. platform,
> plus-minus-scale, price labeller)
>
> 2 General characteristics (manufacturer; Class, Max, Min, e, n;
> single-/multi-interval, multiple range, temperature range, voltage,
> etc.)
>
> 3 List of descriptions and characteristic data of all devices and
> modules of the instrument
>
> 4 Drawings of general arrangement and details of metrological interest
> including details of any interlocks, safeguards, restrictions, limits,
> etc.,
>
> 4.1 Securing components, adjustment devices, controls etc. (4.1.2),
> protected access to set-up and adjustment operations (4.1.2.4),
>
> 4.2 Place for application of control marks, securing elements,
> descriptive markings, identification, conformity and/or approval marks
> (7.1, 7.2)
>
> 5 Devices of the instrument
>
> 5.1 Auxiliary, or extended indicating device (3.4, 4.4.3, 4.13.7)
>
> 5.2 Multiple use of indicating devices (4.4.4)
>
> 5.3 Printing devices (4.4.5, 4.6.11, 4.7.3, 4.14.4, 4.16)
>
> 5.4 Memory storage device (4.4.6)
>
> 5.5 Zero-setting, zero-tracking devices (4.5, 4.6.9, 4.13.2)
>
> 5.6 Tare devices (4.6, 4.10, 4.13.3) and Preset tare devices (4.7,
> 4.13.4)
>
> 5.7 Levelling device and level indicator, tilt sensor, upper limit of
> tilting (3.9.1)
>
> 5.8 Locking devices (4.8, 4.13.5) and auxiliary verification device
> (4.9)
>
> 5.9 Selection of weighing ranges on multiple range instruments (4.10)
>
> 5.10 Connection of different load receptors (4.11)
>
> 5.11 Interfaces (types, intended use, immunity to external influences
> instructions (5.3.6)
>
> 5.12 Peripheral devices, e.g. printers, secondary displays, for
> including in the type approval certificate and for connection for the
> disturbance tests (5.4.2)
>
> 5.13 Functions of price-computing instruments (e.g. for direct sales
> to the public) (4.14), self-service (4.13.11), price labelling (4.16)
>
> 5.14 Other devices or functions, e.g. for purposes other than
> determination of mass (not subject to conformity assessment)

15. Detailed description of the stable equilibrium function (4.4.2,
    A.4.12) of the instrument.

> 6 Information concerning special cases
>
> 6.1 Subdivision of the instrument in modules - e.g. load cells,
> mechanical system, indicator, display - indicating the functions of
> each module and the fractions p~i~ . For modules that have already
> been approved, reference to test certificates or type approval
> certificates (3.10.2), reference to evaluation under R60 for load
> cells (Annex F)
>
> 6.2 Special operating conditions (3.9.5)
>
> 6.3 Reaction of the instrument to significant faults (5.1.1, 5.2,
> 4.13.9)
>
> 6.4 Functioning of the display after switch-on (5.3.1)
>
> 7 Technical description, drawings and plans of devices,
> sub-assemblies, etc. in particular of:
>
> 7.1 Load receptor, lever systems if not according to (6.3.2 - 6.3.4),
> force transmitting devices
>
> 7.2 Load cells, if not presented as modules
>
> 7.3 Electrical connection elements, e.g. for connecting load cells to
> the indicator, including length of signal lines (necessary for surge
> test, see B.3.3)
>
> 7.4 Indicator: block diagram, schematic diagrams, internal processing
> and data exchange via interface, keyboard with function assigned to
> any key
>
> 7.5 Declarations of the manufacturer, e.g. for interfaces (5.3.6.1),
> for protected access to set-up and adjustment (4.1.2.4), for other
> software based operations.
>
> 7.6 Samples of all intended printouts
>
> 8 Results of tests performed by the manufacturer or from other
> laboratories, on protocols from R 76-2, including proof of competence.
>
> 9 Certificates of other type approvals or separate tests, relating to
> modules or other parts mentioned in the documentation, together with
> test protocols
>
> 10 For software controlled instruments or modules additional documents
> according to 5.5.1 and 5.5.2.2 (Table 11).
>
> 11 Drawing or photo of the instrument showing the principle and the
> location of verification and securing marks are to be applied, which
> is necessary to be included in the OIML certificate or Evaluation
> report.
>
> All documents of the weighing instrument with the exception of the
> drawing or photo (no. 11) shall be kept confidential by the approving
> authority, except to the extent agreed with the manufacturer.
>
> 8.2.2 Type evaluation
>
> The submitted documents shall be examined to verify compliance with
> the requirements of this Recommendation.
>
> Suitable checks shall be performed to establish confidence that the
> functions are performed correctly in accordance with the submitted
> documents. Reactions to significant faults need not be triggered.
>
> The instruments shall - on the basis of 3.10 and with test standards
> according to 3.7.1 - be submitted to the testing procedures of Annex
> A, and of Annex B if applicable. For peripheral devices see 3.10.3.
>
> It may be feasible to perform the tests on premises other than those
> of the authority
>
> The approving authority may, in special cases, require the applicant
> to supply test loads, equipment and personnel to perform the tests.
>
> The approving authorities are advised to consider the possibility of
> accepting, with the consent of the applicant, test data obtained from
> other national authorities, without repeating these tests (\*).
>
> They may, at their discretion and under their responsibility, accept
> test data provided by the applicant for the submitted type, and reduce
> their own tests accordingly.
>
> [(\*) This follows a Resolution adopted by the International Committee
> of Legal Metrology (CIML) in 1986, recognizing the interest which
> knowledge of the results of tests, that may have been carried out by
> other national metrology services, could have for certain national
> metrology services to which a submission for type approval of the same
> instrument was made, and urging the CIML Members to facilitate the
> exchange of such information, which in principle may only be provided
> with the agreement of the manufacturer, its representative or the
> importer of the instrument concerned.]{.mark}\
> **[((To be revised by the BIML according to the developments of the
> OIML Certificate System, MAA, etc.))]{.mark}**
>
> 8.3 Initial verification
>
> Initial verification may be performed by authorised personnel
> according to national regulations.
>
> Initial verification shall not be performed unless conformity of the
> instrument to the approved type and/or the requirements of this
> Recommendation is established. The instrument shall be tested at the
> time of installation and ready for use, unless it can be readily
> shipped and installed after initial verification.
>
> Initial verification may be carried out at the manufacturer\'s
> facility or any other location
>
> a\) if transport to the place of use does not require dismantling of
> the instrument,
>
> b\) if the taking into service at the place of use does not require
> assembly of the instrument or other technical installation work likely
> to affect the instrument\'s performance, and
>
> c\) if the gravity value at the place of putting into service is taken
> into consideration or if the instrument\'s performance is insensitive
> to gravity variations.
>
> In all other cases, the tests shall be carried out at the place of use
> of the instrument.
>
> If the instrument\'s performance is sensitive to gravity variations
> the procedures of verification may be carried out in two stages, where
> the second stage shall comprise all examinations and tests of which
> the outcome is gravity-dependent, and the first stage all other
> examinations and tests. The second stage shall be carried out at the
> place of use of the instrument.
>
> Instead of a place of use a gravity zone or a zone of use may be
> defined provided that the instrument meets the respective national or
> regional requirements as regards gravity.
>
> 8.3.1 Conformity
>
> A declaration of conformity to the approved type and/or this
> Recommendation shall cover:
>
> \- correct functioning of all devices, e.g. zero-setting, tare, and
> calculating devices,
>
> \- construction material and design, as far as they are of
> metrological relevance,
>
> \- A proof of compatibility of modules if the modular approach
> according to 3.10.2 has been chosen,
>
> \- if appropriate a list of the tests performed.
>
> 8.3.2 Visual inspection
>
> Before testing, the instrument shall be visually inspected for:
>
> \- metrological characteristics, i.e. accuracy class, Min, Max, e, d,

-   identification of software if applicable,

-   identification of modules if applicable,

> \- prescribed inscriptions and positions for verification and control
> marks.
>
> If location and conditions of use of the instrument are known, it
> should be considered whether they are appropriate.
>
> 8.3.3 Tests
>
> Tests shall be carried out to verify compliance with the following
> requirements:
>
> \- 3.5.1, 3.5.3.3 and 3.5.3.4: errors of indication (refer to A.4.4 to
> A.4.6, but 5 loading steps are normally sufficient, the test loads
> selected shall include Min only if Min ≥ 100 mg),
>
> \- 4.5.2 and 4.6.3: accuracy of zero-setting and tare devices (refer
> to A.4.2.3 and A.4.6.2)
>
> \- 3.6.1: repeatability (refer to A.4.10, 3^rd^ paragraph)
>
> \- 3.6.2: eccentric loading (refer to A.4.7),
>
> \- 3.8: discrimination (refer to A.4.8); not applicable for
> instruments with digital indication

\- 4.18: tilt in case of mobile instruments (refer to A.5.1.3)

\- 6.1: sensitivity of non-self-indicating instruments (refer to A.4.9)

> Other tests may be performed in special cases, e.g. as indicated in
> the respective OIML certificate, extraordinary construction or
> doubtful results.
>
> The authority responsible may, in special cases, require the applicant
> to supply test loads, equipment and personnel to perform the tests
> (refer to 3.7).
>
> For all tests, the error limits to be respected shall be the maximum
> permissible errors upon initial verification. If the instrument is to
> be shipped to another location after initial verification, the
> difference in local gravity acceleration between the locations of
> testing and use shall be considered appropriately, e.g. by a second
> stage of initial verification after adjustment or by taking into
> consideration the local gravity value of the place of use during
> initial verification.
>
> 8.3.4 Marking and securing
>
> According to national legislation, initial verification may be
> testified by verification marks. These marks may indicate the month or
> year when initial verification took place, or when reverification is
> due. National legislation may also require securing of components
> whose dismantling or maladjustment might alter the metrological
> characteristics of the instrument without the alterations being
> clearly visible. The provisions of 4.1.2.4 and 7.2 shall be observed.
>
> 8.4 Subsequent metrological control
>
> Subsequent metrological control may be performed by authorised
> personnel according to national regulations.
>
> 8.4.1 Subsequent verification
>
> Upon subsequent verification, normally only inspection and tests
> according to 8.3.2 and 8.3.3 shall be performed, the error limits
> being those on initial verification. Stamping and securing may take
> place according to 8.3.4, the date being that of the subsequent
> verification.
>
> 8.4.2 Service inspection
>
> Upon service inspection normally only inspection and tests according
> to 8.3.2 and 8.3.3 shall be performed, the error limits being twice
> those on initial verification. Stamping and securing may remain
> unchanged, or renewed as per 8.4.1.

ANNEX A

(mandatory)

TESTING PROCEDURES FOR

NON-AUTOMATIC WEIGHING INSTRUMENTS

> A.1 Administrative examination (8.2.1)
>
> Review the documentation that is submitted, including necessary
> photographs, drawings, relevant technical specifications of main
> components, etc., to determine if it is adequate and correct. Consider
> the operating manual or equivalent user-documentation.
>
> Note: An "operating manual" may be a draft.
>
> A.2 Compare construction with documentation (8.2.2)
>
> Examine the various devices of the instrument to ensure compliance
> with the documentation. Consider also 3.10.
>
> A.3 Initial examination

A.3.1 Metrological characteristics

> Note metrological characteristics according to the \"Evaluation
> Report\" (see R 76-2).
>
> A.3.2 Descriptive markings (7.1)
>
> Check the descriptive markings according to the check-list given in
> the Evaluation Report.
>
> A.3.3 Stamping and securing (4.1.2.4 and 7.2)
>
> Check the arrangements for stamping and securing according to the
> check-list given in the Evaluation Report.
>
> A.4 Performance tests

A.4.1 General conditions

A.4.1.l Normal test conditions (3.5.3.1)

> Errors shall be determined under normal test conditions. When the
> effect of one factor is being evaluated, all other factors are to be
> held relatively constant, at a value close to normal.
>
> For instruments of class ![](media/image2.jpeg){width="0.35in"
> height="0.2in"} all necessary corrections in respect to influence
> factors due to the test load shall be applied, i.e. influence of air
> buoyancy.

A.4.1.2 Temperature

> The tests shall be performed at a steady ambient temperature, usually
> normal room temperature unless otherwise specified.
>
> The temperature is deemed to be steady when the difference between the
> extreme temperatures noted during the test does not exceed one-fifth
> of the temperature range of the given instrument without being greater
> than 5 °C (2 °C in the case of a creep test), and the rate of change
> does not exceed 5 °C per hour.

A.4.1.3 Power supply

> Instruments using electric power shall normally be connected to the
> power supply and \"on\" throughout the tests.

A.4.1.4 Reference position before tests

> For an instrument liable to be tilted, the instrument shall be
> levelled at its reference position.

A.4.1.5 Automatic zero-setting and zero-tracking

> During the tests, the effect of the automatic zero-setting device or
> the zero-tracking device may be switched off or suppressed by starting
> the test with a load equal to say 10e.
>
> In certain tests where the automatic zero-setting or zero-tracking
> must be in operation (or not), specific mention of this is made in
> those test descriptions.

A.4.1.6 Indication with a scale interval smaller than e

> If an instrument with digital indication has a device for displaying
> the indication with a smaller scale interval (not greater than 1/5 e),
> this device may be used to determine the error. If a device is used it
> should be noted in the Evaluation Report.
>
> A.4.1.7 Using a simulator to test modules (3.10.2 and 3.7.1)
>
> If a simulator is used to test a module, the repeatability and
> stability of the simulator should make it possible to determine the
> performance of the module with at least the same accuracy as when a
> complete instrument is tested with weights, the mpe to be considered
> being those applicable to the module. If a simulator is used, this
> shall be noted in the Evaluation Report and its traceability
> referenced.
>
> A.4.1.8 Adjustment (4.1.2.5)
>
> A semi-automatic span adjustment device shall be initiated only once
> before the first test.
>
> An instrument of class ![](media/image2.jpeg){width="0.35in"
> height="0.2in"} shall, if applicable, be adjusted prior to each test
> following the instructions in the operating manual.
>
> Note: The temperature test A.5.3.1 is considered as one test.
>
> A.4.1.9 Recovery
>
> After each test the instrument should be allowed to recover
> sufficiently before the following test.

A.4.1.10 Preloading

> Before each weighing test the instrument shall be pre-loaded once to
> Max or to Lim if this is defined, except for the tests in A.5.2 and
> A.5.3.2.
>
> Where load cells are tested separately, the pre-loading shall follow
> OIML R 60.

A.4.1.11 Multiple range instrument

> In principle, each range should be tested as a separate instrument.
> For instruments with automatic change over, however, combined tests
> can be possible.
>
> A.4.2 Checking of zero
>
> A.4.2.1 Range of zero-setting (4.5.1)

A.4.2.1.1 Initial zero-setting

> With the load receptor empty, set the instrument to zero. Place a test
> load on the load receptor and switch the instrument off and then back
> on. Continue this process until, after placing a load on the load
> receptor and switching the instrument on and off, it does not re-zero.
> The maximum load that can be re-zeroed is the positive portion of the
> initial zero-setting range.
>
> Remove any load from the load receptor and set the instrument to zero.
> Then remove the load receptor (platform) from the instrument. If, at
> this point, the instrument can be reset to zero by switching it off
> and back on, the mass of the load receptor is used as the negative
> portion of the initial zero-setting range.
>
> If the instrument cannot be reset to zero with the load receptor
> removed, add weights to any hive part of the scale (e.g. on the parts
> where the load receptor rests) until the instrument indicates zero
> again.
>
> Then remove weights and, after each weight is removed, switch the
> instrument off and back on. The maximum load that can be removed while
> the instrument can still be reset to zero by switching it off and on
> is the negative portion of the initial zero-setting range.
>
> The initial zero-setting range is the sum of the positive and negative
> portions. If the load receptor cannot readily be removed, only the
> positive part of the initial zero-setting range need be considered.

A.4.2.1.2 Non-automatic and semi-automatic zero-setting

> This test is performed in the same manner as described in A.4.2.1.1,
> except that the zero-setting means is used rather than switching the
> instrument off and on.

A.4.2.1.3 Automatic zero-setting

> Remove the load receptor as described in A.4.2.1.1 and place weights
> on the in­strument until it indicates zero.
>
> Remove weights in small amounts and after each weight is removed allow
> time for the automatic zero-setting device to function so as to see if
> the instrument is reset to zero automatically. Repeat this procedure
> until the instrument will not reset to zero automatically.
>
> The maximum load that can be removed so that the instrument can still
> be reset to zero, is the zero-setting range.
>
> If the load receptor cannot readily be removed, a practical approach
> can be to add weights to the instrument and use another zero-setting
> device, if provided, to set the instrument to zero. Then remove
> weights and check whether the automatic zero-setting still sets the
> instrument to zero. The maximum load that can be removed so that the
> instrument can still be reset to zero is the zero-setting range.
>
> A.4.2.2 Zero indicating device (4.5.5)
>
> For instruments fitted with a zero indicating device and digital
> indication, adjust the instrument to about one scale interval below
> zero; then by adding weights equivalent to say 1/10 of the scale
> interval, determine the range over which the zero indicating device
> indicates the deviation from zero.
>
> A.4.2.3 Accuracy of zero-setting (4.5.2)
>
> The test may be combined with A.4.4.1

A.4.2.3.1 Non-automatic and semi-automatic zero-setting

> The accuracy of the zero-setting device is tested by first loading the
> instrument to an indication as close as possible to a changeover
> point, and then by initiating the zero-setting device and determining
> the additional load at which the indication changes from zero to one
> scale interval above zero. The error at zero is calculated according
> to the description in A.4.4.3.

A.4.2.3.2 Automatic zero-setting or zero-tracking

> The indication is brought out of the automatic range (e.g. by loading
> with 10 e). Then the additional load at which the indication changes
> from one scale interval to the next above is determined and the error
> is calculated according to the description in A.4.4.3. It is assumed
> that the error at zero load would be equal to the error at the load in
> question.
>
> A.4.3 Setting to zero before loading
>
> For instruments with digital indication, the adjustment to zero, or
> the determination of the zero point is carried out as follows:
>
> a\) for instruments with non-automatic zero-setting, weights
> equivalent to half a scale interval are placed on the load receptor,
> and the instrument is adjusted until the indication alternates between
> zero and one scale interval. Then weights equivalent to half a scale
> interval are removed from the load receptor to attain a centre of zero
> reference position;
>
> b\) for instruments with semi-automatic or automatic zero-setting or
> zero-tracking, the deviation from zero is determined as described in
> A.4.2.3.
>
> A.4.4 Determination of weighing performance
>
> A.4.4.1 Weighing test
>
> Apply test loads from zero up to and including Max, and similarly
> remove the test loads back to zero. When determining the initial
> intrinsic error, at least 10 different test loads shall be selected,
> and for other weighing tests at least 5 shall be selected. The test
> loads selected shall include Max and Min (Min only if Min ≥ 100 mg)
> and values at or near those at which the maximum permissible error
> (mpe) changes.
>
> During type examination it should be noted that when loading or
> unloading weights the load shall be progressively increased or
> progressively decreased. It is recommended to apply the same procedure
> as far as possible during initial verification (8.3) and subsequent
> metrological control (8.4).
>
> If the instrument is provided with an automatic zero-setting or
> zero-tracking device, it may be in operation during the tests, except
> for the temperature test. The error at zero point is then determined
> according to A.4.2.3.2.
>
> A.4.4.2 Supplementary weighing test (4.5.1)
>
> For instruments with an initial zero-setting device with a range
> greater than 20 % of Max, a supplementary weighing test shall be
> performed using the upper limit of the range as zero point.
>
> A.4.4.3 Evaluation of error (A.4.1.6)
>
> For instruments with digital indication and without a device for
> displaying the indication with a smaller scale interval (not greater
> than 1/5 e), the changeover points are to be used to determine the
> indication of the instrument, prior to rounding, as follows.
>
> At a certain load, L, the indicated value, I, is noted. Additional
> weights of say 1/10 e are successively added until the indication of
> the instrument is increased unambiguously by one scale interval (I
> **+** e). The additional load ∆L added to the load receptor gives the
> indication P, prior to rounding by using the following formula:

P = I + 1/2 e - ∆L

> The error prior to rounding is:

E = P - L = I **+** 1/2 e - ∆L - L

> The corrected error prior to rounding is:

E~c~ = E - E~0~ ≤ mpe

> where E~0~ is the error calculated at zero or at a load close to zero
> (e.g. 10 e).
>
> Example: an instrument with a scale interval, e, of 5 g is loaded with
> 1 kg and thereby indicates 1 000 g. After adding successive weights of
> 0.5 g, the indication changes from 1 000 g to 1 005 g at an additional
> load of 1.5 g. Inserted in the above formula these observations give:

P = (1 000 **+** 2.5 - 1.5) g = 1 001 g

> Thus the true indication prior to rounding is 1 001 g, and the error
> is:

E = (1 001 - 1 000) g = **+** 1 g

> If the changeover point at zero as calculated above was E~0~ = **+**
> 0.5 g, the corrected error is:

E~c~ = + 1 - (+0.5) = + 0.5 g

> In the tests A.4.2.3 and A.4.11.1, the error shall be determined with
> a sufficient accuracy in view of the tolerance in question.
>
> Note: The above description and formulae arc valid also for
> multi-interval instruments. Where the load L and the indication I are
> in different partial weighing ranges:
>
> \- the additional weights ∆L are to be in steps of 1/10 of e~i~,
>
> \- in the equation \"E = P - L = \...\" above, the term \"1/2 e\" is
> to be 1/2 e~i~ or 1/2 e~i\ +\ 1~ according to the partial weighing
> range in which the indication (I **+** e) is appearing.
>
> A.4.4.4 Testing of modules
>
> When testing modules separately, it shall be possible to determine the
> errors with a sufficiently small uncertainty considering the chosen
> fractions of the mpe either by using a device for displaying the
> indication with a scale interval smaller than (1/5) p~i~·e or by
> evaluating the change-over point of the indication with an uncertainty
> better than (1/5) p~i~·e.
>
> A.4.4.5 Weighing test using substitution material (3.7.3)
>
> The test shall be carried out only during verification and at the
> place of use taking A.4.4.1 into account.
>
> Determine the allowed number of substitutions according to 3.7.3.
>
> Check the repeatability error at a load of about the value where the
> substitution is made, by placing it 3 times on the load receptor. The
> results of the repeatability test (A.4.10) may be used if the test
> loads have a comparable mass.
>
> Apply test loads from zero up to and including maximum portion of
> standard weights.
>
> Determine the error (A.4.4.3) and then remove the weights so that the
> no-load indication, or, in the case of an instrument with a
> zero-tracking device, the indication of say 10 e, is reached.
>
> Substitute the previous weights with substitution material until the
> same changeover point, as used for the determination of the error, is
> reached. Repeat the above procedure until Max of the instrument is
> reached.
>
> Unload in reverse order to zero, i.e. unload the weights and determine
> the change-over point. Place the weights back and remove the
> substitution material until the same changeover point is reached.
> Repeat this procedure until no-load indication.
>
> Similar equivalent procedures may be applied.
>
> A.4.5 Instrument with more than one indicating device (3.6.3)
>
> If the instrument has more than one indicating device, the indications
> of the various devices shall be compared during the tests described in
> A.4.4.
>
> A.4.6 Tare

A.4.6.1 Weighing test (3.5.3.3)

> Weighing tests (loading and unloading according to A.4.4.1) shall be
> performed with different tare values. At least 5 load steps shall be
> selected. The steps shall include values close to Min (Min only if Min
> ≥ 100 mg), values at or near those at which the maximum permissible
> error (mpe) changes and the value close to the maximum possible net
> load.
>
> The weighing tests should be performed on instruments with
>
> \- subtractive tare: with one tare value between 1/3 and 2/3 of
> maximum tare,
>
> \- additive tare: with two tare values of about 1/3 and 3/3 of maximum
> tare effect.
>
> In case of 8.3 and 8.4 the practical test may be alternatively
> replaced by other appropriate procedures, e.g. by numerical or
> graphical considerations. Simulation of a tare-balancing operation by
> displacement (shifting) of the error limits (mpe) to any points of the
> error curve (= curve of weighing test results). Checking if the error
> curve and hysteresis are inside the mpe at every point.
>
> If the instrument is provided with automatic zero-setting or
> zero-tracking device it may be in operation during the test, in which
> case the error at zero point shall be determined according to
> A.4.2.3.2.
>
> A.4.6.2 Accuracy of tare setting (4.6.3)

The test may be combined with A.4.6.1

> The accuracy of the tare device shall be established in a manner
> similar to the test described in A.4.2.3 with the indication set to
> zero using the tare device.
>
> A.4.6.3 Tare weighing device (3.5.3.4 and 3.6.3)
>
> If the instrument has a tare weighing device, the results obtained for
> the same load (tare), by the tare weighing device and the indicating
> device, shall be compared.
>
> A.4.7 Eccentricity tests (3.6.2)
>
> Large weights should be used in preference to several small weights.
> Smaller weights shall be placed on top of larger weights, but
> unnecessary stacking should be avoided within the segment to be
> tested. The load shall be applied centrally in the segment if a single
> weight is used, but applied uniformly over the segment, if several
> small weights are used. It is sufficient to apply the load only to the
> eccentric segments, not to centre of the load receptor.
>
> Note: If an instrument is designed in such a way that loads may be
> applied in different manners, it may be appropriate to apply more than
> one of the tests described in A.4.7.1 through A.4.7.5.
>
> The location of the load shall be marked on a sketch in the Type
> Evaluation Report.
>
> The error at each measurement is determined according to A.4.4.3. The
> zero error E~0~ used for the correction is the value determined prior
> to each measurement. Normally it is sufficient to determine the zero
> error only at the beginning of the measurement, but on special
> instruments (accuracy class ![](media/image2.jpeg){width="0.35in"
> height="0.2in"} , high capacity, etc.) it is recommended that the zero
> error be determined prior to each eccentricity loading. However in
> case of exceeding mpe the test with zero error prior to each loading
> is necessary.
>
> If the instrument is provided with automatic zero-setting or
> zero-tracking, it shall not be in operation during the following
> tests.
>
> Note: If operating conditions are such that no eccentricity can occur,
> eccentricity tests need not be performed.

A.4.7.1 Instrument with a load receptor having not more than four points
of support

> The four quarter segments roughly equal to 1/4 of the surface of the
> load receptor (as per the sketches in Figure 9 or similar sketches)
> shall be loaded in turn.

Figure 9

![](media/image14.jpeg){width="6.05in" height="1.7798611111111111in"}

> Examples: A load receptor which transmits the force from the load
>
> \- directly into 3 load cells has 3 points of support,
>
> \- with 4 mechanical connection elements into a lever works has 4
> points of support
>
> \- directly into 1 single point load cell has 1 point of support.
>
> A.4.7.2 Instrument with a load receptor having more than four points
> of support
>
> The load shall be applied over each support on an area of the same
> order of magnitude as the fraction 1/n of the surface area of the load
> receptor, where n is the number of points of support.
>
> Where two points of support are too close together for the
> above-mentioned test load to be distributed as indicated above, the
> load shall be doubled and distributed over twice the area on both
> sides of the axis connecting the two points of support.
>
> A.4.7.3 Instrument with special load receptors (tank, hopper, etc.)
>
> The load shall be applied to each point of support.
>
> A.4.7.4 Instrument used for weighing rolling loads (3.6.2.4)
>
> A load shall be applied at different positions on the load receptor.
> These positions shall be at the beginning, the middle and at the end
> of the load receptor in the normal driving direction. The positions
> shall then be repeated in the reverse direction, if the application in
> both directions is possible. Before changing direction zero has to be
> determined again. If the load receptor consists of several sections,
> the test shall be applied to each section.

# A.4.7.5 Eccentricity tests for mobile instruments

> A.4.7 and A.4.7.1 to A.4.7.4 should be applied as far as these points
> are applicable. If not, the positions of the test loads during this
> test have to be defined according to the operational conditions of
> use.
>
> A.4.8 Discrimination test (3.8)
>
> The following tests shall be performed with three different loads,
> e.g. Min, 1/2 Max and Max.

A.4.8.1 Non-self-indication and analogue indication

> An extra load, but not less than 1 mg, shall be placed gently on or
> removed from the load receptor while the instrument is at equilibrium.
> For certain extra load the equilibrium mechanism shall assume a
> different position of equilibrium, as specified.
>
> A.4.8.2 Digital indication
>
> This test applies only to type examination and to instruments with
> d ≥ 5 mg.
>
> A load plus sufficient additional weights (say 10 times 1/10 d) shall
> be placed on the load receptor. The additional weights shall then be
> removed successively until the indication, I, is decreased
> unambiguously by one actual scale interval, I - d. One of the
> additional weights shall be placed back on the load receptor and a
> load equal to 1.4 d shall then be gently placed on the load receptor
> and give a result increased by one actual scale interval above the
> initial indication, I **+** d. See example in Figure 10.

Figure 10

![](media/image15.jpeg){width="5.979166666666667in"
height="2.379166666666667in"}

> The indication at the start is I = 200 g. Remove additional weights
> until the indication changes to I - d = 190 g. Add 1/10 d = 1 g and
> thereafter 1.4 d = 14 g. The indication shall then be I **+** d = 210
> g.
>
> A.4.9 Sensitivity of a non-self-indicating instrument (6.1)
>
> During this test the instrument shall oscillate normally, and an extra
> load equal to the value of the mpe for the applied load, but not less
> than 1 mg, shall be placed on the instrument while the load receptor
> is still oscillating. For damped instruments the extra load shall be
> applied with a slight impact. The linear distance between the middle
> points of this reading and the reading without the extra load shall be
> taken as the permanent displacement of the indication. The test shall
> be performed with a minimum of two different loads (e.g. zero and
> Max).
>
> A.4.10 Repeatability test (3.6.1)
>
> For type approval two series of weighings shall be performed, one with
> a load of about 50 % and one with a load close to 100 % of Max. For
> instruments with Max less than 1 000 kg each series shall consist of
> 10 weighings. In other cases each series shall consist of at least 3
> weighings. Readings shall be taken when the instrument is loaded, and
> when the unloaded instrument has come to rest between weighings. In
> the case of a zero deviation between the weighings, the instrument
> shall be reset to zero, without determining the error at zero. The
> true zero position need not be determined between the weighings.
>
> If the instrument is provided with automatic zero-setting or
> zero-tracking, it shall be in operation during the test.
>
> For verification one series of weighings with about 0.8 Max is
> sufficient. Three weighings on classes
> ![](media/image6.jpeg){width="0.3in" height="0.2298611111111111in"}
> and ![](media/image7.jpeg){width="0.35in"
> height="0.2298611111111111in"}or six weighings on classes
> ![](media/image2.jpeg){width="0.35in" height="0.2in"} and
> ![](media/image5.jpeg){width="0.3798611111111111in"
> height="0.2298611111111111in"}are necessary.
>
> A.4.11 Variation of indication with time (for instruments of class
> ![](media/image5.jpeg){width="0.3798611111111111in"
> height="0.2298611111111111in"}, ![](media/image6.jpeg){width="0.3in"
> height="0.2298611111111111in"} or
> ![](media/image7.jpeg){width="0.35in" height="0.2298611111111111in"}
> only)
>
> A.4.11.1 Creep test (3.9.4.1)
>
> Load the instrument close to Max. Take one reading as soon as the
> indication has stabilized and then note the indication while the load
> remains on the instrument for a period of four hours. During this test
> the temperature should not vary more than 2 °C.
>
> The test may be terminated after 30 minutes if the indication differs
> less than 0.5 e during the first 30 minutes and the difference between
> 15 and 30 minutes is less than 0.2 e.
>
> A.4.11.2 Zero return test (3.9.4.2)
>
> The deviation in the zero indication before and after a period of
> loading with a load close to Max for half an hour, shall be
> determined. The reading shall be taken as soon as the indication has
> stabilized.
>
> For multiple range instruments, continue to read the zero indication
> during the following 5 minutes after the indication has stabilized.
>
> If the instrument is provided with automatic zero-setting or
> zero-tracking, it shall not be in operation.
>
> A.4.12 Test for the stability of equilibrium (4.4.2)
>
> Check the documentation of the manufacturer, whether the following
> stable equilibrium functions are described in detail and sufficiently:

-   The basic principle, the function and the criteria for stable
    equilibrium.

-   All adjustable and not adjustable parameters of the stable
    equilibrium function (time interval, number of measuring cycles,
    etc.).

-   Securing of these parameters.

-   Definition of the most critical adjustment of the stable equilibrium
    (worst case). This shall cover all variants of a type.

> Test of the stable equilibrium with the most critical adjustment
> (worst case) and check that printing (or storing) is not possible when
> stable equilibrium is not yet reached.
>
> Check whether under continuous disturbance of the equilibrium no
> functions can be performed that require stable equilibrium, e.g.
> printing, storing, zero or tare operations.
>
> Load the instrument up to 50 % of Max or up to a load included in the
> range of operation of the relevant function. Manually disturb the
> equilibrium by one single action and initiate the command for
> printing, data storage, or other function, as soon as possible. In the
> case of printing or data storage, read the indicated value over a
> period of 5 seconds following print-out. Stable equilibrium is
> considered to be achieved when no more than two adjacent values are
> indicated, one of which being the printed value. For instruments with
> differentiated scale divisions, this paragraph applies to "e" rather
> than "d".
>
> In the case of zero-setting or tare balancing, check the accuracy as
> per A.4.2.3/A.4.6.2. Perform the test 5 times.
>
> In case of vehicle mounted, vehicle incorporated or mobile
> instruments, tests have to be performed with a known operational test
> load, the instrument being in motion to ensure either that the
> stability criteria inhibit any weighing operation or that the stable
> equilibrium criteria of 4.4.2 are met. In case the instrument can be
> used to weigh liquid products in a vehicle, tests should be performed
> in conditions where the vehicle is stopped just before testing so that
> either the stability criteria inhibit any weighing operation or that
> the stable equilibrium criteria of 4.4.2 are met.
>
> A.4.13 Additional tests for portable weighbridges (4.19)
>
> Note:
>
> Portable instruments have very different constructions for a large
> number of very different applications so that it is principally not
> possible to define uniform test procedures. There could be different
> requirements, conditions and specifications be necessary depending on
> the construction and application and, of course, on the metrological
> demands (e.g. accuracy class). These should be mentioned and described
> in the respective OIML evaluation report. A.4.13 therefore provides
> only some general ideas of properly testing a portable instrument.
>
> To be performed during type approval:
>
> \- At a site agreed with the manufacturer:
>
> \* to examine the evenness of the reference area (all points of
> support of the bridge being at the same level) and then, to perform an
> accuracy test and an eccentricity test
>
> \* to realise several reference areas with some different faults in
> the evenness (values of these faults are to be equal to the limits
> given by the manufacturer) and then, to perform an eccentricity test
> for each configuration
>
> \- On a site of use:
>
> \* to examine the conformity to the requirements for the mounting
> surface
>
> \* to examine the installation and to perform tests to establish
> conformity to the metrological requirements.
>
> A.5 Influence factors
>
> A.5.1 Tilting (only class
> ![](media/image5.jpeg){width="0.3798611111111111in"
> height="0.2298611111111111in"}, ![](media/image6.jpeg){width="0.3in"
> height="0.2298611111111111in"} and
> ![](media/image7.jpeg){width="0.35in" height="0.2298611111111111in"}
> instruments) (3.9.1.1)
>
> The instrument shall be tilted both forwards and backwards
> longitudinally, and from side to side, transversely
>
> In the text that follows, class
> ![](media/image5.jpeg){width="0.3798611111111111in"
> height="0.2298611111111111in"} instruments intended for direct sales
> to the public are designated class
> ![](media/image5.jpeg){width="0.3798611111111111in"
> height="0.2298611111111111in"}\* and class
> ![](media/image5.jpeg){width="0.3798611111111111in"
> height="0.2298611111111111in"} instruments not intended for direct
> sales to the public are designated class
> ![](media/image5.jpeg){width="0.3798611111111111in"
> height="0.2298611111111111in"}.
>
> In practice the tests (no-load and loaded) described in A.5.1.1.1 and
> A. 5.1.1.2 can be combined as follows.
>
> After zero-setting in the reference position, the indication (prior to
> rounding) is determined at no load and at the two test loads. The
> instrument is then unloaded and tilted (without a new zero-setting),
> after which the indications at no load and at the two test loads are
> determined. This procedure is repeated for each of the tilting
> directions.
>
> In order to determine the influence of tilting on the loaded
> instrument, the indication obtained at each tilt shall be corrected
> for the deviation from zero which the instrument had prior to loading.
>
> If the instrument is provided with automatic zero-setting or
> zero-tracking, it shall not be in operation.
>
> A.5.1.1 Tilting of instruments with a level indicator or automatic
> tilt sensor (3.9.1.1, a. and b.)
>
> A.5.1.1.1 Tilting at no-load
>
> The instrument shall be set to zero in its reference position (not
> tilted). The instrument shall then be tilted longitudinally up to the
> limiting value of tilting. The zero indication is noted. The test
> shall be repeated with transverse tilting.
>
> A.5.1.1.2 Tilting when loaded
>
> The instrument shall be set to zero in its reference position and two
> weighings shall be carried out at a load close to the lowest load
> where the maximum permissible error changes, and at a load close to
> Max. The instrument is then unloaded and tilted longitudinally and set
> to zero. The tilting shall be equal to the limiting value of tilting.
> Weighing tests as described above shall be performed. The test shall
> be repeated with transverse tilting.

A.5.1.2 Other instrument (3.9.1.1, c.)

> For instruments liable to be tilted and neither fitted with a level
> indicator nor with an automatic tilt sensor the tests in A.5.1.1 shall
> be performed with a tilting of 50/1000 or, in case of an instrument
> with automatic tilt sensor, with a tilting equal to the limiting value
> of tilting as defined by the manufacturer.

# A.5.1.3 Tilt test for mobile instruments used outside in open locations (3.9.1.1, d and 4.18.1)

> Appropriate load receptors for applying the test loads are to be
> provided by the applicant.
>
> The tilt test shall be performed with the limiting value of tilting.
>
> The instrument shall be tilted both forwards and backwards
> longitudinally, and from side to side, transversely.
>
> Functional tests shall be performed to ensure that, if applicable,
> tilt sensors or inclination switches function properly especially when
> generating the signal that the maximum permissible tilt is reached or
> exceeded (e.g. display switch-off, error signal, lamp), and inhibiting
> transmission and printing of weighing results.
>
> The test shall be performed near the switching-off point (in case of
> an automatic tilt sensor) or near the tilt where the load receptor
> comes into contact with the surrounding frame construction (in case of
> a cardanic suspension), this is the limiting value of tilting.
>
> If the instrument is provided with automatic zero-setting or
> zero-tracking, it shall not be in operation.
>
> The instrument shall be tested according to A.5.1 and A.5.1.1 or
> A.5.1.2.
>
> A.5.2 Warm-up time test (5.3.5)
>
> An instrument using electric power shall be disconnected from the
> supply for a period of at least 8 hours prior to the test. The
> instrument shall then be connected and switched on and as soon as the
>
> indication has stabilized, the instrument shall be set to zero and the
> error at zero shall be determined. Calculation of error shall be made
> according to A.4.4.3. The instrument shall be loaded with a load close
> to Max. These observations shall be repeated after 5, 15 and 30
> minutes. Every individual measurement performed after 5, 15, and 30
> minutes, shall be corrected for the zero error at that time.
>
> For instruments of class ![](media/image2.jpeg){width="0.35in"
> height="0.2in"}, the provisions of the operating manual for the time
> following connection to the mains shall be observed.
>
> A.5.3 Temperature tests
>
> (see Figure 11 as a practical approach to performing the temperature
> tests)
>
> A.5.3.1 Static temperatures (3.9.2.1 and 3.9.2.2)
>
> The test consists of exposure of the equipment under test (EUT) to
> constant (see A.4.1.2) temperatures within the range stated in 3.9.2,
> under free air conditions, for a 2 hour period after the EUT has
> reached temperature stability.
>
> The weighing tests (loading and unloading) shall be carried out
> according to A.4.4.l:
>
> \- at a reference temperature (normally 20 °C but for class
> ![](media/image2.jpeg){width="0.35in" height="0.2in"} instruments the
> mean value of the specified temperature limits),
>
> \- at the specified high temperature,
>
> \- at the specified low temperature,
>
> \- at a temperature of 5 °C, if the specified low temperature is
> ≤ 0 °C, and
>
> \- at the reference temperature.
>
> The change of temperature shall not exceed 1 ^0^C/min during heating
> and cooling down.
>
> For class ![](media/image2.jpeg){width="0.35in" height="0.2in"}
> instruments, changes in barometric pressure shall be taken into
> account.
>
> For weighing tests at the specified high temperature the relative
> humidity shall not exceed 50% (dry heat conditions).
>
> Reference: /4/
>
> A.5.3.2 Temperature effect on the no-load indication (3.9.2.3)
>
> The instrument shall be set to zero and then changed to the prescribed
> highest and lowest temperatures as well as at 5 °C if applicable.
> After stabilisation the error of the zero indication shall be
> determined. The change in zero indication per 1 °C (class
> ![](media/image2.jpeg){width="0.35in" height="0.2in"} instruments) or
> per 5 °C (other instruments) shall be calculated. The changes of these
> errors per 1 °C (class ![](media/image2.jpeg){width="0.35in"
> height="0.2in"} instruments) or per 5 °C (other instruments) shall be
> calculated for any two consecutive temperatures of this test.
>
> This test may be performed together with the temperature test (A
> 5.3.1). The errors at zero shall then be additionally determined
> immediately before changing to the next temperature and after the
> 2 hour period after the instrument has reached stability at this
> temperature.
>
> Note: Preloading is not allowed before these measurements.
>
> If the instrument is provided with automatic zero-setting or
> zero-tracking, it shall not be in operation.
>
> A.5.4 Voltage variations (3.9.3)
>
> Stabilize the EUT under constant environmental conditions.
>
> The test consists of subjecting the EUT to voltage variations
> according to A.5.4.1, A.5.4.2, A.5.4.3 or A.5.4.4.
>
> The test shall be performed with test loads of 10 e and a load between
> 1/2 Max and Max.
>
> If the instrument is provided with an automatic zero-setting device or
> a zero-tracking device, it may be in operation during the test, in
> which case the error at zero point shall be determined according to
> A.4.2.3.2.
>
> In the following U~nom~ designates the nominal value marked on the
> instrument. In case a range is specified U~min~ relates to the lowest
> value and U~max~ to the highest value of the range.
>
> Reference: /4/, /17/
>
> A.5.4.1 Variations of AC mains voltage
>
> Test severity: Voltage variations: lower limit 0.85 · U~nom~ or 0.85 ·
> U~min~

upper limit 1.10 · U~nom~ or 1.10 · U~max~

> Maximum allowable variations: All functions shall operate as designed.
>
> All indications shall be within the maximum permissible errors.
>
> Note: Where an instrument is powered by a three phase supply, the
> voltage variations shall apply for each phase successively.
>
> A.5.4.2 Variations of external or plug-in power supply (AC or DC),
> including rechargeable battery power supply if (re)charge of batteries
> during the operation of the instrument is possible
>
> Test severity: Voltage variations: lower limit: minimum operating
> voltage (see 3.9.3)

upper limit: 1.20 · U~nom~ or 1.20 · U~max~

> Maximum allowable variations: All functions shall operate as designed
> or the indication shall switch off.
>
> All indications shall be within the maximum permissible errors
>
> A.5.4.3 Variations of non-rechargeable battery power supply, including
> rechargeable battery power supply if (re)charge of batteries during
> the operation of the instrument is not possible
>
> Test severity: Voltage variations: lower limit: minimum operating
> voltage (see 3.9.3)

upper limit: U~nom~ or U~max~

> Maximum allowable variations: All functions shall operate as designed
> or the indication shall switch off.
>
> All indications shall be within the maximum permissible errors
>
> A.5.4.4 Voltage variations of a 12 V or 24 V road vehicle battery
>
> For specifications of the power supply used during the test to
> simulate the battery, refer to /21/.
>
> Test severity: Voltage variations: lower limit: minimum operating
> voltage (see 3.9.3)
>
> upper limit 12 V battery: 16 V
>
> upper limit 24 V battery: 32 V
>
> Maximum allowable variations: All functions shall operate as designed
> or the indication shall switch off.
>
> All indications shall be within the maximum permissible errors
>
> A.6 Endurance test (3.9.4.3)
>
> (applicable only to instruments of class
> ![](media/image5.jpeg){width="0.3798611111111111in"
> height="0.2298611111111111in"}, ![](media/image6.jpeg){width="0.3in"
> height="0.2298611111111111in"} and
> ![](media/image7.jpeg){width="0.35in" height="0.2298611111111111in"}
> with Max ≤ 100 kg)
>
> The endurance test shall be performed after all other tests.
>
> Under normal conditions of use, the instrument shall be subjected to
> the repetitive loading and unloading of a load approximately equal to
> 50 % of Max. The load shall be applied 100 000 times. The frequency
> and speed of application shall be such that the instrument attains an
> equilibrium when loaded and when unloaded. The force of the load
> applied shall not exceed the force attained in a normal loading
> operation.
>
> A weighing test in accordance with the procedure in A.4.4.1 shall be
> performed before the endurance test is started to obtain the intrinsic
> error. A weighing test shall be performed after the completion of the
> loadings to determine the durability error due to wear and tear.
>
> If the instrument is provided with automatic zero-setting or
> zero-tracking device it may be in operation during the test, in which
> case the error at zero point shall be determined according to
> A.4.2.3.2.

![](media/image16.png){width="6.648611111111111in"
height="9.095138888888888in"}

ANNEX B

(mandatory)

ADDITIONAL TESTS FOR ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTS

> Preliminary note: The tests which are specific to electronic
> instruments, as described in this Annex, have been taken as far as
> possible from the work of the International Electrotechnical
> Commission (IEC) taking also in consideration the latest edition of
> the OIML International Document D11 /4/.
>
> Note: Although references to current versions of IEC publication have
> been made all EMC and other additional tests for electronic
> instruments should be conducted on the basis of most recent versions
> valid at the time of testing. This should be mentioned in the
> evaluation report. The objective is to keep pace with future technical
> developments.
>
> B.1 General requirements for electronic instruments under test
>
> Energize the equipment under test (EUT) for a time period equal to or
> greater than the warm-up time specified by the manufacturer and
> maintain the EUT energized for the duration of the test.
>
> Adjust the EUT as closely as practicable to zero prior to each test,
> and do not readjust it at any time during the test, except to reset it
> if a significant fault has been indicated. The deviation of the
> no-load indication due to any test condition shall be recorded, and
> any load indication shall be corrected accordingly to obtain the
> weighing result.
>
> The handling of the instrument shall be such that no condensation of
> water occurs on the instrument.
>
> B.2 Damp heat, steady state
>
> (not applicable to class ![](media/image2.jpeg){width="0.35in"
> height="0.2in"} instruments or class
> ![](media/image5.jpeg){width="0.3798611111111111in"
> height="0.2298611111111111in"} instruments where e is less than 1
> gram)
>
> Test procedure in brief: The test consists of exposure of the EUT to a
> constant temperature (see A.4.1.2) and a constant relative humidity
> The EUT shall be tested with at least five different test loads (or
> simulated loads):
>
> \- at the reference temperature (20 °C or the mean value of the
> temperature range whenever 20 °C is outside this range) and a relative
> humidity of 50 % following conditioning,
>
> \- at the high temperature of the range specified in 3.9.2 and a
> relative humidity of 85 %*,* two days following temperature and
> humidity stabilization, and
>
> \- at the reference temperature and relative humidity of 50%.
>
> Maximum allowable variations: All functions shall operate as designed.
>
> All indications shall be within maximum permissible errors.
>
> Reference: /8/, /10/
>
> B.3 Performance tests for disturbances
>
> Prior to any test, the rounding error shall be set as chose as
> possible to zero.
>
> If there are interfaces on the instrument, an appropriate peripheral
> device shall be connected to each different type of interface during
> the tests.
>
> For all tests note the environmental conditions at which they were
> realised
>
> Energize the EUT for a time period equal to or greater than the
> warm-up time specified by the manufacturer and maintain the EUT
> energized for the duration of the test.
>
> Adjust the EUT as closely as practicable to zero prior to each test,
> and do not readjust it at any time during the test, except to reset it
> if a significant fault has been indicated. The deviation of the
> no-load indication due to any test condition shall be recorded, and
> any load indication shall be corrected accordingly to obtain the
> weighing result.
>
> The handling of the instrument shall be such that no condensation of
> water occurs on the instrument.
>
> Necessary additional or alternative disturbance tests for NAWIs
> powered from the vehicle battery shall be conducted according to /20/,
> /21/, /22/ (see also B.3.7).
>
> B.3.1 AC mains voltage dips and short interruptions
>
> Test procedure in brief: Stabilize the EUT under constant
> environmental conditions.
>
> A test generator suitable to reduce for a defined period of time the
> amplitude of one or more half cycles (at zero crossings) of the AC
> mains voltage shall be used. The test generator shall be adjusted
> before connecting the EUT. The mains voltage reductions shall be
> repeated 10 times with an interval of at least 10 seconds.
>
> The test shall be performed with one small test load.
>
> Test severity:

  ----------------------- ----------------------- -----------------------
  Test                    Reduction of amplitude  Duration /\
                          to                      Number of cycles

  Voltage dips:\          0 %                     0.5
  Test a                                          

  Test b                  0 %                     1

  Test c                  40 %                    10

  Test d                  70 %                    25

  Test e                  80 %                    250

  Short interruption      0 %                     250
  ----------------------- ----------------------- -----------------------

> Maximum allowable variations: The difference between the weight
> indication due to the disturbance and the indication without the
> disturbance shall either not exceed e or the instrument shall detect
> and react to a significant fault.
>
> Reference: /4/
>
> B.3.2 Bursts
>
> The test consists in exposing the EUT to specified bursts of voltage
> spikes for which the repetition frequency of the impulses and peak
> values of the output voltage on 50 ohms and 1000 ohms load are defined
> in the referred standard. The characteristics of the generator shall
> be adjusted before connecting the EUT.
>
> Before any test stabilize the EUT under constant environmental
> conditions.
>
> The test shall be applied separately to:
>
> \- power supply lines,
>
> \- I/O circuits and communication lines, if any.
>
> The test shall be performed with one small test load.
>
> Both positive and negative polarity of the bursts shall be applied.
> The duration of the test shall not be less than one minute for each
> amplitude and polarity. The injection network on the mains shall
> contain blocking filters to prevent the burst energy being dissipated
> in the mains. For the coupling of the bursts into the input/output and
> communication lines, a capacitive coupling clamp as defined in the
> standard shall be used.
>
> Test severity: Level 2
>
> Amplitude (peak value)
>
> \- power supply lines: 1 kV,
>
> \- I/O signal, data and control lines: 0.5 kV.
>
> Maximum allowable variations: The difference between the weight
> indication due to the disturbance and the indication without the
> disturbance shall either not exceed e or the instrument shall detect
> and react to a significant fault.
>
> Reference: /14/
>
> B.3.3 Surge
>
> This test is only applicable in those cases where, based on typical
> situations of installation, the risk of a significant influence of
> surges can be expected. This is especially relevant in cases of
> outdoors installations and/or indoor installations connected to long
> signal lines (lines longer than 30 m or those lines partially or fully
> installed outside the buildings regardless of their length).
>
> The test is applicable to the power lines, the communication lines
> (internet, dial up modem, etc.), and other lines for control, data or
> signal mentioned above (lines to temperature sensors, gas or liquid
> flow sensors, etc).\
> It is also applicable to DC powered instruments if the power supply
> comes from a DC network.
>
> The test consists of exposing the EUT to surges for which the rise
> time, pulse width, peak values of the output voltage/current on
> high/low impedance load and minimum time interval between two
> successive pulses are defined in the referred standard. The
> characteristics of the generator shall be adjusted before connecting
> the EUT.
>
> Before any test stabilize the EUT under constant environmental
> conditions.
>
> The test shall be applied to:
>
> \- power supply lines.
>
> On AC mains supply lines at least 3 positive and 3 negative surges
> shall be applied synchronously with AC supply voltage in angles 0°,
> 90°, 180° and 270°. On any other kind of power supply at least 3
> positive and 3 negative surges shall be applied.
>
> The test shall be performed with one small test load.
>
> Both positive and negative polarity of the surges shall be applied.
> The duration of the test shall not be less than one minute for each
> amplitude and polarity. The injection network on the mains shall
> contain blocking filters to prevent the surge energy being dissipated
> in the mains.
>
> Test severity: Level 2
>
> Amplitude (peak value)
>
> power supply lines: 0.5 kV (line to line) and 1 kV (line to earth
>
> Maximum allowable variations: The difference between the weight
> indication due to the disturbance and the indication without the
> disturbance shall either not exceed e or the instrument shall detect
> and react to a significant fault.
>
> Reference: /15/

B.3.4 Electrostatic discharge

The test consists in exposing the EUT to specified, direct and indirect,
electrostatic discharges.

> An ESD generator shall be used with a performance as defined in the
> referred standard. Before starting the tests, the performance of the
> generator shall be adjusted.
>
> This test includes the paint penetration method, if appropriate.
>
> For direct discharges the air discharge shall be used where the
> contact discharge method cannot be applied.
>
> Before any test stabilize the EUT under constant environmental
> conditions.
>
> At least 10 discharges shall be applied. The time interval between
> successive discharges shall be at least 10 seconds. The test shall be
> performed with one small test load.
>
> For EUT not equipped with ground terminal, the EUT shall be fully
> discharged between discharges.
>
> Contact discharges shall be applied on conductive surfaces; air
> discharges shall be applied on non-conductive surfaces.
>
> Direct application :
>
> In the contact discharges mode the electrode shall be in contact with
> the EUT. In the air discharge mode the electrode is approached to the
> EUT and the discharge occurs by spark.
>
> Indirect application : The discharges are applied in the contact mode
> to coupling planes mounted in the vicinity of the EUT.
>
> Test severity: Level 3 (see IEC 61000-4-2 /12/)
>
> DC voltage up to and including 6 kV for contact discharges and 8 kV
> for air discharges.
>
> Maximum allowable variations: The difference between the weight
> indication due to the disturbance and the indication without the
> disturbance shall either not exceed e or the instrument shall detect
> and react to a significant fault.
>
> Reference: /12/

B.3.5 Immunity to radiated electromagnetic fields

The test consists in exposing the EUT to specified electromagnetic
fields.

> Test equipment: See IEC 61000-4-3 /13/
>
> Test set-up: See IEC 61000-4-3 /13/
>
> Test procedure: See IEC 61000-4-3 /13/

Before any test, stabilize the EUT under constant environmental
conditions.

> The EUT shall be exposed to electromagnetic fields of the strength and
> character as specified by the severity level.
>
> The test shall be performed with one small test load only.
>
> Test severity:

  --------------------- ----- ---------------------------------- ---------
  Frequency range       :     80\*^)^ -- 2000                    MHz

  Field strength        :     10                                 V/m

  Modulation            :     80 % AM, 1kHz, sine wave           
  --------------------- ----- ---------------------------------- ---------

> \*) For instruments having no mains or other I/O ports available so
> that the test according to B.3.6 cannot be applied, the lower limit of
> the radiation test is 26 MHz.
>
> Maximum allowable variations: The difference between the weight
> indication due to the disturbance and the indication without the
> disturbance either shall not exceed e or the instrument shall detect
> and react to a significant fault.
>
> Reference: /13/

B.3.6 Immunity to conducted radio-frequency fields

> The test consists in exposing the EUT to disturbances induced by
> conducted radio-frequency fields.
>
> Test equipment: See IEC 61000-4-6 /16/
>
> Test set-up: See IEC 61000-4-6 /16/
>
> Test procedure: See IEC 61000-4-6 /16/
>
> Before any test, stabilize the EUT under constant environmental
> conditions.
>
> The EUT shall be exposed to conducted disturbances of the strength and
> character as specified by the severity level.
>
> The test shall be performed with one small test load only.
>
> Test severity:

  ------------------------- ---- ---------------------------- ------------
  Frequency range           :    0.15 -- 80                   MHz

  RF amplitude (50 ohms)    :    10                           V (e.m.f.)

  Modulation                :    80 % AM, 1kHz, sine wave     
  ------------------------- ---- ---------------------------- ------------

> Maximum allowable variations: The difference between the weight
> indication due to the disturbance and the indication without the
> disturbance either shall not exceed e or the instrument shall detect
> and react to a significant fault.
>
> Reference: /16/

B.3.7 Special EMC requirements for instruments powered from a road
vehicle power supply

B.3.7.1 Electrical transient conduction along supply line of external 12
V and 24 V batteries

> The test consists in exposing the EUT to conducted transient
> disturbances along supply lines.
>
> Test equipment: See ISO 7637-2 (2004) /21/
>
> Test set-up: See ISO 7637-2 (2004) /21/
>
> Test procedure: See ISO 7637-2 (2004) /21/
>
> Applicable standard: ISO 7637-2 (2004) /21/

Before any test, stabilize the EUT under constant environmental
conditions.

> The EUT shall be exposed to conducted disturbances of the strength and
> character as specified by the severity level.
>
> The test shall be performed with one small test load only.

+---------------+---+---------------------------------------------------+
| > Test pulses | : | Test pulses: 2a+2b, 3a+3b, 4                      |
+---------------+---+---------------------------------------------------+
| > Objective   | : | To verify compliance with the provisions          |
| > of the test |   | mentioned under \"maximum allowable variations\"  |
|               |   | under the following conditions:                   |
|               |   |                                                   |
|               |   | \- transients due to a sudden interruption of     |
|               |   | currents in a device connected in parallel with   |
|               |   | the device under test due to the inductance of    |
|               |   | the wiring harness (pulse 2a);                    |
|               |   |                                                   |
|               |   | \- transients from DC motors acting as generators |
|               |   | after the ignition is                             |
|               |   |                                                   |
|               |   | switched off (pulse 2b);                          |
|               |   |                                                   |
|               |   | \- transients on the supply lines , which occur   |
|               |   | as a result of the switching                      |
|               |   |                                                   |
|               |   | processes (pulses 3a and 3b);                     |
|               |   |                                                   |
|               |   | \- voltage reductions caused by energizing the    |
|               |   | starter-motor circuits of                         |
|               |   |                                                   |
|               |   | internal combustion engines (pulse 4).            |
+---------------+---+---------------------------------------------------+

> Test severity: Level IV of 7637-2 (2004) /21/:

  ----------------------- ----------------- -----------------------------
  Battery voltage         Test pulse        Conducted voltage

  12 V                    2a                +50 V

                          2b                +10 V

                          3a                -150 V

                          3b                +100 V

                          4                 -7 V

  24 V                    2a                +50 V

                          2b                +20 V

                          3a                -200 V

                          3b                +200 V

                          4                 -16 V
  ----------------------- ----------------- -----------------------------

> Maximum allowable variations: The difference between the weight
> indication due to the disturbance and the indication without the
> disturbance either shall not exceed e or the instrument shall detect
> and react to a significant fault.
>
> Reference: /21/
>
> B.3.7.2 Electrical transient transmission by capacitive and inductive
> coupling via lines other than supply lines

The test consists in exposing the EUT to conducted disturbances along
lines other than supply lines.

> Test equipment: See ISO 7637-3 /22/
>
> Test set-up: See ISO 7637-3 /22/
>
> Test procedure: See ISO 7637-3 /22/
>
> Applicable standard: ISO 7637-3 /22/
>
> Before any test, stabilize the EUT under constant environmental
> conditions.
>
> The EUT shall be exposed to conducted disturbances of the strength and
> character as specified by the severity level.
>
> The test shall be performed with one small test load only.
>
> Test severity: according to ISO 7637-3 /22/

+---------------+---+----------------------------------------------------+
| > Test pulses | : | Test pulses: a and b                               |
+---------------+---+----------------------------------------------------+
| > Objective   | : | To verify compliance with the provisions mentioned |
| > of the test |   | under \"maximum allowable variations\" under       |
|               |   | conditions of transients which occur on other      |
|               |   | lines as a result of the switching processes       |
|               |   | (pulses a and b)                                   |
+---------------+---+----------------------------------------------------+

> Test severity: Level IV of ISO 7637-3 /22/

  ----------------------- ------------------ -----------------------------
  Battery voltage         Test pulse         Conducted voltage

  12 V                    a                  -60 V

                          b                  +40 V

  24 V                    a                  -80 V

                          b                  +80 V
  ----------------------- ------------------ -----------------------------

> Maximum allowable variations: The difference between the weight
> indication due to the disturbance and the indication without the
> disturbance either shall not exceed e or the instrument shall detect
> and react to a significant fault.
>
> Reference: /22/
>
> B.4 Span stability test
>
> (not applicable to class ![](media/image2.jpeg){width="0.35in"
> height="0.2in"} instruments)
>
> Test procedure in brief: The test consist in observing the variations
> of the error of the EUT under sufficiently constant ambient conditions
> (reasonably constant conditions in a normal laboratory environment) at
> various intervals before, during and after the EUT has been subjected
> to performance tests. For instruments with incorporated automatic span
> adjustment device the device shall be activated during this test
> before each measurement in order to prove its stability and its
> intended use.
>
> The performance tests shall include the temperature test and, if
> applicable, the damp heat test; they shall not include any endurance
> test; other performance tests in Annexes A and B may be performed.
>
> The EUT shall be disconnected from the mains power supply, or battery
> supply where fitted, two times for at least 8 hours during the period
> of the test. The number of disconnections may be increased if the
> manufacturer specifies so or at the discretion of the approval
> authority in the absence of any such specification.
>
> For the conduct of this test the manufacturer's operating instructions
> shall be considered.
>
> The EUT shall be stabilized at sufficiently constant ambient
> conditions after switch-on for at least 5 hours, but at least 16 hours
> after the temperature and damp heat tests have been performed.
>
> Test duration: 28 days or the period necessary for the performance
> tests to be carried out, whichever is shorter.
>
> Time between measurements: Between 1/2 and 10 days, with a fairly even
> distribution of the measurements over the total duration of the test.
>
> Test load: Near Max; the same test weights shall be used throughout
> this test.
>
> Number of measurements: At least 8.
>
> Test sequence: Stabilize all factors at sufficiently constant ambient
> conditions.
>
> Adjust the EUT as close to zero as possible.
>
> Automatic zero-tracking shall be made inoperative and automatic
> built-in span adjustment device shall be made operative.
>
> Apply the test weight(s) and determine the error.
>
> At the first measurement immediately repeat zeroing and loading four
> times to determine the average value of the error. For the next
> measurements perform only one, unless either the result is outside the
> specified tolerance or the range of the five readings of the initial
> measurement is more than 0.1 e.
>
> Record the following data:
>
> a\) date and time,
>
> b\) temperature,
>
> c\) barometric pressure,
>
> d\) relative humidity,
>
> e\) test load,
>
> f indication,
>
> g\) errors,
>
> h\) changes in test location,
>
> and apply all necessary corrections resulting from variations of
> temperature, pressure, and other influence factors due to the test
> load between the various measurements.
>
> Allow full recovery of the EUT before any other tests are performed.
>
> Maximum allowable variations: The variation in the errors of
> indication shall not exceed half the verification scale interval or
> half the absolute value of the maximum permissible error on initial
> verification for the test load applied, whichever is greater, on any
> of the n measurements.
>
> Where the differences of the results indicate a trend more than half
> the allowable variation specified above, the test shall be continued
> until the trend comes to rest or reverses itself, or until the error
> exceeds the maximum allowable variation.

ANNEX C

(mandatory for separately tested modules)

TESTING AND CERTIFICATION\
OF INDICATORS AND ANALOGUE DATA PROCESSING DEVICES\
AS MODULES OF NON-AUTOMATIC WEIGHING INSTRUMENTS

> C.1 Applicable requirements
>
> In the following, if the term "indicator" is used, analogue data
> processing devices are meant as well.
>
> Families of indicators are possible if the requirements under 3.10.4
> are observed.
>
> The following requirements apply to indicators:
>
> 3.1.1 Accuracy classes
>
> 3.1.2 The verification scale interval
>
> 3.2 Classification of instruments
>
> 3.3 Additional requirements for a multi-interval and a multiple range
> instrument
>
> 3.4 Auxiliary indicating devices
>
> 3.5 Maximum permissible errors
>
> 3.9.2 Temperature
>
> 3.9.3 Power supply
>
> 3.10 Type evaluation tests and examinations
>
> 4.1 General requirements of construction
>
> 4.1.1 Suitability
>
> 4.1.2 Security
>
> 4.2 Indication of weighing results
>
> 4.3 Analogue indicating device
>
> 4.4 Digital indicating and printing devices
>
> 4.5 Zero-setting and zero-tracking devices
>
> 4.6 Tare device
>
> 4.7 Preset tare device
>
> 4.9 Auxiliary verification devices (removable or fixed)
>
> 4.10 Selection of weighing ranges on a multiple range instrument
>
> 4.11 Devices for selection (or switching) between various load
> receptors - load transmitting devices and various load measuring
> devices
>
> 4.12 Plus and minus comparator instrument
>
> 4.13 Instrument for direct sales to public
>
> 4.14 Additional requirements for a price-computing instrument for
> direct sales to the public
>
> 4.16 Price‑labelling instrument
>
> 5.1 General requirements
>
> 5.2 Acting upon significant faults
>
> 5.3 Functional requirements
>
> 5.4 Performance and span stability test
>
> 5.5 Additional requirements for software-controlled electronic devices
>
> Note: Especially for PCs, the category and necessary tests according
> to Table 11 should be observed."
>
> C.1.1 Accuracy class
>
> The indicator shall have the same accuracy class as the weighing
> instrument it is intended to be used with. An indicator of class
> ![](media/image6.jpeg){width="0.3in" height="0.2298611111111111in"}
> can also be used in a weighing instrument of class
> ![](media/image7.jpeg){width="0.35in" height="0.2298611111111111in"}
> taking into account the requirements of class
> ![](media/image7.jpeg){width="0.35in" height="0.2298611111111111in"}.
>
> C.1.2 Number of verification scale intervals
>
> The indicator shall have the same or a higher number of verification
> scale intervals than the weighing instrument it is intended to be used
> with.
>
> C.1.3 Temperature range
>
> The indicator shall have the same or a larger temperature range than
> the weighing instrument it is intended to be used with.
>
> C.1.4 Range of input signal
>
> The range of the input signal the indicator is specified for shall be
> within the range of the analogue output signal of the load cell(s)
> connected.
>
> C.1.5 Minimum input signal per verification scale interval
>
> The minimum input signal per verification scale interval (μV) the
> indicator is specified for shall be equal or smaller than the analogue
> output signal of the load cell(s) connected divided by the number of
> scale intervals of the weighing instrument.
>
> C.1.6 Range of load cell impedance
>
> The resulting impedance of the load cell(s) connected to the indicator
> shall be within the range the indicator is specified for.
>
> C.1.7 Maximum cable length
>
> Only indicators employing six‑wire technology with remote sensing (of
> the load cell excitation voltage) shall be used if the load cell cable
> has to be lengthened or if several load cells are connected by means
> of a separate load cell junction box. However, the length of the
> (additional) cable between the load cell or the load cell junction box
> and the indicator shall not exceed the maximum length the indicator is
> specified for. The maximum cable length depends on the material and
> the cross section of the single wire, and thus can also be expressed
> as the maximum wire resistance, given in units of impedance.
>
> C.2 General principles of testing
>
> To limit the number of tests the indicator should, as far as possible,
> be tested under conditions which cover the maximum range of
> applications. This means that most tests shall be performed under
> worst case conditions. A number of tests can be performed with either
> a load cell or a simulator but both have to fulfil the requirements of
> A.4.1.7. However the disturbance tests should be performed with a load
> cell or a weighing platform with load cell being the most realistic
> case.
>
> Note:
>
> For the testing of a family of indicators. in principle, the
> provisions described in 3.10.4 apply. Special attention has to be paid
> to a possibly different EMC and temperature behaviour of different
> variants of indicators.
>
> C.2.1 Worst case conditions
>
> In order to limit the number of tests, the indicator shall be tested
> under conditions which cover the maximum range of applications. This
> means that most tests shall be performed under worst case conditions.
>
> C.2.1.1 Minimum input signal per verification scale interval e
>
> The indicator shall be tested at minimum input signal (normally
> minimum input voltage) per (verification scale interval) e specified
> by the manufacturer. This is assumed to be the worst case for the
> performance tests (intrinsic noise covering the load cell output
> signal) and for the disturbance tests (unfavourable ratio of signal
> and e.g. high frequency voltage level) as well.
>
> C.2.1.2 Minimum simulated dead load
>
> The simulated dead load shall be the minimum value the manufacturer
> has specified. A low input signal of the indicator covers the maximum
> range of problems with regard to linearity and other significant
> properties. The possibility of a larger zero drift with a larger dead
> load is regarded as a less significant problem. However, possible
> problems with the maximum value of the dead load (e.g. saturation of
> the input amplifier) have to be considered.
>
> C.2.2 Testing at high or low simulated load cell impedance
>
> The disturbance tests (see 5.4.3) shall be performed with a load cell
> instead of a simulator and with the highest practical value of the
> impedance (at least ^1^/~3~ of the specified highest impedance) for
> the load cell(s) to be connected as specified by the manufacturer. For
> the "Immunity to radiated electromagnetic fields" test the load
> cell(s) should be placed within the uniform area (IEC 61000-4-3 /13/)
> inside the anechoic chamber. Load cell cable shall not be decoupled
> because the load cell is supposed to be an essential part of the
> weighing instrument and not a peripheral (see also figure 6 in IEC
> 61000-4-3 /13/ which shows a test set-up of a modular EUT).
>
> The influence tests (see 5.4.3) may either be performed using a load
> cell or a simulator. However the load cell / simulator shall not be
> exposed to the influence during the tests (i.e. simulator is outside
> the climate chamber). The influence tests shall be performed at the
> lowest impedance of the load cell(s) to be connected as specified by
> the applicant.
>
> The following table 12 indicates which test has to be performed with
> the lowest impedance (low) and which one with the highest practical
> value of the impedance (high).

Table 12

  ----------- ------------------------------ ----------- ------------- ----------
  *Article    *Article concerning*           *Fraction   *Impedance*   *µV / e*
  No. R76-1*                                 p~i~*                     

  *A.4.4*     *Weighing performance*         *0.3 ..     *low*         *min*
                                             0.8*                      

  *A.4.5*     *Multiple indicating device*                             

              *Analogue*                     *1*         *low*         *min*

              *Digital*                      *0*         *low*         *min*

  *A.4.6.1*   *Weighing accuracy with tare*              *low*         *min*

  *A.4.10*    *Repeatability*                            *low*         *min/max
                                                                       \*\*)*

  *A.5.2*     *Warm-up time test*            *0.3 ..     *low*         *min/max
                                             0.8*                      \*\*)*

  *A.5.3.1*   *Temperature (effect on        *0.3 ..     *low*         *min/max
              amplification)*                0.8*                      \*\*)*

  *A.5.3.2*   *Temperature (effect on no     *0.3 ..     *low*         *min*
              load)*                         0.8*                      

  *A.5.4*     *Voltage variations*           *1*         *low*         *min*

  *3.9.5*     *Other influences*                                       

  *B.2.2*     *Damp heat steady state*       *0.3 ..     *low*         *min/max
                                             0.8*                      \*\*)*

  *B.3.1*     *AC mains voltage dips and     *1*         *high\*)*     *min*
              short interruptions*                                     

  *B.3.2*     *Bursts*                       *1*         *high\*)*     *min*

  *B.3.3*     *Surge (if applicable)*        *1*         *high\*)*     *min*

  *B.3.4*     *Electrostatic discharge*      *1*         *high\*)*     *min*

  *B.3.5*     *Immunity to radiated          *1*         *high\*)*     *min*
              electromagnetic fields*                                  

  *B.3.6*     *Immunity to conducted         *1*         *high\*)*     *min*
              radio-frequency fields*                                  

  *B.3.7*     *Special EMC requirements for  *1*         *high\*)*     *min*
              instruments powered from road                            
              vehicle power supply*                                    

  *B.4*       *Span stability*               *1*         *low*         *min*
  ----------- ------------------------------ ----------- ------------- ----------

> \*) Test has to be performed with load cell.
>
> \*\*) See C.3.1.1
>
> The impedance of the load cell referred to in this annex is the input
> impedance of the load cell which is the impedance that is connected
> between the excitation lines.
>
> C.2.3 Peripheral equipment
>
> Peripheral equipment shall be supplied by the applicant to demonstrate
> correct functioning of the system or sub‑system and the non‑corruption
> of weighing results.
>
> When performing disturbance tests, peripheral equipment may be
> connected to all different interfaces. However, if not all optional
> peripheral equipment is available or can not be placed on the test
> site (especially when having to place them in the uniform area during
> radiated fields tests), then at least cables shall to be connected to
> the interfaces. Cable types and lengths shall be as specified in the
> manufacturer\'s authorized manual. If cable lengths longer than
> 3 metres are specified, testing with lengths of 3 metres is regarded
> as being sufficient.
>
> C.2.4 Adjustment and performance tests
>
> The adjustment (calibration) has to be performed as described by the
> manufacturer. Weighing tests shall be performed with at least five
> different (simulated) loads reaching from zero to the maximum number
> of verification scale intervals (e) with the minimum input voltage per
> e (for high sensitive indicators possibly also with the maximum input
> voltage per e, see C.2.1.1). It is preferable to choose points close
> to the changeover points of the error limits.
>
> C.2.5 Indication with a scale interval smaller than e
>
> If an indicator has a device for displaying the weight value with a
> smaller scale interval (not greater than 1/5 · p~i~ · e, high
> resolution mode), this device may used to determine the error. It may
> also be tested in service mode where the "raw values" (counts) of the
> analogue-to-digital converter are given. If either device is used it
> should be noted in the Evaluation Report.
>
> Prior to the tests it shall be verified that this indicating mode is
> suitable for establishing the measuring errors. If the high resolution
> mode does not fulfil this demand, a load cell, weights and small
> additional weights shall be used to determine the change-over points
> with an uncertainty better than (1/5) · p~i~ · e. (see A.4.4.4).
>
> C.2.6 Load cell simulator
>
> The simulator shall be suitable for the indicator. The simulator shall
> be calibrated for the used excitation voltage of the indicator (AC
> excitation voltage means also AC calibration).
>
> C.2.7 Fractions p~i~
>
> The standard fraction is p~i~ = 0.5 of the maximum permissible error
> of the complete instrument, however, it may vary between 0.3 and 0.8.
>
> The manufacturer has to fix the fraction p~i~ which then is used as a
> basis for the tests for which a range of p~i~ is assigned (see table
> under C.2.2).
>
> No value for the fraction p~i~ is given with respect to repeatability.
> Insufficient repeatability is a typical problem of mechanical
> instruments with leverworks, knives and pans and other mechanical
> structure that may cause e.g. a certain friction. It is expected that
> the indicator will normally not cause a lack in repeatability. In the
> rare cases it does, this is not a lack of repeatability within the
> meaning of R76-1, however, special attention shall be paid to the
> reasons and the consequences.
>
> C.3. Tests
>
> The relevant parts of the evaluation report (see C.1) and checklist of
> OIML R76‑2 shall be used for an indicator. The
> [non-relevant]{.underline} parts of the OIML R76‑2 checklist are
> (requirements):
>
> *7.1.5.1*
>
> *3.9.1.1*
>
> *4.12.1*
>
> *4.12.2*
>
> *4.18.1*
>
> *4.18.2*
>
> *4.13.10*
>
> C.3.1 Temperature and performance tests
>
> In principle, the temperature effect on the amplification is tested
> according to the following procedure:
>
> \- Carry out the prescribed adjustment procedure at 20 °C;
>
> \- Change the temperature and verify that the measuring points are
> within the error limits after correction of a zero shift.
>
> This procedure shall to be carried out at the highest amplification
> and the lowest impedance to which the indicator can be adjusted.
> However, those conditions shall ensure that the measurement can be
> performed with such an accuracy that it is sufficiently certain that
> non-linearities found in the error curve are not caused by the test
> equipment used.
>
> In case this accuracy cannot be reached (e.g. with high sensitive
> indicators) the procedure has to be carried out twice (C.2.1.1). The
> first measurement has to be carried out with the lowest amplification,
> using at least 5 measuring points. The second measurement is carried
> out with the highest amplification, using two measuring points, one at
> the low end and one at the high end of the measuring range. The change
> in amplification due to temperature is acceptable if a line of the
> same form found at the first measurement, drawn between the two points
> and corrected for a zero‑shift, is inside the relevant error limits
> (error envelope).
>
> The temperature effect on no load indication is the influence of
> temperature variation on the zero expressed in changes of the input
> signal in µV. The zero drift is calculated with the help of a straight
> line through the indications at two adjacent temperatures. The zero
> drift should be less than\
> p~i~ · e / 5 K
>
> C.3.1.1 Tests with high and low amplification
>
> If the minimum input voltage per verification scale interval is very
> low, i.e. less than or equal to 1 µV/e, it may be difficult to find a
> suitable simulator or load cell to determine the linearity. If the
> value of the fraction p~i~ is 0.5 for an indicator with 1 µV/e then
> the maximum permissible error for simulated loads smaller than 500 e
> is 0.25 µV/e. The error of the simulator shall not cause effect
> exceeding 0.05 µV/e or at least the repeatability should be equal or
> better than 0.05 µV/e.
>
> In any case, the following has to be taken into account:
>
> \(a\) The linearity of the indicator is tested over the complete input
> range. **[Example:]{.underline}** A typical indicator with a load cell
> excitation power supply of 12 V has a measuring range of 24 mV. If the
> indicator is specified for 6000 e the linearity can be tested with
> 24 mV/6000 e = 4 µV/e.
>
> \(b\) With the same set-up the temperature effect on the amplification
> shall be measured, during the static temperature test and during the
> damp heat steady state test.
>
> \(c\) After that the indicator is set up with the minimum dead load
> specified and with the minimum input voltage per verification scale
> interval e. Suppose this value is 1 µV/e, which means that only 25% of
> the input range is used.
>
> \(d\) The indicator shall now be tested with an input voltage close to
> 0 mV and close to 6 mV. The indication at both input voltages is
> registered at 20 °C, 40 °C, -10 °C , 5 °C and 20 °C. The difference
> between the indication at 6 mV (corrected for the indication at 0 mV)
> at 20 °C and the corrected indications at the other temperatures are
> introduced in a graph. The points found are connected to the zero
> point by means of curves of the same shape form as those found (a) and
> (b). The curves drawn shall be within the error-envelope for 6000 e.
>
> \(e\) During this test the temperature-effect on no load indication
> can also be measured to see if the effect is less than p~i~ · e/5 K.
>
> \(f\) If the indicator fulfils the above-mentioned requirements it
> also complies with 3.9.2.1, 3.9.2.2, 3.9.2.3 and it complies with the
> requirements for the static temperature test and damp heat steady
> state test.
>
> C.3.2 Tare
>
> The influence of tare on the weighing performance depends exclusively
> on the linearity of the error curve. The linearity will be determined
> when the normal weighing performance tests are carried out. If the
> error curve shows a significant nonlinearity, the error envelope shall
> be shifted along the curve, to see if the indicator meets the demands
> for the tare value corresponding with the steepest part of the error
> curve.
>
> C.3.3 Testing the sense function (with six wire load cell connection
> only)
>
> C.3.3.1 Scope
>
> Indicators intended for connection of strain gauge load cells employ
> the 4-wire or the 6-wire principle of the load cell connection. When
> 4-wire technology is used lengthening cable the load cell cable or
> using a separate load cell junction box with an extra cable is not
> allowed at all. Indicators using 6-wire technology have a sense input
> enabling the indicator to compensate variations in load cell
> excitation voltage due to lengthened cables or changes of cable
> resistance due to temperature. However, in contrast to the theoretical
> principle of function, the compensation of variations in load cell
> excitation voltage is limited due to a limited input resistance of the
> sense input. This may lead to an influence by variation of cable
> resistance due to temperature variation and result in a significant
> shift of the span.
>
> C.3.3.2 Test
>
> The sense function shall be tested under worst case conditions, that
> is the maximum value of the load cell excitation (simulating the
> maximum number of load cells that may be connected) and the maximum
> cable length shall be simulated.
>
> C.3.3.2.1 Simulated maximum number of load cells
>
> The maximum number of load cells can be simulated by putting an extra
> ohmic shunt resistor on the excitation lines, connected in parallel
> with the load cell simulator or the load cell respectively.
>
> C.3.3.2.2 Simulated maximum cable length
>
> The maximum cable length can be simulated by putting variable ohmic
> resistors in all six lines. The resistors shall be set to the maximum
> cable resistance and thus the maximum cable length (depending on the
> intended material, e.g. copper or others, and the cross section).
> However, in most cases it is sufficient to place the resistors only in
> the excitation lines and the sense lines, since the input impedance of
> the signal input is extremely high in comparison to that of the sense
> input. Therefore the signal input current is nearly zero or at least
> extremely small in comparison to the current on the excitation and
> sense lines. The input current being near to zero no significant
> effect can be expected, since the voltage drop is negligible.
>
> C.3.3.2.3 Readjustment of the indicator
>
> The indicator shall be readjusted after having set the cable
> simulation resistors.
>
> C.3.3.2.4 Determining the span variation
>
> The span between zero and maximum (simulated) load shall be measured.
> It is assumed that under worst case conditions a change of resistance
> due to a temperature change corresponding to the whole temperature
> range of the instrument may occur. Therefore a variation of the
> resistance ∆R~Temp~ corresponding to the difference between minimum
> and maximum operating temperature shall be simulated. The expected
> variation of resistance shall be determined according to the following
> formula:
>
> ∆R~Temp~ = R~cable~ · α · (T~max~ -- T~min~)
>
> R~cable~: resistance of a single wire, calculated according to the
> following formula:
>
> R~cable~ = (ρ · l) / A
>
> ρ: specific resistance of the material (e.g. copper: ρ~copper~ =
> 0.0175 Ω mm^2^ / m)
>
> l: length of the cable (in m)
>
> A: cross section of the single wire (in mm^2^)
>
> α: temperature coefficient of the cable material in 1/K
>
> After having set the variable ohmic resistors to the new value the
> span between zero and maximum load shall be determined again. Since
> the variation can be positive or negative both directions shall be
> tested, e.g. for a class ![](media/image6.jpeg){width="0.3in"
> height="0.2298611111111111in"} instrument the variation of simulated
> cable resistance shall correspond to a variation of temperature by
> plus or minus 50 K (temperature range being --10 °C to +40 °C).
>
> C.3.3.2.5 Limits of span variation
>
> For determining the limits of span variation due to temperature
> influence on the cable, the results of the temperature tests on the
> indicator shall be considered. The difference between the maximum span
> error of the indicator due to temperature and the error limit may be
> assigned to the effect on the span due to limited compensation by the
> sense device. However, this effect shall not cause an error of more
> than one third of the absolute value of the maximum permissible error
> multiplied by p~i~.
>
> ∆span(∆T) ≤ p~i~ · mpe - E~max~(∆T)
>
> while
>
> ∆span(∆T) ≤ ^1^/~3~ p~i~ · mpe~abs~
>
> If the indicator is not able to meet these conditions, the maximum
> cable resistance and thus the maximum cable length has to be reduced
> or a larger cross section has to be chosen.
>
> The specific cable length may be given in the shape of m/mm^2^
> (depending on the material of the cable, e.g. copper, aluminium).
>
> figure 12

![](media/image17.jpeg){width="6.023611111111111in"
height="4.146527777777778in"}

> C.3.4 Other influences
>
> Other influences and restraints should be taken into consideration for
> the complete instrument and not for the modules.
>
> C.4 OIML certificates
>
> C.4.1 General
>
> The certificate shall contain common information and data about the
> issuing authority, the manufacturer and the indicator. For the lay-out
> the general rules of OIML B3 Annex A /3/ shall be observed as far as
> applicable.
>
> The following important information about the indicator shall be given
> under "Identification of the certified module":
>
> Type, accuracy class, value of the fractional error p~i~ , temperature
> range, maximum number of verification scale intervals, minimum
> input-voltage per verification scale interval, measuring range,
> minimum load cell impedance.
>
> C.4.2 Evaluation report
>
> The R76-2 evaluation report shall contain detailed information about
> the indicator. These are technical data, description of the functions,
> characteristics, features and the checklist of R76‑2. In the following
> all relevant information is listed:
>
> **Report No.:** zzzzz
>
> **Type Examination of a** Indicator as module for a non-automatic
> electromechanical weighing instrument
>
> **Issuing authority:** name, address, person responsible
>
> **Manufacturer**: name, address
>
> **Type of module : \...\...\...\...\...\...\.....**
>
> **Test requirements:** R 76-1, edition xxxx
>
> **Summary of the examination:** Separately tested module, p~i~ = 0.5,
> connected load cell or load cell simulator, connected peripherals,
> special informations as if some tests were performed by the
> manufacturer and why they were accepted, results of the test in brief.
>
> **Evaluator:** name, date, signature
>
> **Table of contents:**
>
> This report belongs to the OIML Certificate N^o^ R76/xxxx-xx-yyyy
>
> **1 General information concerning the module :\
> **Description of the housing, display, keyboard, plugs and connectors
> etc. shall be shortly described supported by corresponding figures or
> photos of the indicator.
>
> **2 Functions, facilities and devices of the module:\
> **Zero-setting devices, tare devices, weighing ranges, modes of
> operation, etc. (see chapter 4), and facilities of electronic
> instruments as mentioned in chapter 5 shall be listed.
>
> **3 Technical data:\
> **In order to check the compatibility of modules when using the
> modular approach (see 3.10.2 and Annex F) a certain set of data is
> necessary. This part contains the data of the indicator in the same
> presentation and units that is needed to check the requirements of
> Annex F easily.
>
> 3.1 Metrological data with regard to the weighing instrument

-   Accuracy class

-   Maximum number of verification scale intervals n

-   Operating temperature range (°C)

-   Value of the fractional error p~i~

> 3.2 Electrical data

-   Power supply voltage (V AC or DC)

-   Form (and frequency (Hz)) of the power supply

-   Load cell excitation voltage (V AC or DC)

-   Minimum signal voltage for dead load (mV)

-   Maximum signal voltage for dead load (mV)

-   Minimum input-voltage per verification scale interval e (µV)

-   Measuring range minimum voltage (mV)

-   Measuring range maximum voltage (mV)

-   Minimum load cell impedance (Ω)

-   Maximum load cell impedance (Ω)

> 3.3 Sense system
>
> Existing or not existing
>
> 3.4 Signal cable
>
> Additional cable between the indicator and the load cell or the load
> cell junction box respectively (only allowed with indicators using six
> wire system, i.e. sense system) shall be specified as follows:

-   material (copper, aluminium etc.)

-   length (m)

-   cross section (mm^2^)

> or

-   specific length (m/mm^2^) when the material (copper, aluminium etc.)
    is fixed

> or

-   maximum ohmic resistance per single wire

> **4 Documents:** List of documents
>
> **5 Interfaces:\
> **Interface types and numbers for peripheral devices and for other
> devices.\
> All interfaces are protective in the sense of R 76-1, No. 5.3.6.1.
>
> **6 Connectable devices:\
> **Printer, display, etc. For applications not subject to mandatory
> verification, any peripheral devices may be connected. Examples: D/A
> converters, PC or the like.
>
> **7 Descriptive markings and control marks:\
> **The means to apply the descriptive markings shall be described
> considering 7.1.4 and 7.1.5 as far as applicable. In addition to the
> complete instrument the module itself must be clearly identifiable**\
> **The places for the descriptive plate and the verification marks
> shall be described. If applicable the means for sealing and securing
> the indicator shall be described and shown in figures or photos.
>
> **8 Test equipment:\
> **Information concerning the test equipment used for type evaluation
> of this module and information about calibration of the test
> equipment.\
> Examples: load cell simulator, temperature chambers, voltmeters,
> transformers, disturbance test equipment, etc.
>
> **9 Remarks to the tests:\
> **Example: In the R76‑2 checklist the parts related to the complete
> weighing instrument indicator ("descriptive markings", "verification
> marks and sealing" and partially to "indicating device") are not
> filled in. During the disturbance tests a load cell of the type \....
> and a printer of the type \.... was connected.
>
> **10 Measuring results:** Forms of OIML R76‑2
>
> **11 Technical requirements:** Checklist of OIML R76‑2

ANNEX D

(mandatory for separately tested modules)

TESTING AND CERTIFICATION OF\
DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING DEVICES; TERMINALS AND DIGITAL DISPLAYS\
AS MODULES OF NON-AUTOMATIC WEIGHING INSTRUMENTS

D.1 Applicable requirements

D.1.1 Requirements for digital data processing devices, terminals and
digital displays

> The following requirements apply to these modules as far as
> applicable:
>
> 3.3 Additional requirements for a multi-interval instrument
>
> 3.9.3 Power supply
>
> 3.9.5 Other influence quantities and restraints
>
> 3.10 Type evaluation tests and examinations
>
> 4.1 General requirements of construction
>
> 4.2 Indication of weighing results (not for digital data processing
> devices)
>
> 4.4 Digital indicating and printing devices (not for digital data
> processing devices)
>
> 4.5 Zero-setting and zero-tracking devices
>
> 4.6 Tare device
>
> 4.7 Preset-tare device
>
> 4.10 Selection of weighing ranges on a multiple range instrument
>
> 4.11 Devices for selection (or switching) between various load
> receptors - load transmitting devices and various load measuring
> devices
>
> 4.13 Instrument for direct sales to the public
>
> 4.14 Additional requirements for a price computing instrument for
> direct sales to the public
>
> 4.16 Price-labelling instruments
>
> 5.1 General requirements
>
> 5.2 Acting upon significant faults
>
> 5.3 Functional requirements
>
> 5.4 Performance and span stability test
>
> 5.5 Additional requirements for software-controlled electronic devices
>
> 8.2.1.2 Descriptive documents

D.1.2 Supplement requirements

D.1.2.1 Fraction of error limits

> Digital data processing devices, terminals and digital displays are
> purely digital modules. For these modules, the fraction is p~i~ = 0.0
> of the maximum permissible error of the complete instrument it is
> intended to be used with.

D.1.2.2 Accuracy class

> Digital data processing devices, terminals and digital displays are
> purely digital modules. Therefore they can be used in weighing
> instruments of all accuracy classes. The relevant requirements of the
> class of weighing instrument it is intended to be used with shall be
> taken into account.

D.2 General Principles of testing

D.2.1 General

> Digital data processing devices, terminals and digital displays are
> purely digital modules. Therefore the

-   design and construction according to the documentation (8.2.1.2),

-   functions and indications according to the requirements mentioned in
    E.1.1 and

-   disturbances according to E.3

> shall be tested.
>
> However, all indicated values and all functions which are transmitted
> and/or released via an interface shall be tested if they are correctly
> and in compliance with this Recommendation.

D.2.2 Simulating device

> For testing these modules a suitable simulating device (e.g. ADC for
> testing a digital data processing device; weighing module or digital
> data processing device for testing a terminal or digital display)
> shall be connected to the input interface of the module that all
> functions can be operated and tested.

D.2.3 Displaying device

> For testing a digital data processing device a suitable digital
> display or terminal shall be connected to display the respective
> weighing results and to operate all functions of the digital data
> processing device.

D.2.4 Interface

> For all interfaces the requirements of 5.3.6 are applicable.

D.2.5 Peripheral devices

> Peripheral devices shall be supplied by the applicant to demonstrate
> correct functioning of the module and that weighing results cannot
> inadmissibly be influenced by peripheral devices.
>
> When performing disturbance tests peripheral devices shall be
> connected to all different interfaces.

D.3 Tests

> For these modules the following tests according to ANNEX A and ANNEX B
> shall be performed:
>
> []{.mark}
>
> Voltage variations \*) A.5.4
>
> AC mains voltage dips and short interruptions \*\*) B.3.1
>
> Bursts \*\*) B.3.2
>
> Surge (if applicable) \*\*) B.3.3
>
> Electrostatic discharge \*\*) B.3.4
>
> Immunity to radiated electromagnetic fields \*\*) B.3.5
>
> Immunity to conducted radio-frequency fields \*\*) B.3.6
>
> Special EMC requirements for instruments powered from road vehicle
> power supply \*\*) B.3.7
>
> []{.mark}
>
> \*) For the voltage variations test only the legally relevant
> functions and the easy and unambiguous reading of the primary
> indications shall be observed.
>
> \*\*) Purely digital modules need not be tested for disturbances (B.3)
> if conformity to the relevant IEC Standards is otherwise established
> to at least the same level as required in this Recommendation.
>
> The evaluation report and the checklist of OIML R76‑2 shall be used
> also for these modules as far as applicable.
>
> The parts of the checklist of OIML R76‑2 related to \"descriptive
> markings\" and \"verification marks and sealing\" are not relevant and
> must not be filled in.

D.4 OIML Certificates

D.4.1 General

> The certificate shall contain common information and data about the
> issuing authority, the manufacturer and the module (digital data
> processing device, terminal or digital display). For the lay-out the
> general rules of OIML B3 Annex A /3/ shall be observed as far as
> applicable.

D.4.2 Evaluation report

> The R76-2 evaluation report shall contain detailed information about
> the module (digital data processing device, terminal or digital
> display). These are technical data, description of the functions,
> characteristics, features and the checklist of R76‑2. In the following
> all relevant information is listed:
>
> **Report No.:** zzzzz
>
> **Type Examination of a** Module (digital data processing device,
> terminal or digital display) for a non-automatic electromechanical
> weighing instrument
>
> **Issuing authority:** name, address, person responsible
>
> **Manufacturer**: name, address
>
> **Type of module : \...\...\...\...\...\...\.....**
>
> **Test requirements:** R 76-1, edition xxxx
>
> **Summary of the examination:** Separately tested module, p~i~ = 0.0,
> connected devices for simulate the input signal, for displaying the
> weighing results and to operate the module, connected peripherals,
> special information as if some tests were performed by the
> manufacturer and why they were accepted, results of the test in brief.
>
> **Evaluator:** name, date, signature
>
> **Table of contents:**
>
> This report belongs to the OIML Certificate N^o^ R76/xxxx-xx-yyyy
>
> **1 General information concerning the type of module :\
> **Short description of the module, interfaces.
>
> **2 Functions, facilities and devices of the module:\
> **Zero-setting devices, tare devices, multi-interval function,
> different weighing ranges, modes of operation, etc.
>
> **3 Technical data:** Tare ranges, etc.
>
> **4 Documents:** List of documents
>
> **5 Interfaces:** Interface types and numbers, for peripheral devices
> and for other devices.\
> All interfaces are protective in the sense of R 76-1, No. 5.3.6.1.
>
> **6 Connectable devices:** Terminal, printer, digital display, etc..
> For applications not subject to mandatory verification, any peripheral
> devices may be connected. Examples: D/A converters, PC or the like.
>
> **7 Control marks:** If securing (sealing) is required for the
> weighing instrument the adjustment elements of this module can be
> protected by a control mark (adhesive mark or seal).
>
> **8 Test equipment:** Information concerning the test equipment used
> for type evaluation of this module. Information about calibration of
> the equipment. Examples: voltmeters, transformers, disturbance test
> equipment, etc.
>
> **9 Remarks to the tests:** In the R76‑2 checklist the parts related
> to the indicator ("descriptive markings", "verification marks and
> sealing" are not filled in. During the disturbance tests a printer of
> the type \... was connected.
>
> **10 Measuring results:** Forms of OIML R76‑2
>
> **11 Technical requirements:** Checklist of OIML R76‑2

ANNEX E

(mandatory for separately tested modules)

TESTING AND CERTIFICATION OF WEIGHING MODULES\
AS MODULES OF NON-AUTOMATIC WEIGHING INSTRUMENTS

E.1 Applicable requirements

E.1.1 Requirements for weighing modules

> The following requirements apply to weighing modules:
>
> 3.1 Principles of classification
>
> 3.2. Classification of instruments
>
> 3.3 Additional requirements for a multi-interval instrument
>
> 3.5 Maximum permissible errors
>
> 3.6 Permissible differences between results
>
> 3.8 Discrimination
>
> 3.9 Variations due to influence quantities and time
>
> 3.10 Type evaluation tests and examinations
>
> 4.1 General requirements of construction
>
> 4.2 Indication of weighing results
>
> 4.4 Digital indicating and printing devices
>
> 4.5 Zero-setting and zero-tracking devices
>
> 4.6 Tare device
>
> 4.7 Preset-tare device
>
> 4.10 Selection of weighing ranges on a multiple range instrument
>
> 4.11 Devices for selection (or switching) between various load
> receptors - load transmitting devices and various load measuring
> devices
>
> 4.13 Instrument for direct sales to the public
>
> 4.14 Additional requirements for a price computing instrument for
> direct sales to the public
>
> 4.16 Price-labelling instruments
>
> 5.1 General requirements
>
> 5.2 Acting upon significant faults
>
> 5.3 Functional requirements
>
> 5.4 Performance and span stability test
>
> 5.5 Additional requirements for software-controlled electronic devices

E.1.2 Supplement requirements

E.1.2.1 Fraction of error limits

> For a weighing module, the fraction is p~i~ = 1.0 of the maximum
> permissible error of the complete instrument.

E.1.2.2 Accuracy class

> The weighing module shall have the same accuracy class as the weighing
> instrument it is intended to be used with. A weighing module of class
> ![](media/image6.jpeg){width="0.3in" height="0.2298611111111111in"}
> can also be used in a weighing instrument of class
> ![](media/image7.jpeg){width="0.35in" height="0.2298611111111111in"}
> taking into account the requirements of class
> ![](media/image7.jpeg){width="0.35in" height="0.2298611111111111in"}.

E.1.2.3 Number of verification scale intervals

> The weighing module shall have the same or a higher number of
> verification scale intervals than the weighing instrument it is
> intended to be used with.

E.1.2.4 Temperature range

> The weighing module shall have the same or a larger temperature range
> than the weighing instrument it is intended to be used with.

E.2 General principles of testing

E.2.1 General

> A weighing module shall be tested in the same way as a complete
> weighing instrument, with the exception of testing the design and
> construction of the indicating device and control elements.\
> However, all indicated values and all functions which are transmitted
> and/or released via the interface shall be tested if they are
> correctly and in compliance with this Recommendation.

E.2.2 Indicating device

> For this test a suitable indicating device or terminal shall be
> connected to indicate the respective weighing results and to operate
> all functions of the weighing module.\
> If the weighing results of the weighing module have a differentiated
> scale division according to 3.4.1 the indicating device shall indicate
> this digit.\
> The indicating device should preferably allow indication to a higher
> resolution to determine the error, e.g. in a special service mode. If
> a higher resolution is used it should be noted in the Evaluation
> Report.

E.2.3 Interface

> For all interfaces the requirements of 5.3.6 are applicable.

E.2.4 Peripheral equipment

> Peripheral equipment shall be supplied by the applicant to demonstrate
> correct functioning of the system or sub‑system and the non‑corruption
> of weighing results.
>
> When performing disturbance tests peripheral equipment shall be
> connected to all different interfaces.

E.3 Tests

> The complete testing procedure for non-automatic weighing instruments
> according to ANNEX A and ANNEX B shall be performed.
>
> The evaluation report and the checklist of OIML R76‑2 shall be used
> also for weighing modules.
>
> The parts of the checklist of OIML R76‑2 related to \"descriptive
> markings\", \"verification marks and sealing\" and partially to
> \"indicating device\" are not relevant and must not be filled in.

E.4 OIML Certificates

E.4.1 General

> The certificate shall contain common information and data about the
> issuing authority, the manufacturer and the weighing module. For the
> lay-out the general rules of OIML B3 Annex A /3/ shall be observed as
> far as applicable.

E.4.2 Evaluation report

> The R76-2 evaluation report shall contain detailed information about
> the weighing module. These are technical data, description of the
> functions, characteristics, features and the checklist of R76‑2. In
> the following all relevant information is listed:
>
> **Report No.:** zzzzz
>
> **Type Examination of a** Weighing module for a non-automatic
> electromechanical weighing instrument
>
> **Issuing authority:** name, address, person responsible
>
> **Manufacturer**: name, address
>
> **Type of module : \...\...\...\...\...\...\.....**
>
> **Test requirements:** R 76-1, edition xxxx
>
> **Summary of the examination:** Separately tested module, p~i~ = 1.0,
> connected device for indicating the weighing results and to operate
> the module, connected peripherals, special informations as if some
> tests were performed by the manufacturer and why they were accepted,
> results of the test in brief.
>
> **Evaluator:** name, date, signature
>
> **Table of contents:**
>
> This report belongs to the OIML Certificate N^o^ R76/xxxx-xx-yyyy
>
> **1 General information concerning the type of module :\
> **Description of mechanical structures, load cell, analogue data
> processing device, interfaces.
>
> **2 Functions, facilities and devices of the module:\
> **Zero-setting devices, tare devices, multi-interval weighing module,
> different weighing ranges, modes of operation, etc.
>
> **3 Technical data:** Table with accuracy class, p~i~ = 1.0, Max, Min,
> n = , n~i~ = , tare- and temperature ranges, etc.
>
> **4 Documents:** List of documents
>
> **5 Interfaces:** Interface types and numbers for the indicating and
> operating device (terminal), for peripheral devices and for other
> devices.\
> All interfaces are protective in the sense of R 76-1, No. 5.3.6.1.
>
> **6 Connectable devices:** indicating and operating device (terminal)
> with p~i~ = 0.0, printer, display, etc. For applications not subject
> to mandatory verification, any peripheral devices may be connected.
> Examples: D/A converters, PC or the like.
>
> **7 Control marks:** If securing (sealing) is required for the
> weighing instrument, components and adjustment elements of this module
> can be protected by a control mark (adhesive mark or seal) over the
> housing screw under the plate of the load receptor. An additional
> securing is not necessary.
>
> **8 Test equipment:** Information concerning the test equipment used
> for type evaluation of this module. Information about calibration.\
> Examples: standard weights (class), load cell simulator, temperature
> chambers, voltmeters, transformers, disturbance test equipment, etc.
>
> **9 Remarks to the tests:** In the R76‑2 checklist the parts related
> to the indicator ("descriptive markings", "verification marks and
> sealing" and partially to "indicating device") are not filled in.
> During the disturbance tests a printer of the type \... was connected.
>
> **10 Measuring results:** Forms of OIML R76‑2
>
> **11 Technical requirements:** Checklist of OIML R76‑2

ANNEX F

(mandatory for separately tested modules)

COMPATIBILITY CHECKING OF MODULES OF NON-AUTOMATIC WEIGHING INSTRUMENTS

> F.1 to F.4: Only for analogue load cells in conformity with OIML R60
> in combination with indicators in conformity with OIML R76 Annex C.
>
> F.5: Only for digital load cells in combination with indicators,
> analogue or digital data processing units or terminals.
>
> F.6: Examples of compatibility checks

When using the modular approach the check of the compatibility of the
weighing instrument and the modules need certain sets of data. This part
describes in the first three chapters the data of the weighing
instrument, the load cell(s) and the indicator that are needed to check
the requirements of compatibility.

> F.1 Weighing instrument

The following metrological and technical data of the weighing instrument
are necessary for the check of compatibility:

> Accuracy class of the weighing instrument
>
> *Max* (g,kg,t) Maximum capacity of weighing instrument according to
> T.3.1.1
>
> (*Max*1, *Max*2, *Max*) (in case of multi-interval or multiple range
> weighing instrument)
>
> *e* (g, kg ) Verification scale interval according to T.3.2.3
>
> (*e*1, *e*2, *e*3) (in case of multi-interval or multiple range
> weighing instrument, where *e*~1~ = *e*~min~)
>
> *n* Number of verification scale intervals according to T.3.2.5 *n* =
> *Max* / *e*
>
> (*n*1, *n*2, *n*3) (in case of multi-interval or multiple range
> weighing instrument *n*i = *Max*i / *e*i )
>
> *R* Reduction ratio, eg of a lever work according to T.3.3, it is the
> ratio
>
> (Force onto the load cell) / (Force onto the load receptor).
>
> *N* Number of load cells
>
> *IZSR* (g, kg ) Initial zero setting range, according to T.2.7.2.4, it
> means the indication automatically is set to zero when the weighing
> instrument is switched on, before any weighing.
>
> *NUD* (g, kg ) Correction for non uniform distributed load \*\*.
>
> *DL* (g, kg ) Dead load of load receptor, mass of the load receptor
> itself resting upon the load cells and any additional construction
> mounted on the load receptor.
>
> *T* + Additive Tare
>
> *T*min (°C) Lower limit of temperature range
>
> *T*max (°C) Upper limit of temperature range
>
> *CH, NH, SH* Symbol of humidity test performed
>
> Connecting system, 6-wire-system
>
> *L* (m) Length of connecting cable
>
> *A* (mm²) Cross section of wire
>
> *Q* Correction factor

The [correction factor *Q*]{.underline} \> 1 considers the possible
effects of eccentric loading (non uniform distribution of the load),
dead load of the load receptor, initial zero setting range and additive
tare in the following form:

*Q* = (*Max*+ *DL* + *IZSR* + *NUD* + *T*+) / *Max*

\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_

\*\**Note:*

> The values for the non uniform distribution of the load generally
> might be assumed for typical constructions of weighing instruments
> when no other estimations are presented.
>
> \- Weighing instruments (WIs) with lever work and one LC, or\
> WIs with load receptors which allow only minimal eccentric load
> application, or\
> WIs with one single point LC, 0% of *Max*
>
> eg hopper or funnel hopper with a symmetric arrangement of the\
> load cells, but without shaker for material flow on the load receptor
>
> \- other conventional WIs: 20% of *Max*
>
> \- Fork lift scales, over head track scales and weighbridges 50% of
> *Max*
>
> \- Multi-platform weighing machine
>
> fix combined 50% of *Max* total\
> variable selection or combined 50% of *Max* single bridge
>
> F.2 Separately tested load cells

Load cells that have been tested separately according to the
International Recommendation OIML R60 may be used without repeated
testing if a respective OIML certificate exists and the requirements in
3.10.2.1, 3.10.2.2, and 3.10.2.3 are met. Only SH and CH tested load
cells are allowed under the modular approach, but no NH load cells.

> F.2.1 Accuracy classes

The accuracy classes including temperature ranges and the evaluation of
stability against humidity and creep of load cell(s) (LC) must meet the
requirements for the weighing instrument (WI).

> Table 13: Corresponding accuracy classes

  ---------- ------------------------------------------------------- ------------------------------------------------------- ------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------ -------------------
             Accuracy                                                                                                                                                                                                                      Reference

  WI         ![](media/image18.jpeg){width="0.24791666666666667in"   ![](media/image19.jpeg){width="0.24791666666666667in"   ![](media/image20.png){width="0.25416666666666665in"   ![](media/image21.png){width="0.25416666666666665in"   OIML R76
             height="0.1375in"}                                      height="0.1451388888888889in"}                          height="0.13402777777777777in"}                        height="0.14097222222222222in"}                        

  LC         A                                                       A\*), B                                                 B\*), C                                                C, D                                                   OIML R60
  ---------- ------------------------------------------------------- ------------------------------------------------------- ------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------ -------------------

> \*) if the temperature ranges are sufficiently and the evaluation of
> stability against humidity and creep correspond to the requirement in
> the lower class.
>
> F.2.2 Fraction of the maximum permissible error

If no value for the load cell is indicated in the Certificate of
Conformity, then *p*~LC~ = 0.7. According to\
No 3.10.2.1 the fraction may be 0.3 ≤ *p*~LC~ ≤ 0.8.

> F.2.3 Temperature limits

If no value for the load cell is indicated in the Test Certificate, then
*T*~min~ = -10°C and *T*~max~ = 40°C. According to No 3.9.2.2 the
temperature range may be limited.

> F.2.4 Maximum capacity of the load cell

The maximum capacity of the load cell shall satisfy the condition:

*E*~max~ ≥ *Q* • *Max* • *R* / *N*

> F.2.5 Minimum dead load of the load cell

The minimum load caused by the load receptor must equal or exceed the
minimum dead load of a load cell ( A lot of load cells have *E*~min~ =
0) :

*E*~min~ ≤ *DL* • *R* / *N*

> F.2.6 Maximum number of load cell intervals

For each load cell the maximum number of load cell intervals *n*~LC~
(see OIML R 60) shall not be less than the number of verification scale
intervals n of the instrument:

*n*~LC~ ≥ *n*

On a multiple range or multi-interval instrument, this applies to any
individual weighing range or partial weighing range:

*n*~LC~ ≥ *n*~i~

> On a **multi-interval** instrument, the minimum dead load output
> return *DR* (see OIML R 60) shall satisfy the condition:

*DR* • *E* / *E*~max~ ≤ 0.5 • *e*~1~ • *R* / *N* resp. *DR* / *E*~max~ ≤
0.5 • *e*~1~ / *Max*

> where *E* = *Max* • *R* / *N* is the partial loading of the load cell
> when loading the weighing instrument with *Max*.

Acceptable solution

Where *DR* is not known, the condition *n*~LC~ ≥ *Max* / *e*~1~ should
be satisfied.

> Furthermore on a **multiple range** instrument where the same load
> cell(s) is (are) used for more than one range, the minimum dead load
> output return *DR* of the load cell (see OIML R 60) shall satisfy the
> condition

*DR* • *E* / *E*~max~ ≤ *e*~1~ • *R* / *N* resp. *DR* / *E*~max~ ≤
*e*~1~ / *Max*

Acceptable solution

Where *DR* is not known, the condition *n*~LC~ ≥ 0.4 •· *Max* ~r~ /
*e*~1~ should be satisfied.

> F.2.7 Minimum load cell verification interval

The minimum load verification interval *v*~min~ (see OIML R 60) shall
not be greater than the verification scale interval e multiplied by the
reduction ratio R of the load transmitting device and divided by the
square root of the number N of load cells, as applicable:

*v*~min~ ≤ *e*~1~ •· *R* / √*N*

Note: *v*~min~ is measured in mass units. The formula applies to both
analogue and digital load cells.

On a multiple range instrument where the same load cell(s) is (are) used
for more than one range, or a multi-interval instrument, *e* is to be
replaced by *e*~1~.

> F.2.8 Input resistance of a load cell

The input resistance of a load cell R~LC~ is limited by the indicator

*R*~LC~ / *N* has to meet the range of the indicator *R*~L\ min~ to
*R*~L\ max~

> F.2.9 Rated output of a load cell

Change of output signal of the load cell related to input voltage after
loading with *E*~max~ , normally in mV/V

\_\_\_\_\_

*Note:*

For a more moderate calculation the following relative values are
introduced in OIML R60

*Y* = *E* ~max~ / *v* ~min~

*Z* = *E* ~max~ / (2\**DR*)

> F.3 Separately tested indicators or analogue data processing devices

Indicators and analogue data processing devices that have been tested
separately according to Annex C may be used without repeated testing if
a respective OIML certificate exists and the requirements in 3.10.2.1,
3.10.2.2, and 3.10.2.3 are met.

> F.3.1 Accuracy class

The accuracy classes including temperature ranges and the evaluation of
stability against humidity must meet the requirements for the weighing
instrument (WI).

> Table 14: Corresponding accuracy classes

  ------- ------------------------------------------------------- ------------------------------------------------------- ------------------------------------------------------- ------------------------------------------------------ ----------------
          Accuracy                                                                                                                                                                                                                       Reference

  WI      ![](media/image18.jpeg){width="0.24791666666666667in"   ![](media/image19.jpeg){width="0.24791666666666667in"   ![](media/image20.png){width="0.25416666666666665in"    ![](media/image21.png){width="0.25416666666666665in"   OIML R76
          height="0.1375in"}                                      height="0.1451388888888889in"}                          height="0.13402777777777777in"}                         height="0.14097222222222222in"}                        

  IND     ![](media/image18.jpeg){width="0.24791666666666667in"   ![](media/image18.jpeg){width="0.24791666666666667in"   ![](media/image19.jpeg){width="0.24791666666666667in"   ![](media/image20.png){width="0.25416666666666665in"   OIML R76
          height="0.1375in"}                                      height="0.1375in"}\*)                                   height="0.1451388888888889in"}\*)                       height="0.13402777777777777in"}                        
                                                                  ![](media/image19.jpeg){width="0.24791666666666667in"   ![](media/image20.png){width="0.25416666666666665in"    ![](media/image21.png){width="0.25416666666666665in"   
                                                                  height="0.1451388888888889in"}                          height="0.13402777777777777in"}                         height="0.14097222222222222in"}                        
  ------- ------------------------------------------------------- ------------------------------------------------------- ------------------------------------------------------- ------------------------------------------------------ ----------------

> \*) if the temperature ranges are sufficiently and the evaluation of
> stability against humidity correspond to the requirement in the lower
> class.
>
> F.3.2 Fraction of the maximum permissible error

If no value for the indicator is indicated in the Certificate of
Conformity, then *p*~ind~ = 0.5. According to\
No 3.10.2.1 the fraction may be 0.3 ≤ *p*~ind~ ≤ 0.8.

> F.3.3 Temperature limits

If no value for the load cell is indicated in the Test Certificate, then
*T*~min~ = -10°C and *T*~max~ = 40°C. According to No 3.9.2.2 the
temperature range may be limited.

> F.3.4 Maximum number of verification intervals

For each indicator the maximum number of verification intervals *n*~ind~
shall not be less than the number of verification scale intervals n of
the weighing instrument:

*n*~ind~ ≥ *n*

On a multiple range or multi-interval instrument, this applies to any
individual weighing range or partial weighing range:

*n*~ind~ ≥ *n*~i~

> In case of **multi-interval** or **multiple range** application these
> functions must be included in the certified indicator.
>
> F.3.5 Electrical data with regard to the weighing instrument
>
> *U*~exc~ (V) Load cell excitation voltage
>
> *U*~min~ (mV) General minimum input voltage for indicator
>
> *∆u*~min~ (μV) Minimum input voltage per verification scale interval
> for the indicator
>
> The signal per verification scale interval *∆*u is calculated as
> follows:
>
> ![](media/image22.wmf){width="1.2986111111111112in"
> height="0.4013888888888889in"} for multiple range or multi-interval
> WIs *e* = *e*~1~
>
> *U~MRmin~* (mV) Measuring range minimum voltage
>
> *U~MRmax~* (mV) Measuring range maximum voltage
>
> *R*~Lmin~, (Ω) Minimum load cell impedance
>
> *R*~Lmax~ (Ω) Maximum load cell impedance
>
> Limits of allowed impedance range for the electronic indicator for the
> actual applied load cell input impedance(s).
>
> F.3.5.1 Connection cable
>
> [Additional]{.underline} cable between the indicator and the load cell
> or the load cell junction box respectively (only allowed with
> indicators using six wire system, i.e. **sense system**) must have
> been specified in the Certificate of Conformity for the indicator.
>
> The most simple procedure is to specify in the indicator certificate a
> value for the ratio cable length to cross section of one wire (m/mm²)
> for a given material (copper, aluminium etc.)
>
> In other cases it must be calculated out of length (m), cross section
> (mm^2^), the conductor material data and the maximum ohmic resistance
> (Ω) per single wire.
>
> *Note:*
>
> For cable with different cross sections of the wires the connection
> for sense-wire is of interest.
>
> When using lightning barriers or barriers for explosion-proof
> application, the excitation voltage at the load cells must be checked,
> to prove condition for minimum input voltage per verification scale
> interval of the indicator.
>
> F.4 Compatibility checks for modules with analogue output

The relevant quantities and characteristics identified which together
establish the compatibility have been included on the following form.
These form cover the complete instrument, the electronic indicator and
the load cell(s), plus 4 conditions referred to in R76 and another 6
conditions which are for technical reasons as a result of the section
itself. The tables, where the data shall be entered allow for an easy
decision to be taken as to whether or not they are satisfied.

The manufacturer of the weighing instrument can check and prove this
compatibility by filling in the form given in the following page.

Chapter F.6 provides typical examples of filled-in forms for
compatibility checks.

**Form: Check of Compatibility**

<table>
<colgroup>
<col style="width: 5%" />
<col style="width: 11%" />
<col style="width: 11%" />
<col style="width: 11%" />
<col style="width: 11%" />
<col style="width: 7%" />
<col style="width: 5%" />
<col style="width: 14%" />
<col style="width: 0%" />
<col style="width: 4%" />
<col style="width: 7%" />
<col style="width: 3%" />
<col style="width: 3%" />
<col style="width: 0%" />
</colgroup>
<tbody>
<tr class="odd">
<td colspan="9">(1) Accuracy class of load cell (LC), indicator (IND)
and weighing instrument (WI)</td>
<td colspan="5"></td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td></td>
<td>LC</td>
<td>&amp;</td>
<td>IND</td>
<td colspan="3">equal or better</td>
<td>WI</td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td>passed</td>
<td colspan="2">failed</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td>&amp;</td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="3">equal or better</td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td colspan="14">2) Temp.limits of the weighing instr.(WI) compared with
the temp.limits of the load cell (LC) and the indicator (IND) in °C</td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td>LC</td>
<td></td>
<td>IND</td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td>WI</td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td>passed</td>
<td colspan="2">failed</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td></td>
<td><em>T</em><sub>min</sub></td>
<td></td>
<td>&amp;</td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2">≤</td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td></td>
<td><em>T</em><sub>max</sub></td>
<td></td>
<td>&amp;</td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2">≥</td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td colspan="14">(3) Sum of the squares of the fractions
<em>p</em><sub>i</sub> of the max. permissible errors of connecting
elements, indicator and load cells</td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td></td>
<td><em>p</em><sub>con</sub><sup>2</sup></td>
<td>+</td>
<td><em>p</em><sub>ind</sub><sup>2</sup></td>
<td>+</td>
<td colspan="2"><em>p</em><sub>LC</sub><sup>2</sup></td>
<td>≤ 1</td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td>passed</td>
<td colspan="2">failed</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td>+</td>
<td></td>
<td>+</td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td>≤ 1</td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td colspan="14">(4) Maximum number of verification scale intervals of
the indicator and number of scale intervals</td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td colspan="3">of the weighing instrument</td>
<td></td>
<td><em>n</em><sub>ind</sub></td>
<td colspan="2">≥</td>
<td><em>n</em><sub>(i)</sub>= <em>Max</em><sub>(i)</sub>
/<em>e</em><sub>(i)</sub></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td>passed</td>
<td colspan="2">failed</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td></td>
<td colspan="3"><blockquote>
<p>One range weighing instrument</p>
</blockquote></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2">≥</td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"><blockquote>
<p>Multi-interval or</p>
</blockquote></td>
<td><blockquote>
<p>i = 1</p>
</blockquote></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2">≥</td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"><blockquote>
<p>multiple range WI</p>
</blockquote></td>
<td><blockquote>
<p>i = 2</p>
</blockquote></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2">≥</td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td><blockquote>
<p>i = 3</p>
</blockquote></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2">≥</td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td colspan="14">(5) Maximum capacity of load cells must be compatible
to Max of the weighing instrument</td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td></td>
<td colspan="5">Factor <em>Q</em> : <em>Q</em> =
(<em>Max</em><strong><sub>r</sub></strong> + <em>DL</em> + <em>IZSR</em>
+ <em>NUD</em> + <em>T</em>+)/<em>Max</em><strong><sub>r</sub></strong>
=</td>
<td colspan="4"><em>.....</em></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"><em>Q</em>*<em>Max</em>*<em>R</em>/<em>N</em></td>
<td colspan="2">≤</td>
<td colspan="2"><em>E</em><sub>max</sub></td>
<td></td>
<td>passed</td>
<td colspan="2">failed</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td colspan="2">≤</td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td colspan="14">(6a) Maximum number of verification scale intervals of
the load cell and number of scale intervals</td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td colspan="3">of the weighing instrument</td>
<td></td>
<td><em>n<sub>LC</sub></em></td>
<td colspan="2">≥</td>
<td><em>n</em><sub>(i)</sub>= <em>Max</em><sub>(i)</sub>
/<em>e</em><sub>(i)</sub></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td>passed</td>
<td colspan="2">failed</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"><blockquote>
<p>One range weighing instrument</p>
</blockquote></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2">≥</td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"><blockquote>
<p>Multi-interval or</p>
</blockquote></td>
<td><blockquote>
<p>i = 1</p>
</blockquote></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2">≥</td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"><blockquote>
<p>multiple range WI</p>
</blockquote></td>
<td><blockquote>
<p>i = 2</p>
</blockquote></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2">≥</td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td><blockquote>
<p>i = 3</p>
</blockquote></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2">≥</td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td colspan="14">(6b) Minimum dead load output return of the load cell
and smallest verification scale interval e<sub>1</sub> of a
multi-interval WI</td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"><em>n</em><sub>LC</sub> or <em>Z</em> =
<em>E</em><sub>max</sub> /(2*<em>DR</em>)</td>
<td colspan="2">≥</td>
<td><em>Max</em><sub>r</sub> / <em>e</em><sub>1</sub></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td>passed</td>
<td colspan="2">failed</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td colspan="2">≥</td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td colspan="14">(6c) Minimum dead load output return of the load cell
and smallest verification scale interval e<sub>1</sub> of a multiple
range WI</td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"><em>n<sub>LC</sub></em> or <em>Z</em> =
<em>E</em><sub>max</sub> /(2*<em>DR</em>)</td>
<td colspan="2">≥</td>
<td>0.4*<em>Max</em><sub>r</sub>/<em>e</em><sub>1</sub></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td>passed</td>
<td colspan="2">failed</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td colspan="2">≥</td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td colspan="14">(6d) Actual dead load of the load receptor to the
minimum dead load of the load cells in kg</td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td><p id="dlrn" class="heading"><em>DL*R/N</em></p></td>
<td colspan="2">≥</td>
<td><em>E</em><sub>min</sub></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td>passed</td>
<td colspan="2">failed</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2">≥</td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td colspan="14">(7) Verification scale interval of the weighing
instrument and minimum load cell scale interval (in kg) must be
compatible</td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td><em>e</em>*<em>R</em>/√<em>N</em></td>
<td colspan="2">≥</td>
<td><em>v</em><sub>min</sub>= <em>E</em><sub>max</sub> /<em>Y</em></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td>passed</td>
<td colspan="2">failed</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2">≥</td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td colspan="14">(8) Minimum input voltage in general for the electronic
indicator and minimum input voltage per verification</td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td colspan="14">scale interval and actual output of the load cells</td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td colspan="3"><blockquote>
<p>Minimum input voltage in general</p>
</blockquote></td>
<td colspan="2"><em>U</em> =
<em>C</em>*<em>U</em><sub>exc</sub>*<em>R</em>*<em>DL</em>
/(<em>E</em><sub>max</sub>*<em>N</em>)</td>
<td colspan="2">≥</td>
<td><em>U</em><sub>min</sub></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td>passed</td>
<td colspan="2">failed</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td colspan="3"><blockquote>
<p>for electr. ind. ( unloaded WI )</p>
</blockquote></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td colspan="2">≥</td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td colspan="3"><blockquote>
<p>minimum input voltage per</p>
</blockquote></td>
<td colspan="2"><em>∆u</em> =
<em>C</em>*<em>U</em><sub>exc</sub>*<em>R</em>*<em>e</em>
/(<em>E</em><sub>max</sub>*<em>N</em>)</td>
<td colspan="2">≥</td>
<td><em>∆u</em><sub>min</sub></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td>passed</td>
<td colspan="2">failed</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td colspan="3"><blockquote>
<p>verification scale interval</p>
</blockquote></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td colspan="2">≥</td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td colspan="14">(9) Allowed impedance range for the electronic
indicator and actual load cell impedance in Ω</td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td><em>R</em><sub>Lmin</sub></td>
<td>≤</td>
<td><em>R</em><sub>LC</sub> / <em>N</em></td>
<td colspan="2">≤</td>
<td><em>R</em><sub>Lmax</sub></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td>passed</td>
<td colspan="2">failed</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td>≤</td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2">≤</td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td colspan="12">(10) Length of extension cable between the load cell(s)
and indicator per wire cross section of this cable in m/mm²</td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td>(<em>L</em>/<em>A</em>)</td>
<td colspan="2">≤</td>
<td>(<em>L</em>/<em>A</em>)<sub>max</sub></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td>passed</td>
<td colspan="2">failed</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2">≤</td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>

> F.5 Compatibility checks for modules with digital output

For weighing modules and other digital modules or devices (see Figure 1)
no special compatibility checks are necessary; testing of correct
functioning of one complete instrument is sufficient. If there is no
correct data transmission between the modules, and probably other
components/devices the instrument will not work at all or some functions
will fail, e.g. zero setting or tare.

For digital load cells the same compatibility check as in F.4 applies,
with the exception of the conditions No (8), (9) and (10) in the form.

> F.6 Examples of compatibility checks for modules with analogue output
>
> F.6.1 Road vehicle weigher with one measuring range (Example No 1)

[Weighing instrument]{.underline}

accuracy class ![](media/image6.jpeg){width="0.3in"
height="0.2298611111111111in"}

maximum capacity *Max* 60 t

verification scale interval *e* = 20 kg

number of load cells *N* = 4

without leverwork *R* = 1

dead load of load receptor *DL* = 12 t

initial zero setting range *IZSR* = 10 t

correction for non uniform distributed load *NUD* = 30 t

additive tare *T*+ = 0

temperature range -10 °C to +40 °C

cable length *L* = 100 m

cross section of wire *A* = 0.75 mm^2^

[Indicator]{.underline}

accuracy class ![](media/image6.jpeg){width="0.3in"
height="0.2298611111111111in"}

max. number of verification scale intervals *n*~ind~ = 3000

load cell excitation voltage *U*~exc~ = 12 V

minimum input voltage *U*~min~ = 1 mV

min. input voltage per verification scale interval Δ*u*~min~ = 1 µV

min./max. load cell impedance 30 Ω to 1000 Ω

temperature range -10 °C to +40 °C

fraction of mpe *p*~ind~ = 0.5

cable connection 6 wires

max. value of cable length per wire cross section (*L*/*A*)~max~ = 150
m/mm^2^

[Load cell(s)]{.underline}

accuracy class C

maximum capacity *E*~max~ = 30 t

minimum dead load *E*~min~ = 2 t

rated output *C* = 2 mV/V

max. number of verification scale intervals *n*~LC~ = 3000

ratio *E*~max~ / *v*~min~ *Y* = 6000

ratio *E*~max~ / (2\**DR*) *Z* = 3000

input resistance of one load cell *R*~LC~ = 350 Ω

temperature range -10 °C to +40 °C

fraction of mpe *p*~LC~ = 0.7

[Connecting elements]{.underline}

fraction of mpe *p*~con~ = 0.5

**Check of compatibility (example No 1)**

<table>
<colgroup>
<col style="width: 5%" />
<col style="width: 11%" />
<col style="width: 11%" />
<col style="width: 11%" />
<col style="width: 11%" />
<col style="width: 6%" />
<col style="width: 7%" />
<col style="width: 14%" />
<col style="width: 0%" />
<col style="width: 4%" />
<col style="width: 7%" />
<col style="width: 3%" />
<col style="width: 3%" />
<col style="width: 0%" />
</colgroup>
<tbody>
<tr class="odd">
<td colspan="9">(1) Accuracy class of load cell (LC), indicator (IND)
and weighing instrument (WI)</td>
<td colspan="5"></td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td></td>
<td>LC</td>
<td>&amp;</td>
<td>IND</td>
<td colspan="3">equal or better</td>
<td>WI</td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td>passed</td>
<td colspan="2">failed</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td></td>
<td>C</td>
<td>&amp;</td>
<td><p><img src="media/image6.jpeg"
style="width:0.24028in;height:0.18125in" /></p>
<p>equal or better</p></td>
<td colspan="3"><img src="media/image6.jpeg"
style="width:0.24514in;height:0.18819in" /></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="3"></td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td colspan="14">2) Temp.limits of the weighing instr.(WI) compared with
the temp.limits of the load cell (LC) and the indicator (IND) in °C</td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td>LC</td>
<td></td>
<td>IND</td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td>WI</td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td>passed</td>
<td colspan="2">failed</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td></td>
<td><em>T</em><sub>min</sub></td>
<td>-10°C</td>
<td>&amp;</td>
<td>-10°C</td>
<td colspan="2">≤</td>
<td>-10°C</td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td></td>
<td><em>T</em><sub>max</sub></td>
<td>40°C</td>
<td>&amp;</td>
<td>40°C</td>
<td colspan="2">≥</td>
<td>40°C</td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td colspan="14">(3) Sum of the squares of the fractions
<em>p</em><sub>i</sub> of the max. permissible errors of connecting
elements, indicator and load cells</td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td></td>
<td><em>p</em><sub>con</sub><sup>2</sup></td>
<td>+</td>
<td><em>p</em><sub>ind</sub><sup>2</sup></td>
<td>+</td>
<td colspan="2"><em>p</em><sub>LC</sub><sup>2</sup></td>
<td>≤ 1</td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td>passed</td>
<td colspan="2">failed</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td></td>
<td>0.25</td>
<td>+</td>
<td>0.25</td>
<td>+</td>
<td colspan="2">0.49</td>
<td>≤ 1</td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td colspan="14">(4) Maximum number of verification scale intervals of
the indicator and number of scale intervals</td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td colspan="3">of the weighing instrument</td>
<td></td>
<td><em>n</em><sub>ind</sub></td>
<td colspan="2">≥</td>
<td><em>n</em><sub>(i)</sub>= <em>Max</em><sub>(i)</sub>
/<em>e</em><sub>(i)</sub></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td>passed</td>
<td colspan="2">failed</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td></td>
<td colspan="3"><blockquote>
<p>One range weighing instrument</p>
</blockquote></td>
<td>3000</td>
<td colspan="2">≥</td>
<td>3000</td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"><blockquote>
<p>Multi-interval or</p>
</blockquote></td>
<td><blockquote>
<p>i = 1</p>
</blockquote></td>
<td>-</td>
<td colspan="2">≥</td>
<td>-</td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"><blockquote>
<p>multiple range WI</p>
</blockquote></td>
<td><blockquote>
<p>i = 2</p>
</blockquote></td>
<td>-</td>
<td colspan="2">≥</td>
<td>-</td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td><blockquote>
<p>i = 3</p>
</blockquote></td>
<td>-</td>
<td colspan="2">≥</td>
<td>-</td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td colspan="14">(5) Maximum capacity of load cells must be compatible
to Max of the weighing instrument</td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td></td>
<td colspan="5">Factor <em>Q</em> : <em>Q</em> =
(<em>Max</em><strong><sub>r</sub></strong> + <em>DL</em> + <em>IZSR</em>
+ <em>NUD</em> + <em>T</em>+)/<em>Max</em><strong><sub>r</sub></strong>
=</td>
<td colspan="4"><em>1.867</em></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"><em>Q</em>*<em>Max</em>*<em>R</em>/<em>N</em></td>
<td colspan="2">≤</td>
<td colspan="2"><em>E</em><sub>max</sub></td>
<td></td>
<td>passed</td>
<td colspan="2">failed</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2">28000 kg</td>
<td colspan="2">≤</td>
<td colspan="2">30000 kg</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td colspan="14">(6a) Maximum number of verification scale intervals of
the load cell and number of scale intervals</td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td colspan="3">of the weighing instrument</td>
<td></td>
<td><em>n<sub>LC</sub></em></td>
<td colspan="2">≥</td>
<td><em>n</em><sub>(i)</sub>= <em>Max</em><sub>(i)</sub>
/<em>e</em><sub>(i)</sub></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td>passed</td>
<td colspan="2">failed</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"><blockquote>
<p>One range weighing instrument</p>
</blockquote></td>
<td></td>
<td>3000</td>
<td colspan="2">≥</td>
<td>3000</td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"><blockquote>
<p>Multi-interval or</p>
</blockquote></td>
<td><blockquote>
<p>i = 1</p>
</blockquote></td>
<td>-</td>
<td colspan="2">≥</td>
<td>-</td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"><blockquote>
<p>multiple range WI</p>
</blockquote></td>
<td><blockquote>
<p>i = 2</p>
</blockquote></td>
<td>-</td>
<td colspan="2">≥</td>
<td>-</td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td><blockquote>
<p>i = 3</p>
</blockquote></td>
<td>-</td>
<td colspan="2">≥</td>
<td>-</td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td colspan="14">(6b) Minimum dead load output return of the load cell
and smallest verification scale interval e<sub>1</sub> of a
multi-interval WI</td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"><em>n</em><sub>LC</sub> or <em>Z</em> =
<em>E</em><sub>max</sub> /(2*<em>DR</em>)</td>
<td colspan="2">≥</td>
<td><em>Max</em><sub>r</sub> / <em>e</em><sub>1</sub></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td>passed</td>
<td colspan="2">failed</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2">-</td>
<td colspan="2">≥</td>
<td>-</td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td colspan="14">(6c) Minimum dead load output return of the load cell
and smallest verification scale interval e<sub>1</sub> of a multiple
range WI</td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"><em>n<sub>LC</sub></em> or <em>Z</em> =
<em>E</em><sub>max</sub> /(2*<em>DR</em>)</td>
<td colspan="2">≥</td>
<td>0.4*<em>Max</em><sub>r</sub>/<em>e</em><sub>1</sub></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td>passed</td>
<td colspan="2">failed</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2">-</td>
<td colspan="2">≥</td>
<td>-</td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td colspan="14">(6d) Actual dead load of the load receptor to the
minimum dead load of the load cells in kg</td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td><p id="dlrn-1" class="heading"><em>DL*R/N</em></p></td>
<td colspan="2">≥</td>
<td><em>E</em><sub>min</sub></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td>passed</td>
<td colspan="2">failed</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td>3000 kg</td>
<td colspan="2">≥</td>
<td>2000 kg</td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td colspan="14">(7) Verification scale interval of the weighing
instrument and minimum load cell scale interval (in kg) must be
compatible</td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td><em>e</em>*<em>R</em>/√<em>N</em></td>
<td colspan="2">≥</td>
<td><em>v</em><sub>min</sub>= <em>E</em><sub>max</sub> /<em>Y</em></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td>passed</td>
<td colspan="2">failed</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td>10.00 kg</td>
<td colspan="2">≥</td>
<td>5.00 kg</td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td colspan="14">(8) Minimum input voltage in general for the electronic
indicator and minimum input voltage per verification</td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td colspan="14">scale interval and actual output of the load cells</td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td colspan="3"><blockquote>
<p>Minimum input voltage in general</p>
</blockquote></td>
<td colspan="2"><em>U</em> =
<em>C</em>*<em>U</em><sub>exc</sub>*<em>R</em>*<em>DL</em>
/(<em>E</em><sub>max</sub>*<em>N</em>)</td>
<td colspan="2">≥</td>
<td><em>U</em><sub>min</sub></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td>passed</td>
<td colspan="2">failed</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td colspan="3"><blockquote>
<p>for electr. ind. ( unloaded WI )</p>
</blockquote></td>
<td colspan="2">2.40 mV</td>
<td colspan="2">≥</td>
<td>1 mV</td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td colspan="3"><blockquote>
<p>minimum input voltage per</p>
</blockquote></td>
<td colspan="2"><em>∆u</em> =
<em>C</em>*<em>U</em><sub>exc</sub>*<em>R</em>*<em>e</em>
/(<em>E</em><sub>max</sub>*<em>N</em>)</td>
<td colspan="2">≥</td>
<td><em>∆u</em><sub>min</sub></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td>passed</td>
<td colspan="2">failed</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td colspan="3"><blockquote>
<p>verification scale interval</p>
</blockquote></td>
<td colspan="2">4.00 µV</td>
<td colspan="2">≥</td>
<td>1.0 µV</td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td colspan="14">(9) Allowed impedance range for the electronic
indicator and actual load cell impedance in Ω</td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td><em>R</em><sub>Lmin</sub></td>
<td>≤</td>
<td><em>R</em><sub>LC</sub> / <em>N</em></td>
<td colspan="2">≤</td>
<td><em>R</em><sub>Lmax</sub></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td>passed</td>
<td colspan="2">failed</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td>30</td>
<td>≤</td>
<td>87.5</td>
<td colspan="2">≤</td>
<td>1000</td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td colspan="12">(10) Length of extension cable between the load cell(s)
and indicator per wire cross section of this cable in m/mm²</td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td>(<em>L</em>/<em>A</em>)</td>
<td colspan="2">≤</td>
<td>(<em>L</em>/<em>A</em>)<sub>max</sub></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td>passed</td>
<td colspan="2">failed</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td>133.3</td>
<td colspan="2">≤</td>
<td>150</td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>

> F.6.2 Industrial scale with three measuring ranges (Example No 2)

[Weighing instrument]{.underline}

accuracy class ![](media/image6.jpeg){width="0.3in"
height="0.2298611111111111in"}

maximum capacity *Max* 5000 kg

*Max* 2 = 2000 kg

*Max* 1 = 1000 kg

verification scale interval *e*3 = 2 kg,

*e*2 = 1 kg

*e*1 = 0.5 kg

number of load cells *N* = 4

without leverwork *R* = 1

dead load of load receptor *DL* = 250 kg

initial zero setting range *IZSR* = 500 kg

correction for non uniform distributed load *NUD* = 1000 kg

additive tare T+ = 0

temperature range -10 °C to +40 °C

cable length *L* = 20 m

cross section of wire *A* = 0.75 mm^2^

[Indicator]{.underline}

accuracy class ![](media/image6.jpeg){width="0.3in"
height="0.2298611111111111in"}

max. number of verification scale intervals *n*~ind~ = 3000

load cell excitation voltage *U*~exc~ = 10 V

minimum input voltage *U*~min~ = 0.5 mV

min. input voltage per verification scale interval Δ*u*~min~ = 1 µV

min./max. load cell impedance 30 Ω to 1000 Ω

temperature range -10 °C to +40 °C

fraction of mpe *p*~ind~ = 0.5

cable connection 6 wires

max. value of cable length per wire cross section (*L*/*A*)~max~ = 150
m/mm^2^

[Load cell(s)]{.underline}

accuracy class C

maximum capacity *E*~max~ = 2000 kg

minimum dead load *E*~min~ = 0 t

rated output *C* = 2 mV/V

max. number of verification scale intervals *n*~LC~ = 3000

minimum verification scale interval *v*~min~ = 0.2 kg

ratio *E*~max~ / (2\**DR*) *Z* = 5000

input resistance of one load cell *R*~LC~ = 350 Ω

temperature range -10 °C to +40 °C

fraction of mpe *p*~LC~ = 0.7

[Connecting elements]{.underline}

fraction of mpe *p*~con~ = 0.5

**Check of compatibility (example No 2)**

<table>
<colgroup>
<col style="width: 5%" />
<col style="width: 11%" />
<col style="width: 11%" />
<col style="width: 11%" />
<col style="width: 11%" />
<col style="width: 7%" />
<col style="width: 5%" />
<col style="width: 14%" />
<col style="width: 0%" />
<col style="width: 4%" />
<col style="width: 7%" />
<col style="width: 3%" />
<col style="width: 3%" />
<col style="width: 0%" />
</colgroup>
<tbody>
<tr class="odd">
<td colspan="9">(1) Accuracy class of load cell (LC), indicator (IND)
and weighing instrument (WI)</td>
<td colspan="5"></td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td></td>
<td>LC</td>
<td>&amp;</td>
<td>IND</td>
<td colspan="3">equal or better</td>
<td>WI</td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td>passed</td>
<td colspan="2">failed</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td></td>
<td>C</td>
<td>&amp;</td>
<td><p><img src="media/image6.jpeg"
style="width:0.24028in;height:0.18125in" /></p>
<p>equal or better</p></td>
<td colspan="3"><img src="media/image6.jpeg"
style="width:0.24028in;height:0.17847in" /></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="3"></td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td colspan="14">2) Temp.limits of the weighing instr.(WI) compared with
the temp.limits of the load cell (LC) and the indicator (IND) in °C</td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td>LC</td>
<td></td>
<td>IND</td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td>WI</td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td>passed</td>
<td colspan="2">failed</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td></td>
<td><em>T</em><sub>min</sub></td>
<td>-10 °C</td>
<td>&amp;</td>
<td>-10 °C</td>
<td colspan="2">≤</td>
<td>-10 °C</td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td></td>
<td><em>T</em><sub>max</sub></td>
<td>40 °C</td>
<td>&amp;</td>
<td>40 °C</td>
<td colspan="2">≥</td>
<td>40 °C</td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td colspan="14">(3) Sum of the squares of the fractions
<em>p</em><sub>i</sub> of the max. permissible errors of connecting
elements, indicator and load cells</td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td></td>
<td><em>p</em><sub>con</sub><sup>2</sup></td>
<td>+</td>
<td><em>p</em><sub>ind</sub><sup>2</sup></td>
<td>+</td>
<td colspan="2"><em>p</em><sub>LC</sub><sup>2</sup></td>
<td>≤ 1</td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td>passed</td>
<td colspan="2">failed</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td></td>
<td>0.25</td>
<td>+</td>
<td>0.25</td>
<td>+</td>
<td colspan="2">0.49</td>
<td>≤ 1</td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td colspan="14">(4) Maximum number of verification scale intervals of
the indicator and number of scale intervals</td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td colspan="3">of the weighing instrument</td>
<td></td>
<td><em>n</em><sub>ind</sub></td>
<td colspan="2">≥</td>
<td><em>n</em><sub>(i)</sub>= <em>Max</em><sub>(i)</sub>
/<em>e</em><sub>(i)</sub></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td>passed</td>
<td colspan="2">failed</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td></td>
<td colspan="3"><blockquote>
<p>One range weighing instrument</p>
</blockquote></td>
<td>-</td>
<td colspan="2">≥</td>
<td>-</td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"><blockquote>
<p>Multi-interval or</p>
</blockquote></td>
<td><blockquote>
<p>i = 1</p>
</blockquote></td>
<td>3000</td>
<td colspan="2">≥</td>
<td>2000</td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"><blockquote>
<p>multiple range WI</p>
</blockquote></td>
<td><blockquote>
<p>i = 2</p>
</blockquote></td>
<td>3000</td>
<td colspan="2">≥</td>
<td>2000</td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td><blockquote>
<p>i = 3</p>
</blockquote></td>
<td>3000</td>
<td colspan="2">≥</td>
<td>2500</td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td colspan="14">(5) Maximum capacity of load cells must be compatible
to Max of the weighing instrument</td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td></td>
<td colspan="5">Factor <em>Q</em> : <em>Q</em> =
(<em>Max</em><strong><sub>r</sub></strong> + <em>DL</em> + <em>IZSR</em>
+ <em>NUD</em> + <em>T</em>+)/<em>Max</em><strong><sub>r</sub></strong>
=</td>
<td colspan="4"><em>1.35</em></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"><em>Q</em>*<em>Max</em>*<em>R</em>/<em>N</em></td>
<td colspan="2">≤</td>
<td colspan="2"><em>E</em><sub>max</sub></td>
<td></td>
<td>passed</td>
<td colspan="2">failed</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2">1687.5 kg</td>
<td colspan="2">≤</td>
<td colspan="2">2000 kg</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td colspan="14">(6a) Maximum number of verification scale intervals of
the load cell and number of scale intervals</td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td colspan="3">of the weighing instrument</td>
<td></td>
<td><em>n<sub>LC</sub></em></td>
<td colspan="2">≥</td>
<td><em>n</em><sub>(i)</sub>= <em>Max</em><sub>(i)</sub>
/<em>e</em><sub>(i)</sub></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td>passed</td>
<td colspan="2">failed</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"><blockquote>
<p>One range weighing instrument</p>
</blockquote></td>
<td></td>
<td>-</td>
<td colspan="2">≥</td>
<td>-</td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"><blockquote>
<p>Multi-interval or</p>
</blockquote></td>
<td><blockquote>
<p>i = 1</p>
</blockquote></td>
<td>3000</td>
<td colspan="2">≥</td>
<td>2000</td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"><blockquote>
<p>multiple range WI</p>
</blockquote></td>
<td><blockquote>
<p>i = 2</p>
</blockquote></td>
<td>3000</td>
<td colspan="2">≥</td>
<td>2000</td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td><blockquote>
<p>i = 3</p>
</blockquote></td>
<td>3000</td>
<td colspan="2">≥</td>
<td>2500</td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td colspan="14">(6b) Minimum dead load output return of the load cell
and smallest verification scale interval e<sub>1</sub> of a
multi-interval WI</td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"><em>n</em><sub>LC</sub> or <em>Z</em> =
<em>E</em><sub>max</sub> /(2*<em>DR</em>)</td>
<td colspan="2">≥</td>
<td><em>Max</em><sub>r</sub> / <em>e</em><sub>1</sub></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td>passed</td>
<td colspan="2">failed</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2">-</td>
<td colspan="2">≥</td>
<td>-</td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td colspan="14">(6c) Minimum dead load output return of the load cell
and smallest verification scale interval e<sub>1</sub> of a multiple
range WI</td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"><em>n<sub>LC</sub></em> or <em>Z</em> =
<em>E</em><sub>max</sub> /(2*<em>DR</em>)</td>
<td colspan="2">≥</td>
<td>0.4*<em>Max</em><sub>r</sub>/<em>e</em><sub>1</sub></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td>passed</td>
<td colspan="2">failed</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2">5000</td>
<td colspan="2">≥</td>
<td>4000</td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td colspan="14">(6d) Actual dead load of the load receptor to the
minimum dead load of the load cells in kg</td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td><p id="dlrn-2" class="heading"><em>DL*R/N</em></p></td>
<td colspan="2">≥</td>
<td><em>E</em><sub>min</sub></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td>passed</td>
<td colspan="2">failed</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td>62.5 kg</td>
<td colspan="2">≥</td>
<td>0 kg</td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td colspan="14">(7) Verification scale interval of the weighing
instrument and minimum load cell scale interval (in kg) must be
compatible</td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td><em>e</em>*<em>R</em>/√<em>N</em></td>
<td colspan="2">≥</td>
<td><em>v</em><sub>min</sub>= <em>E</em><sub>max</sub> /<em>Y</em></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td>passed</td>
<td colspan="2">failed</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td>0.25 kg</td>
<td colspan="2">≥</td>
<td>0.2 kg</td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td colspan="14">(8) Minimum input voltage in general for the electronic
indicator and minimum input voltage per verification</td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td colspan="14">scale interval and actual output of the load cells</td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td colspan="3"><blockquote>
<p>Minimum input voltage in general</p>
</blockquote></td>
<td colspan="2"><em>U</em> =
<em>C</em>*<em>U</em><sub>exc</sub>*<em>R</em>*<em>DL</em>
/(<em>E</em><sub>max</sub>*<em>N</em>)</td>
<td colspan="2">≥</td>
<td><em>U</em><sub>min</sub></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td>passed</td>
<td colspan="2">failed</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td colspan="3"><blockquote>
<p>for electr. ind. ( unloaded WI )</p>
</blockquote></td>
<td colspan="2">0.625 mV</td>
<td colspan="2">≥</td>
<td>0.5 mV</td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td colspan="3"><blockquote>
<p>minimum input voltage per</p>
</blockquote></td>
<td colspan="2"><em>∆u</em> =
<em>C</em>*<em>U</em><sub>exc</sub>*<em>R</em>*<em>e</em>
/(<em>E</em><sub>max</sub>*<em>N</em>)</td>
<td colspan="2">≥</td>
<td><em>∆u</em><sub>min</sub></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td>passed</td>
<td colspan="2">failed</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td colspan="3"><blockquote>
<p>verification scale interval</p>
</blockquote></td>
<td colspan="2">1.25 µV</td>
<td colspan="2">≥</td>
<td>1 µV</td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td colspan="14">(9) Allowed impedance range for the electronic
indicator and actual load cell impedance in Ω</td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td><em>R</em><sub>Lmin</sub></td>
<td>≤</td>
<td><em>R</em><sub>LC</sub> / <em>N</em></td>
<td colspan="2">≤</td>
<td><em>R</em><sub>Lmax</sub></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td>passed</td>
<td colspan="2">failed</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td>30</td>
<td>≤</td>
<td>87.5</td>
<td colspan="2">≤</td>
<td>1000</td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td colspan="12">(10) Length of extension cable between the load cell(s)
and indicator per wire cross section of this cable in m/mm²</td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td>(<em>L</em>/<em>A</em>)</td>
<td colspan="2">≤</td>
<td>(<em>L</em>/<em>A</em>)<sub>max</sub></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td>passed</td>
<td colspan="2">failed</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td>26.67</td>
<td colspan="2">≤</td>
<td>150.0</td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>

ANNEX G

(mandatory for software-controlled digital devices and instruments)

ADDITIONAL EXAMINATIONS AND TESTS\
FOR SOFTWARE-CONTROLLED DIGITAL DEVICES and INSTRUMENTS

[Preliminary note]{.underline}:

This Annex applies with the proviso that general examination and test
procedures for software-controlled devices and measuring instruments
will be developed by OIML TC5/SC2.

G.1 Devices and instruments with embedded software (5.5.1)

> Review the descriptive documents according to 8.2.1.2 and check
> whether the manufacturer has described or declared that the software
> is embedded, i.e. that it is used in a fixed hardware and software
> environment and cannot be modified or uploaded via any interface or by
> other means after securing or sealing.
>
> Check whether the securing means are described and provide evidence of
> an intervention.
>
> Check whether there is a software identification that is clearly
> assigned to the legally relevant software and the legally relevant
> functions it performs as described in the documentation submitted by
> the manufacturer.
>
> Check whether the software identification is easily provided by the
> instrument.

G.2 Personal computers and other devices with programmable or loadable
software (5.5.2)

G.2.1 Software documentation

Check whether there is a special software documentation according to
5.5.2.2 (d) supplied by the manufacturer which contains all relevant
information to examine the legally relevant software.

G.2.2 Software protection

G.2.2.1 Software with closed shell (no access to the operating system
and/or programs possible for the user):\
- Check whether there is a complete set of commands (e.g. function keys
or commands via external interfaces) supplied and accompanied by short
descriptions\
- Check whether the manufacturer has submitted a written declaration of
the completeness of the set of commands

G.2.2.2 Operating system and / or program(s) accessible for the user:\
- Check whether a checksum or equivalent signature is generated over the
machine code of the legally relevant software (program module(s) subject
to legal control and type-specific parameters)\
- Check whether the legally relevant software cannot be started if the
code is falsified using a text editor

G.2.2.3 In addition to the cases G.2.2.1 or G.2.2.2:

> \- Check whether all device-specific parameters are sufficiently
> protected, e.g. by a checksum
>
> \- Check whether there is an audit trail for the protection of the
> device-specific parameters and a description of the audit trail
>
> \- Perform some practical spot checks to test whether the documented
> protections and functions work as described

G.2.3 Software interface(s)

> \- Check whether the program modules of the legally relevant software
> are defined and separated from the modules of the associated software
> by a defined protective software interface
>
> \- Check whether the protective software interface itself is part of
> the legally relevant software
>
> \- Check whether the *functions* of the legally relevant software that
> can be released via the protective software interface are defined and
> described
>
> \- Check whether the *parameters* that may be exchanged via the
> protective software interface are defined and described
>
> \- Check whether the description of the functions and parameters are
> conclusive and complete
>
> \- Check whether each documented function and parameter does not
> contradict to the requirements of this Recommendation
>
> \- Check whether there are appropriate instructions for the
> application programmer (e.g. in the software documentation) concerning
> the protectiveness of the software interface

G.2.4 software identification

> \- Check whether there is an appropriate software identification
> generated over the program module(s) of the legally relevant software
> and the type-specific parameters at runtime of the instrument
>
> \- Check whether the software identification is indicated on manual
> command and can be compared with the reference identification fixed at
> type approval
>
> \- Check whether all relevant program module(s) and type-specific
> parameters of the legally relevant software are included in the
> software identification
>
> \- Check also by some practical spot checks whether the checksums (or
> other signatures) are generated and work as documented
>
> \- Check whether an effective audit trail exists

G.3 Data Storage Devices (5.5.3)

> Review the documentation submitted and check whether the manufacturer
> has foreseen a device - whether incorporated in the instrument or
> connected externally- that is intended to be used for long-term
> storage of legally relevant data. If so:

G.3.1 Check whether the software used for data storage is realised on a
device with embedded software (G.1) or with programmable/ loadable
software (G.2). Apply either G.1 or G.2 to examine the software used for
data storage.

G.3.2 Check whether the data are stored and given back correctly.

> Check whether the storage capacity and the measures to prevent
> inadmissible data loss are described by the manufacturer and are
> sufficient.

G.3.3 Check whether the data stored contain all relevant information
necessary to reconstruct an earlier weighing (relevant information is:
gross or net values and tare values (if applicable, together with a
distinction of tare and preset tare), the decimal signs, the units (eg
kg may be encoded), the identification of the data set, the
identification number of the instrument or load receptor if several
instruments or load receptors are connected to the data storage device,
and a checksum or other signature of the data set stored.

G.3.4 Check whether the data stored are adequately protected against
accidental or intentional changes.

> Check whether the data are protected at least with a parity check
> during transmission to the storage device.
>
> Check whether the data are protected at least with a parity check in
> the case of a storage device with embedded software (5.5.1).
>
> Check whether the data are protected by an adequate checksum or
> signature (at least 2 bytes, e.g. a CRC-16 checksum with hidden
> polynomial) in the case of a storage device with programmable or
> loadable software (5.5.2).

G.3.5 Check whether the data stored are capable of being identified and
displayed, that the identification number(s) is stored for later use and
recorded on the official transaction medium, i.e. it is printed, for
instance, on the print-out.

G.3.6 Check whether the data used for a transaction are stored
automatically, i.e. not depending on the decision of the operating
person.

G.3.7 Check whether stored data sets which are to be verified by means
of the identification are displayed or printed on a device subject to
legal control.

G.4 Evaluation report

> The evaluation report shall contain all relevant information about the
> hardware and software configuration of the PC examined and the test
> results.

BIBLIOGRAPHY

+---+-----------------------------+------------------------------------+
| R | Standards and reference     | Description                        |
| e | documents                   |                                    |
| f |                             |                                    |
| . |                             |                                    |
+===+=============================+====================================+
| / | International Vocabulary of | Vocabulary, prepared by a joint    |
| 1 | Basic and                   | working group consisting of        |
| / |                             | experts appointed by BIPM, IEC,    |
|   | General Terms in Metrology  | IFCC, ISO, IUPAC, IUPAP and OIML   |
|   | (VIM) (1993)                |                                    |
+---+-----------------------------+------------------------------------+
| / | International Vocabulary of | Vocabulary including only the      |
| 2 | Terms in Legal Metrology,   | concepts used in the field of      |
| / | BIML, Paris (2000)          | legal metrology. These concepts    |
|   |                             | concern the activities of the      |
|   |                             | legal metrology service, the       |
|   |                             | relevant documents as well as      |
|   |                             | other problems linked with this    |
|   |                             | activity. Also included in this    |
|   |                             | Vocabulary are certain concepts of |
|   |                             | a general character which have     |
|   |                             | been drawn from the VIM.           |
+---+-----------------------------+------------------------------------+
| / | OIML B 3 (2003)             | Gives rules for issuing,           |
| 3 |                             | registering and using OIML         |
| / | OIML Certificate System for |                                    |
|   | Measuring Instruments       | Certificates of conformity         |
|   | (formerly OIML P1)          |                                    |
+---+-----------------------------+------------------------------------+
| / | OIML D11 (2004)             | Contains general requirements for  |
| 4 |                             | electronic measuring instruments   |
| / | General requirements for    |                                    |
|   | electronic measuring        |                                    |
|   | instruments                 |                                    |
+---+-----------------------------+------------------------------------+
| / | IEC 60068-1 (1988-6),       | Enumerates a series of             |
| 5 | Appendix B                  | environmental tests and            |
| / |                             | appropriate severities, and        |
|   | (including Amendment 1,     | prescribes various atmospheric     |
|   | 1992-4)                     | conditions for measurements for    |
|   |                             | the ability of specimens to        |
|   | Environmental testing. Part | perform under normal conditions of |
|   | 1: General and guidance     | transportation, storage and        |
|   |                             |                                    |
|   |                             | operational use                    |
+---+-----------------------------+------------------------------------+
| / | IEC 60068-2-1 (1990-05)     | Concerns cold tests on both non    |
| 6 | with amendments 1 (1993-02) | heat dissipating and heat          |
| / | and 2 (1994-06)             | dissipating specimens              |
|   |                             |                                    |
|   | Environmental testing, Part |                                    |
|   | 2: Tests, Test A: Cold      |                                    |
+---+-----------------------------+------------------------------------+
| / | IEC 60068-2-2 (1974-01)     | Contains test Ba : dry heat for    |
| 7 | with amendments 1 (1993-02) | non heat dissipating specimen with |
| / | and 2 (1994-05)             | sudden change of temperature;      |
|   |                             |                                    |
|   | Environmental testing Part  | test Bb dry heat for non heat      |
|   | 2: Tests, Test B: Dry heat  | dissipating specimen with gradual  |
|   |                             | change of temperature;             |
|   |                             |                                    |
|   |                             | tests Bc : dry heat for heat       |
|   |                             | dissipating specimen with sudden   |
|   |                             | change of temperature;             |
|   |                             |                                    |
|   |                             | test Bd dry heat for heat          |
|   |                             | dissipating specimen with gradual  |
|   |                             | change of temperature.             |
|   |                             |                                    |
|   |                             | The 1987 reprint includes IEC No.  |
|   |                             | 62-2-2A                            |
+---+-----------------------------+------------------------------------+
| / | IEC 60068-2-78 (2001-08)    | Provides a test method for         |
| 8 |                             | determining the suitability of     |
| / | Environmental testing -     | electrotechnical products,         |
|   | Part 2-78:                  | components or equipment for        |
|   |                             | transportation, storage and use    |
|   | Tests - Test Cab: Damp      | under conditions of high humidity. |
|   | heat, steady state          | The test is primarily intended to  |
|   |                             | permit the observation of the      |
|   | *(IEC 60068-2-78 replaces   | effect of high humidity at         |
|   | the following*              | constant temperature without       |
|   |                             | condensation on the specimen over  |
|   | *withdrawn standards:*      | a prescribed period.               |
|   |                             |                                    |
|   | *IEC 60068-2-3, test Ca     | This test provides a number of     |
|   | and*                        | preferred severities of high       |
|   |                             | temperature, high humidity and     |
|   | *IEC 60068-2-56, test Cb)*  | test duration. The test can be     |
|   |                             | applied to both heat-dissipating   |
|   |                             | and non-heat dissipating           |
|   |                             | specimens. The test is applicable  |
|   |                             | to small equipment or components   |
|   |                             | as well as large equipment having  |
|   |                             | complex interconnections with test |
|   |                             | equipment external to the chamber, |
|   |                             | requiring a set-up time which      |
|   |                             | prevents the use of preheating and |
|   |                             | the maintenance of specified       |
|   |                             | conditions during the installation |
|   |                             | period.                            |
+---+-----------------------------+------------------------------------+
| / | IEC 60068-3-1 (1974-01) +   | Gives background information for   |
| 9 |                             | Tests A: Cold (IEC 68-2-1), and    |
| / | Supplement A (1978-01):     | Tests B: Dry heat (IEC 68-2-2).    |
|   |                             | Includes appendices on the effect  |
|   | Environmental testing Part  | of: chamber size on the surface    |
|   | 3                           | temperature of a specimen when no  |
|   |                             | forced air circulation is used;    |
|   | Background information,     | airflow on chamber conditions. and |
|   | Section 1:                  | on surface temperatures of test    |
|   |                             | specimens; wire termination        |
|   | Cold and dry heat tests     | dimensions and material on surface |
|   |                             | temperature of a component;        |
|   |                             | measurements of temperature, air   |
|   |                             | velocity and emission coefficient. |
|   |                             |                                    |
|   |                             | Supplement A gives additional      |
|   |                             | information for cases where        |
|   |                             | temperature stability is not       |
|   |                             | achieved during the test.          |
+---+-----------------------------+------------------------------------+
| / | IEC 60068-3-4 (2001-08)     | Provides the necessary information |
| 1 |                             | to assist in preparing relevant    |
| 0 | Environmental testing -     | specifications, such as standards  |
| / | Part 3-4:                   | for components or equipment, in    |
|   |                             | order to select appropriate tests  |
|   | Supporting documentation    | and test severities for specific   |
|   | and guidance - Damp heat    | products and, in some cases,       |
|   | tests                       | specific types of application. The |
|   |                             | object of damp heat tests is to    |
|   |                             | determine the ability of products  |
|   |                             | to withstand the stresses          |
|   |                             | occurring in a high relative       |
|   |                             | humidity environment, with or      |
|   |                             | without condensation, and with     |
|   |                             | special regard to variations of    |
|   |                             | electrical and mechanical          |
|   |                             | characteristics. Damp heat tests   |
|   |                             | may also be utilized to check the  |
|   |                             | resistance of a specimen to some   |
|   |                             | forms of corrosion attack.         |
+---+-----------------------------+------------------------------------+
| / | IEC 61000-4-1 (2000-04)     | Gives applicability assistance to  |
| 1 |                             | the users and manufacturers of     |
| 1 | Basic EMC Publication       | electrical and electronic          |
| / |                             | equipment on EMC standards within  |
|   | Electromagnetic             | the IEC 61000-4 series on testing  |
|   | compatibility (EMC)         | and measurement techniques.        |
|   |                             |                                    |
|   | Part 4: Testing and         | Provides general recommendations   |
|   | measurement techniques      | concerning the choice of relevant  |
|   |                             | tests                              |
|   | Section 1: Overview of IEC  |                                    |
|   | 61000-4 series              |                                    |
+---+-----------------------------+------------------------------------+
| / | IEC 61000-4-2 (1995-01)     | Relates to the immunity            |
| 1 | with amendment 1 (1998-01)  | requirements and test methods for  |
| 2 |                             | electrical and electronic          |
| / | Basic EMC Publication       | equipment subjected to static      |
|   |                             | electricity discharges, from       |
|   | Electromagnetic             | operators directly, and to         |
|   | compatibility (EMC)         | adjacent objects. It additionally  |
|   |                             | defines ranges of test levels      |
|   | Part 4: Testing and         | which relate to different          |
|   | measurement techniques      | environmental and installation     |
|   |                             | conditions and establishes test    |
|   | Section 2: Electrostatic    | procedures. The object of this     |
|   | discharge immunity test.    | standard is to establish a common  |
|   |                             | and reproducible basis for         |
|   | Consolidated Edition:       | evaluating the performance of      |
|   |                             | electrical and electronic          |
|   | IEC 61000-4-2 (2001-04) Ed. | equipment when subjected to        |
|   | 1.2                         | electrostatic discharges. In       |
|   |                             | addition, it includes              |
|   | This publication is based   | electrostatic discharges which may |
|   | on IEC 60801-2 (second      | occur from personnel to objects    |
|   | edition: 1991).             | near vital equipment.              |
+---+-----------------------------+------------------------------------+
| / | IEC 61000-4-3 consolidated  | Applies to the immunity of         |
| 1 | Edition 2.1                 | electrical and electronic          |
| 3 |                             | equipment to radiated              |
| / | (2002-09) with amendment 1  | electromagnetic energy.            |
|   | (2002-08)                   | Establishes test levels and the    |
|   |                             | required test procedures.          |
|   | Electromagnetic             | Establishes a common reference for |
|   | compatibility (EMC)         | evaluating the performance of      |
|   |                             | electrical and electronic          |
|   | Part 4: Testing and         | equipment when subjected to        |
|   | measurement                 | radio-frequency electromagnetic    |
|   |                             | fields.                            |
|   | techniques                  |                                    |
|   |                             |                                    |
|   | Section 3: Radiated,        |                                    |
|   | radio-frequency,            |                                    |
|   |                             |                                    |
|   | electromagnetic field       |                                    |
|   | immunity test               |                                    |
+---+-----------------------------+------------------------------------+
| / | IEC 61000-4-4 (2004-07)     | Establishes a common and           |
| 1 |                             | reproducible reference for         |
| 4 | Electromagnetic             |                                    |
| / | compatibility (EMC)         | evaluating the immunity of         |
|   |                             | electrical and electronic          |
|   | Part 4-4: Testing and       |                                    |
|   | measurement                 | equipment when subjected to        |
|   |                             | electrical fast transient/burst on |
|   | techniques - Electrical     | supply, signal, control and earth  |
|   | fast transient/burst        | ports. The test method documented  |
|   |                             | in this part of IEC 61000-4        |
|   | immunity test               | describes a consistent method to   |
|   |                             | assess the immunity of an          |
|   |                             | equipment or system against a      |
|   |                             | defined phenomenon.                |
|   |                             |                                    |
|   |                             | The standard defines:              |
|   |                             |                                    |
|   |                             | -- test voltage waveform;          |
|   |                             |                                    |
|   |                             | -- range of test levels;           |
|   |                             |                                    |
|   |                             | -- test equipment;                 |
|   |                             |                                    |
|   |                             | -- verification procedures of test |
|   |                             | equipment;                         |
|   |                             |                                    |
|   |                             | -- test set-up; and                |
|   |                             |                                    |
|   |                             | -- test procedure.                 |
|   |                             |                                    |
|   |                             | The standard gives specifications  |
|   |                             | for laboratory and                 |
|   |                             | postinstallation tests.            |
+---+-----------------------------+------------------------------------+
| / | IEC 61000-4-5 (2001-04)     | Relates to the immunity            |
| 1 | consolidated                | requirements, test methods, and    |
| 5 |                             | range of recommended test levels   |
| / | edition 1.1 (Including      | for equipment to unidirectional    |
|   | Amendment 1 and             | surges caused by overvoltages from |
|   |                             | switching and lightning            |
|   | Correction 1)               | transients. Several test levels    |
|   |                             | are defined which relate to        |
|   | Electromagnetic             | different environment and          |
|   | compatibility (EMC)- Part   | installation conditions. These     |
|   |                             | requirements are developed for and |
|   | 4-5: Testing and            | are applicable to electrical and   |
|   | measurement techniques -    | electronic equipment. Establishes  |
|   |                             | a common reference for evaluating  |
|   | Surge immunity test         | the performance of equipment when  |
|   |                             | subjected to high-energy           |
|   |                             | disturbances on the power and      |
|   |                             | inter-connection lines.            |
+---+-----------------------------+------------------------------------+
| / | IEC 61000-4-6 (2003-05)     | Relates to the conducted immunity  |
| 1 | with amendment 1 (2004-10)  | requirements of electrical and     |
| 6 |                             | electronic equipment to            |
| / | Electromagnetic             | electromagnetic disturbances       |
|   | compatibility (EMC)         | coming from intended               |
|   |                             | radio-frequency (RF) transmitters  |
|   | Part 4: Testing and         | in the frequency range 9 kHz up to |
|   | measurement techniques      | 80 MHz. Equipment not having at    |
|   |                             | least one conducting cable (such   |
|   | Section 6: Immunity to      | as mains supply, signal line or    |
|   | conducted disturbances,     | earth connection), which can       |
|   | induced by radio-frequency  | couple the equipment to the        |
|   | fields                      | disturbing RF fields is excluded.  |
|   |                             | This standard does not intend to   |
|   |                             | specify the tests to be applied to |
|   |                             | particular apparatus or systems.   |
|   |                             | Its main aim is to give a general  |
|   |                             | basic reference to all concerned   |
|   |                             | product committees of the IEC. The |
|   |                             | product committees (or users and   |
|   |                             | manufacturers of equipment) remain |
|   |                             | responsible for the appropriate    |
|   |                             | choice of the test and the         |
|   |                             | severity level to be applied to    |
|   |                             | their equipment.                   |
+---+-----------------------------+------------------------------------+
| / | IEC 61000-4-11 (2004-03)    | Defines the immunity test methods  |
| 1 |                             | and range of preferred test levels |
| 7 | Electromagnetic             | for electrical and electronic      |
| / | compatibility (EMC)         | equipment connected to low-voltage |
|   |                             | power supply networks for voltage  |
|   | Part 4-11: Testing and      | dips, short interruptions, and     |
|   | measuring techniques -      | voltage variations. This standard  |
|   | Voltage dips, short         | applies to electrical and          |
|   | interruptions and voltage   | electronic equipment having a      |
|   | variations immunity tests   | rated input current not exceeding  |
|   |                             | 16 A per phase, for connection to  |
|   |                             | 50 Hz or 60 Hz AC networks. It     |
|   |                             | does not apply to electrical and   |
|   |                             | electronic equipment for           |
|   |                             | connection to 400 Hz AC networks.  |
|   |                             | Tests for these networks will be   |
|   |                             | covered by future IEC standards.   |
|   |                             | The object of this standard is to  |
|   |                             | establish a common reference for   |
|   |                             | evaluating the immunity of         |
|   |                             | electrical and electronic          |
|   |                             | equipment when subjected to        |
|   |                             | voltage dips, short interruptions  |
|   |                             | and voltage variations. It has the |
|   |                             | status of a Basic EMC Publication  |
|   |                             | in accordance with IEC Guide 107.  |
+---+-----------------------------+------------------------------------+
| / | IEC 61000-6-1 (1997-07)     | Defines the immunity test          |
| 1 |                             | requirements in relation to        |
| 8 | Electromagnetic             | continuous and transient,          |
| / | compatibility (EMC) -       | conducted and radiated             |
|   |                             | disturbances, including            |
|   | Part 6: Generic standards - | electrostatic discharges, for      |
|   | Section 1:                  | electrical and electronic          |
|   |                             | apparatus intended for use in      |
|   | Immunity for residential,   | residential, commercial and        |
|   | commercial and              | light-industrial environment, and  |
|   | light-industrial            | for which no dedicated product or  |
|   | environments                | product-family standard exists.    |
|   |                             | Immunity requirements in the       |
|   |                             | frequency range 0 kHz to 400 GHz   |
|   |                             | are covered and are specified for  |
|   |                             | each port considered. This         |
|   |                             | standard applies to apparatus      |
|   |                             | intended to be directly connected  |
|   |                             | to a low-voltage public mains      |
|   |                             | network or connected to a          |
|   |                             | dedicated DC source which is       |
|   |                             | intended to interface between the  |
|   |                             | apparatus and the low-voltage      |
|   |                             | public mains network.              |
+---+-----------------------------+------------------------------------+
| / | IEC 61000-6-2 (1999-01)     | Applies to electrical and          |
| 1 |                             | electronic apparatus intended for  |
| 9 | Electromagnetic             | use in industrial environments,    |
| / | compatibility (EMC)         | for which no dedicated product or  |
|   |                             | product-family immunity standard   |
|   | Part 6: Generic standards   | exists. Immunity requirements in   |
|   |                             | the frequency range 0 Hz to 400    |
|   | Section 2: Immunity for     | GHz are covered, in relation to    |
|   | industrial environments     | continuous and transient,          |
|   |                             | conducted and radiated             |
|   |                             | disturbances, including            |
|   |                             | electrostatic discharges. Test     |
|   |                             | requirements are specified for     |
|   |                             | each port considered.              |
|   |                             |                                    |
|   |                             | Apparatus intended to be used in   |
|   |                             | industrial locations are           |
|   |                             | characterized by the existence of  |
|   |                             | one or more of the following:      |
|   |                             |                                    |
|   |                             | \- a power network exists powered  |
|   |                             | by a high or medium voltage power  |
|   |                             | transformer dedicated for the      |
|   |                             | supply of an installation feeding  |
|   |                             | manufacturing or similar plant;    |
|   |                             |                                    |
|   |                             | \- industrial, scientific and      |
|   |                             | medical (ISM) apparatus;           |
|   |                             |                                    |
|   |                             | \- heavy inductive or capacitive   |
|   |                             | loads are frequently switched;     |
|   |                             |                                    |
|   |                             | \- currents and associated         |
|   |                             | magnetic fields are high.          |
+---+-----------------------------+------------------------------------+
| / | ISO 7637-1 (2002)           | Defines basic terms used in the    |
| 2 |                             | various parts for electrical       |
| 0 | Road vehicles - Electrical  | disturbance by conduction and      |
| / | disturbance from conducting | coupling.                          |
|   | and coupling -              |                                    |
|   |                             | Gives also general information     |
|   | Part 1: Definitions and     | relating to the whole              |
|   | general considerations      | International Standard and common  |
|   |                             | to all parts.                      |
+---+-----------------------------+------------------------------------+
| / | ISO 7637-2 (2004)           | Specifies bench tests for testing  |
| 2 |                             | the compatibility to conducted     |
| 1 | Road vehicles - electrical  | electrical transients of equipment |
| / | disturbance from conducting | installed on passenger cars and    |
|   | and coupling --             | light commercial vehicles fitted   |
|   |                             | with a 12 V electrical system or   |
|   | Part 2: Electrical          | commercial vehicles fitted with a  |
|   | transient conduction along  | 24 V electrical system. Failure    |
|   | supply lines only           | mode severity classification for   |
|   |                             | immunity to transients is also     |
|   |                             | given. It is applicable to these   |
|   |                             | types of road vehicle, independent |
|   |                             | of the propulsion system (e.g.     |
|   |                             | spark ignition or diesel engine,   |
|   |                             | or electric motor).                |
+---+-----------------------------+------------------------------------+
| / | ISO 7637-3 (1995) with      | Establishes a common basis for the |
| 2 | correction 1 (1995)         | evaluation of the EMC of           |
| 2 |                             | electronic instruments, devices    |
| / | Road vehicles - Electrical  | and equipment in vehicles against  |
|   | disturbance by conducting   | transient transmission by coupling |
|   | and coupling -              | via lines other than supply lines. |
|   |                             | The test intention is the          |
|   | Part 3: Passenger cars and  | demonstration of the immunity of   |
|   | light commercial vehicles   | the instrument, device or          |
|   | with nominal 12 V supply    | equipment when subjected to        |
|   | voltage and commercial      | coupled fast transient             |
|   | vehicles with 24 V supply   | disturbances, such as those caused |
|   | voltage - Electrical        | by switching (switching of         |
|   | transient transmission by   | inductive loads, relay contact     |
|   | capacitive and inductive    | bounce, etc.)                      |
|   | coupling via lines other    |                                    |
|   | than supply lines           |                                    |
+---+-----------------------------+------------------------------------+